SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 SIMATIC Ident Code Reader Systems SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Description 2 ___________________ Safety notices 3 ___________________ Image processing Network and system 4 ___________________ interfacing 5 ___________________ Installation 6 ___________________ Connecting 7 ___________________ Commissioning Operator control and 8 ___________________ monitoring Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) Alarm, fault and system messages 9 ___________ 10 ___________________ 11 ___________________ Service and maintenance 12 ___________________ Technical specifications 13 ___________________ Dimension drawings Components of the 14 ___________________ product/spares/accessories A ___________________ Appendix B ___________________ ESD guidelines List of abbreviations and C ___________________ acronyms 10/2015 C79000-G8976-C334-03 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Process Industries and Drives Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY C79000-G8976-C334-03 09/2015 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2009 - 2015. All rights reserved Preface Validity of these operating instructions This document contains information on the products listed below. Valid for devices/licenses with the following article numbers Article number Device/license 6GF3420-0AA20 SIMATIC MV420 SR-B 6GF3420-0AX20 SIMATIC MV420 SR-B Body 6GF3420-0AA40 SIMATIC MV420 SR-P 6GF3420-0AX40 SIMATIC MV420 SR-P Body 6GF3440-1CD10 SIMATIC MV440 SR 6GF3440-1GE10 SIMATIC MV440 HR 6GF3440-1LE10 SIMATIC MV440 UR 6GF3400-0SL01 SIMATIC MV400 Text-Genius license 6GF3400-0SL02 SIMATIC MV400 Veri-Genius license 6GF3400-0SL03 SIMATIC MV400 Pat-Genius license 6GF3400-1SL01 SIMATIC MV400 Text-Genius-Plus license The readers of the SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 families can be used for all optical identification applications in manufacturing and logistics. Typical applications are product tracking and production control. These operating instructions apply to firmware version 7.0. Product designation In the remainder of this document, the term "reader" or "code reader" is also used instead of the full product name "SIMATIC MV420" or "SIMATIC MV440". Purpose of the operating instructions These operating instructions contain all the information you need for commissioning and using the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 3 Preface They are intended for persons installing the device mechanically, connecting it electrically, assigning the parameters and commissioning it, as well as for service and maintenance engineers. Note The operating instructions contain all the important information about the device Read the operating instructions before starting to work with this device. The operating instructions contain all the important information about the device. Noting and acting on this information: * Ensures the device functions correctly. * Saves you service costs. New in this release Editorial revision of the contents. Integration of new functions compared to firmware V6.8, including PROFINET conformity according to Version 2.2, Conformance Class B - The PROFINET functionality was updated to meet the requirements of the PROFINET user organization (PNO). Usability: Support in setting up the reader - Image sharpness indicator facilitates the focusing of the image even with screen set up at a distance Step timeout in programs - This function allows the distribution of the available cycle time to the program processing steps. This allows the processing result to be optimized, especially in timecritical applications Verification - Web interface for the creation of verification reports according to ISO/IEC 29158 - Expansion of verification function according to ISO/IEC 29158 Sample software - Revised implementation of the archiving program (diagnostics) in C# is contained in the product DVD Result output in the limit range - As of firmware V7.0, each trigger generates a result even if the trigger time is during a running image acquisition Expansion of character recognition/ OCR with Blob segmentation - Display option for discarded segments SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 4 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Preface Additional expansions, including Output option for the actually required step and cycle processing times Monitoring of the digital trigger input (output via idle string) SNMP: Expansion of the functional description Incomplete read codes (such as they are possible with Interleave 2/5) can be reliably filtered out New as of firmware version V6.8 Signed user interface - The current version of user interface is signed by Siemens AG. The user interface therefore satisfies the increased security requirements of the Java Runtime Environment as of version 1.8. The signature ensures that the user interface is actually from Siemens AG. Usability: Hiding the program template - The program template can be hidden to simplify the representation. Start processing (SIMATIC MV440 only) - The image acquisition time can be shortened by reducing the size of the acquired image. This shortens the time interval between the start of the image acquisition and the availability of the processing result Recognizing the object: Accelerated start of processing - The waiting time until the start of the processing mode or until the completion of "Save program" or "Update display" was significantly reduced for use of "Recognize object" steps. Replaced operating instructions These operating instructions replace the operating instructions edition 07/2014. Current operating instructions on the Internet The operating instructions are part of the supplied DVD. You will also find the latest version of these operating instructions on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support under the following entry ID: 23379628 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/ps/15147/man) > Entry list > Entry type "Manuals" Information We point out that the contents of this product documentation shall not become a part of or modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or legal relationship. The Purchase Agreement contains all obligations of Siemens AG and the complete and exclusive warranty conditions. Any statements on the device versions described in the manual do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 5 Preface The contents reflect the technical status at the time of printing. We reserve the right to make technical changes in the course of further development. Contacts worldwide If you require further information or if unexpected problems occur, you can request the necessary information from your contact. You will find details of your local contact on the Internet. Screenshots in the operating instructions The screenshots shown in these operating instructions are based on the user interface display of SIMATIC MV440. The user interface of SIMATIC MV420 is based largely on that of SIMATIC MV440. The description points out functional deviations. See also Reader (Page 400) History This history establishes the correlation between the current documentation and the valid firmware of the device. The documentation of this edition is applicable for the following firmware: Edition Firmware Remark 03/2009 V1.0.0 First edition (SIMATIC MV440 only) 12/2009 V2.1.0 Editorial revision of the contents. 04/2010 V3.0 Editorial revision of the contents. Integration of new functions * Optical character recognition (OCR) option for all SIMATIC MV440 readers * User interface starts in seconds * Advanced control commands for control via RS-232/TCP SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 6 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Preface Edition Firmware Remark 04/2011 V4.0 Editorial revision of the contents. Adjustment for new hardware * Ultra-high resolution for SIMATIC MV440 * Power over Ethernet (PoE) for SIMATIC MV440 * Veri-Genius license * New ring lights for SIMATIC MV440 * IP67 protective lens barrel Integration of new functions, including 09/2012 V5.0 * Support for Track&Trace applications * Expanded image sequence evaluation * Extended diagnostics logs * Remote control of the digital outputs of the reader * Configuration via remote client * Verification according to the ISO/IEC 29158 standard * Support for scanner portal applications * User administration with expanded access protection * License management Editorial revision of the contents. Adjustment for new hardware * SIMATIC MV420 SR B/P BODY * MV420 built-in IR ring light * 16 mm MV420 lens kit * 6 mm MV420 lens kit * MV440 built-in ring light green * MV420 built-in ring light red * MV440 protective lens barrel metal PMMA * Text-Genius Plus license Integration of new functions, including * 04/2013 V5.1 High-performance optical character recognition with the TextGenius Plus license * A modern, user-friendly user interface * Multicode compatibility for scan mode and autotrigger Editorial revision of the contents. Integration of new functions, including * DotCode decoder * Results preview * Open Web API interface * TIA integration with Ident profile without communication module * Control with FB 45 and Ident profile: Initialization with program selection possible. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 7 Preface Edition Firmware Remark 11/2013 V6.0 Editorial revision of the contents. Adjustment for new hardware * SIMATIC MV440 built-in ring light infrared * External ring light red with 24 V power supply (MV400 LED ring light metal red clear) External ring light infrared with 24 V power supply (MV400 LED ring light metal IR clear) Integration of new functions, including * * Object recognition with Pat-Genius license * DMC verification according to ISO/IEC 29158 * Simplified handling for normalization and calibration (for verification) * TCP server function for TCP/IP process interfacing SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 8 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Preface Edition Firmware Remark 07/2014 V6.5 Editorial revision of the contents. Integration of new functions, including * Expanded functions for image diagnostics via the user interface: - Diagnostics images stored in the reader and images stored on the PC can be used. - In order to identify causes of errors, subsequent checking of image acquisitions is enabled. - Enables optimization of program settings in offline mode. * DotCode decoder: This decoder has been further accelerated and significantly increases the reading reliability. * Uncalibrated verification according to ISO/IEC 29158 for all SIMATIC MV440 readers and SIMATIC MV420 SR-P. * * Accelerated object recognition with Pat-Genius: - New speed options accelerate object recognition. - Acceleration of object recognition through use of the specification in the match string. Accelerated character recognition with Text-Genius Plus: - For plain text with high-contrast printing, good alignment, and separation. - Allows up to 1 500 reads/minute (twelve characters plain text). - Allows more than 400 reads/minute for data matrix codes plus four lines plain text OCV. * Release of digital outputs for up to 100 mA: Observe the requirements in the technical specifications (Page 400). * Other improvements and error corrections: See version information for the firmware on the start page of the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 9 Preface Edition Firmware Remark 10/2015 V7.0 Editorial revision of the contents. Integration of new functions compared to firmware V6.8, including * PROFINET conformity according to Version 2.2, Conformance Class B - * Usability: Support in setting up the reader - * * - Web interface for the creation of verification reports according to ISO 29158 - Expansion of verification function according to ISO 29158 Sample software Revised implementation of the archiving program (diagnostics) in C# is contained on the product CD Result output in the limit range - * This function allows the distribution of the available cycle time to the program processing steps. This allows the processing result to be optimized, especially in time-critical applications Verification - * Image sharpness indicator facilitates the focusing of the image even with screen set up at a distance Step timeout in programs - * The PROFINET functionality was updated to meet the requirements of the PROFINET user organization (PNO). As of firmware V7.0, each trigger generates a result even if the trigger time is during a running image acquisition Expansion of character recognition/ OCR with Blob segmentation - Display option for discarded segments Additional expansions, including * Output option for the actually required step and cycle processing times * Monitoring of the digital trigger input (output via idle string) * SNMP: Expansion of the functional description Incomplete read codes (such as they are possible with Interleave 2/5) can be reliably filtered out New as of firmware version V6.8 * * Signed user interface - * The current version of user interface is signed by Siemens AG. The user interface therefore satisfies the increased security requirements of the Java Runtime Environment as of version 1.8. The signature ensures that the user interface is actually from Siemens AG. Usability: Hiding the program template - The program template can be hidden to simplify the representation. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 10 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Preface Edition Firmware Remark 10/2015 V7.0 * Start processing (SIMATIC MV440 only) - * The image acquisition time can be shortened by reducing the size of the acquired image. This shortens the time interval between the start of the image acquisition and the availability of the processing result Recognizing the object: Accelerated start of processing - The waiting time until the start of the processing mode or until the completion of "Save program" or "Update display" was significantly reduced for use of "Recognize object" steps. Environmental protection Devices described in this programming manual can be recycled owing to the low content of noxious substances in their version. Please contact a certified waste disposal company for eco-friendly recycling and to dispose of your old devices. License conditions Note Open source software Read the license conditions for open source software carefully before using the product. You will find license conditions in the following document, which can be found on the supplied data medium: OSS License Summary.pdf (> Documentation > Licenses & Copyrights) Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. For more information about industrial security, visit http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity. To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. For more information, visit https://support.industry.siemens.com. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 11 Preface Note Changing default passwords For security reasons, make sure to change the delivery-state passwords: * Use only secure passwords. * To make sure that you have access to user administration and the security settings in the future, keep the passwords in a safe place. Trademarks The following and possibly other names not identified by the registered trademark sign (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG: SIMATIC, SIMATIC MV, SIMATIC RF, SIMATIC NET SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 12 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Description ............................................................................................................................................ 19 1.1 Area of application ..................................................................................................................19 1.2 Product characteristics............................................................................................................22 1.3 Design of the SIMATIC MV420 ...............................................................................................26 1.4 Design of the SIMATIC MV440 ...............................................................................................27 1.5 Structure of the nameplate .....................................................................................................28 1.6 System components ...............................................................................................................29 1.7 System requirements ..............................................................................................................30 1.8 Functional description .............................................................................................................32 2 Safety notices ....................................................................................................................................... 35 3 Image processing.................................................................................................................................. 39 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.1.1 3.1.1.2 3.1.2 3.1.2.1 3.1.2.2 3.1.2.3 3.1.2.4 3.1.2.5 3.1.2.6 3.1.3 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) ..........................................................................................39 Area of application and sample applications ..........................................................................39 Applications for two-dimensional codes..................................................................................40 Applications for one-dimensional codes .................................................................................42 Performance characteristics when reading codes ..................................................................45 Demanding data matrix codes and VeriCodes with "ID-Genius" recognition .........................45 Good quality data matrix codes ..............................................................................................47 QR codes ................................................................................................................................48 PDF417 codes ........................................................................................................................49 DotCodes ................................................................................................................................50 One-dimensional codes ..........................................................................................................51 Reading multiple codes in the image ......................................................................................53 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.3.1 3.2.3.2 3.2.3.3 3.2.3.4 3.2.4 3.2.4.1 3.2.4.2 3.2.4.3 3.2.4.4 3.2.4.5 3.2.4.6 3.2.5 Code verification .....................................................................................................................55 Overview .................................................................................................................................55 Grading ...................................................................................................................................57 Verification methods for different application scenarios .........................................................57 Verification of printed labels ....................................................................................................57 Verification of direct part marks ..............................................................................................58 Examples of defects in the marking quality ............................................................................60 Verification standards supported ............................................................................................61 Data matrix verification ...........................................................................................................63 Siemens DPM .........................................................................................................................63 ISO/IEC 16022 ........................................................................................................................65 ISO/IEC 15415 ........................................................................................................................66 AS9132 Rev. A .......................................................................................................................68 ISO/IEC 29158 ........................................................................................................................70 Graphical support for analysis of verification errors ...............................................................73 Barcode verification ................................................................................................................73 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 13 Table of contents 4 3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.7.1 3.2.7.2 3.2.8 3.2.9 3.2.9.1 3.2.9.2 3.2.9.3 3.2.9.4 3.2.9.5 3.2.9.6 3.2.9.7 3.2.9.8 3.2.9.9 3.2.9.10 DotCode quality evaluation .................................................................................................... 75 Calibration and activating verification .................................................................................... 76 Calibrating the reader ............................................................................................................ 77 Basic requirements ................................................................................................................ 78 Formatted output of the verification ....................................................................................... 79 Verification result.................................................................................................................... 81 Standard report for Siemens DPM ......................................................................................... 82 Standard report for ISO/IEC 16022 "Standard" decoder ....................................................... 83 Standard report for ISO/IEC 16022 "ID-Genius" decoder...................................................... 83 Standard report for ISO/IEC 15415........................................................................................ 84 Standard report for AS9132, Rev A ....................................................................................... 85 Standard report for ISO/IEC 29158........................................................................................ 86 Standard report for ISO/IEC 15416........................................................................................ 86 Standard report for OCR and OCV ........................................................................................ 88 Standard report for Locator .................................................................................................... 88 Standard report for DotCode.................................................................................................. 88 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) ........................................................................................................................... 90 Text-Genius and Text-Genius Plus ........................................................................................ 90 Performance features of Text-Genius character recognition ................................................. 90 Performance features of Text-Genius Plus character recognition ......................................... 92 Supervised training ................................................................................................................ 93 Examples of plain text applications: ....................................................................................... 93 Quality characteristics in optical character recognition ........................................................ 100 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only) ............................................... 101 The term "object recognition" ............................................................................................... 101 Performance features of Pat-Genius object recognition ...................................................... 102 Examples of object recognition tasks with Pat-Genius ........................................................ 104 Operation ............................................................................................................................. 109 Quality features during object detection .............................................................................. 110 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.5.1 3.5.5.2 Options for image acquisition and image processing .......................................................... 112 "Single trigger" image acquisition option ............................................................................. 113 "Auto trigger" image acquisition option ................................................................................ 114 "Scan" image acquisition option........................................................................................... 116 Image acquisition in program sequence mode .................................................................... 118 Match options for Track&Trace tasks .................................................................................. 119 Trigger-synchronized matching (XMATCH command) ........................................................ 119 Simple match (MATCH mode and MATCH match) ............................................................. 122 Network and system interfacing ...........................................................................................................125 4.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 125 4.2 System setup via PROFIBUS DP with ASM 456 and FB45 or Ident profile ........................ 126 4.3 System setup via PROFINET IO with RF180C, FB45 or Ident profile ................................. 128 4.4 System setup of the reader as PROFINET IO device and FB79 or Ident profile ................ 129 4.5 System setup via the RS-232 interface ............................................................................... 131 4.6 System setup via the Ethernet interface .............................................................................. 132 4.7 System setup for reader and RFID reader on a communication module ............................ 134 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 14 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Table of contents 5 6 7 8 4.8 System setup for the reader with auto-trigger ......................................................................135 4.9 System setup reader and WinCC flexible .............................................................................136 4.10 System setup for the reader and HTML browser ..................................................................137 4.11 System setup of reader and external light ............................................................................138 4.12 Other system extensions ......................................................................................................139 Installation .......................................................................................................................................... 141 5.1 Important notes on installation ..............................................................................................141 5.2 Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440........................................................................142 5.3 Installing the LED ring light for SIMATIC MV440 ..................................................................146 Connecting ......................................................................................................................................... 149 6.1 Guidelines for installation free of electrical interference .......................................................149 6.2 Power over Ethernet (PoE) ...................................................................................................150 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 Connecting the components .................................................................................................151 Wiring example .....................................................................................................................157 Operating the reader with external lighting ...........................................................................159 Commissioning ................................................................................................................................... 165 7.1 Prerequisites .........................................................................................................................165 7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface ...............................167 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 Transferring optional licenses ...............................................................................................177 Installing a license.................................................................................................................177 Removing a license...............................................................................................................187 7.4 Selecting connection alternatives .........................................................................................188 Operator control and monitoring .......................................................................................................... 191 8.1 Overview ...............................................................................................................................191 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.2.4.1 8.2.4.2 8.2.4.3 8.2.4.4 8.2.4.5 8.2.4.6 8.2.4.7 8.2.5 8.2.5.1 8.2.5.2 8.2.5.3 8.2.6 8.2.7 User interface ........................................................................................................................192 Structure of the user interface ..............................................................................................192 Adjustment - Adjust image ....................................................................................................199 Connections ..........................................................................................................................203 Programs ..............................................................................................................................208 Graphic elements of the user interface .................................................................................210 Image acquisition step ..........................................................................................................212 Read code (decoder step) ....................................................................................................215 Read plain text (OCR step) ...................................................................................................219 Recognize object (locator step) ............................................................................................223 Result step (overall result) ....................................................................................................227 Save step ..............................................................................................................................228 Libraries ................................................................................................................................229 Verification library .................................................................................................................229 Character font library ............................................................................................................233 Model library .........................................................................................................................238 Run........................................................................................................................................242 Options ..................................................................................................................................245 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 15 Table of contents 9 8.2.8 8.2.9 8.2.10 Info ....................................................................................................................................... 251 Maintain ................................................................................................................................ 257 Stop ...................................................................................................................................... 260 8.3 8.3.1 User-defined user interface .................................................................................................. 262 Example of a user-defined user interface ............................................................................ 262 8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages ................................................................................................. 266 8.5 8.5.1 8.5.2 Use of saved images ........................................................................................................... 276 Use in the "Edit programs" task ........................................................................................... 276 Use for processing in trial mode .......................................................................................... 277 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) .....................................................................279 9.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO ............................................................................... 280 Configuration for using the Ident profile ............................................................................... 283 Configuration for using the FB 79 ........................................................................................ 284 Concept of device replacement ........................................................................................... 285 9.2 Integration via communication module (ASM) ..................................................................... 286 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.3.1 9.3.3.2 9.3.3.3 9.3.3.4 9.3.3.5 9.3.3.6 9.3.3.7 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile .................................................................................... 287 Setting parameters of FB45 ................................................................................................. 287 Configuring the Ident profile (RFID standard profile) ........................................................... 289 Control with MV commands via FB 45 or Ident profile......................................................... 291 Status displays of the MV reader ......................................................................................... 291 Initialization .......................................................................................................................... 292 WRITE commands/MV command interface ......................................................................... 293 READ commands................................................................................................................. 305 Result evaluation of a command.......................................................................................... 310 Preconditions for the commands ......................................................................................... 311 Group errors ......................................................................................................................... 312 9.4 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4 9.4.4.1 Control with FB79................................................................................................................. 314 Assignment of the interfaces relevant to PROFINET IO ..................................................... 315 Sample program for data exchange if code length 27 bytes ............................................ 319 Programming data fragmentation ........................................................................................ 321 Function block 79 "VS130-2_CONTROL" ............................................................................ 322 Error information of FB79 ..................................................................................................... 332 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO".................................................................................... 334 Control signals ..................................................................................................................... 334 Selecting modes................................................................................................................... 335 9.6 9.6.1 9.6.2 9.6.3 9.6.4 9.6.5 9.6.6 9.6.7 9.6.8 9.6.9 9.6.10 9.6.11 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 ........................................................................................... 340 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 340 Trigger .................................................................................................................................. 341 Write match string ................................................................................................................ 341 Set DISA bit.......................................................................................................................... 343 Reset DISA bit...................................................................................................................... 343 Query status ......................................................................................................................... 344 Select program number ....................................................................................................... 345 Save program with internal trigger ....................................................................................... 346 Save program with external trigger ...................................................................................... 347 Reset command ................................................................................................................... 348 Writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH) ...................................................... 349 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 16 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Table of contents 10 11 9.6.12 9.6.13 XMATCH user data (without header) ....................................................................................350 Set digital out ........................................................................................................................354 9.7 9.7.1 9.7.2 Scanner portal application ....................................................................................................356 Configuration .........................................................................................................................357 Output of the synchronized read result by the master reader ..............................................361 9.8 9.8.1 9.8.1.1 9.8.1.2 Remote client ........................................................................................................................361 XML backup and XML restore ..............................................................................................361 XML backup ..........................................................................................................................362 XML restore ..........................................................................................................................364 9.9 SNMP ....................................................................................................................................368 9.10 9.10.1 9.10.2 9.10.3 Sample programs ..................................................................................................................369 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................369 Interfacing the reader with a SIMATIC controller using FB79 ..............................................369 Archiving of images and diagnostic information on a PC .....................................................371 Alarm, fault and system messages ...................................................................................................... 375 10.1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................375 10.2 10.2.1 10.2.2 10.2.3 10.2.4 10.2.5 10.2.6 Reporting diagnostics information ........................................................................................375 Error messages .....................................................................................................................376 Warnings and notes ..............................................................................................................382 Read results ..........................................................................................................................384 Read and verification error messages ..................................................................................384 Filter error messages ............................................................................................................388 Error messages when writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH) ...................389 10.3 Diagnostics by evaluating the POWER, ETHERNET, STATE/SF LEDs ..............................390 10.4 10.4.1 10.4.2 10.4.3 I/O device diagnostics ...........................................................................................................391 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................391 Reading out diagnostics information with S7 ........................................................................391 Diagnostics with PROFINET IO ............................................................................................392 Service and maintenance .................................................................................................................... 395 11.1 12 Maintenance and repair ........................................................................................................395 Technical specifications ...................................................................................................................... 397 12.1 General technical specifications ...........................................................................................397 12.2 Reader ..................................................................................................................................400 12.3 Built-in ring light (SIMATIC MV440) ......................................................................................403 12.4 External lighting unit..............................................................................................................403 12.5 Pin assignment of the interfaces ...........................................................................................405 13 Dimension drawings ............................................................................................................................ 407 14 Components of the product/spares/accessories .................................................................................. 415 14.1 Readers ................................................................................................................................416 14.2 14.2.1 14.2.1.1 Accessories ...........................................................................................................................418 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 .....................................................................................418 Further accessories ..............................................................................................................418 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 17 Table of contents 14.2.1.2 14.2.1.3 14.2.2 14.2.2.1 14.2.2.2 14.2.2.3 14.2.2.4 14.2.2.5 14.2.3 14.2.3.1 14.2.3.2 14.2.3.3 14.2.3.4 14.2.3.5 14.2.3.6 14.2.3.7 14.2.3.8 A External lighting units ........................................................................................................... 418 Documentation for SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 ................................................ 420 SIMATIC MV420 .................................................................................................................. 421 Fittings for mounting ............................................................................................................ 421 Reader lens .......................................................................................................................... 421 Protective tube ..................................................................................................................... 423 Built-in ring light.................................................................................................................... 423 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 424 SIMATIC MV440 .................................................................................................................. 427 Fittings for mounting ............................................................................................................ 427 Reader lens .......................................................................................................................... 428 Protective lens barrel ........................................................................................................... 433 Built-in ring light.................................................................................................................... 435 Licenses ............................................................................................................................... 435 Calibration card .................................................................................................................... 436 PoE switch ........................................................................................................................... 437 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 437 Appendix .............................................................................................................................................441 A.1 Service and Support ............................................................................................................ 441 A.2 Directives and declarations .................................................................................................. 442 B ESD guidelines ....................................................................................................................................445 C List of abbreviations and acronyms ......................................................................................................447 Glossary ..............................................................................................................................................451 Index ...................................................................................................................................................461 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 18 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 1 Description 1.1 Area of application The SIMATIC MV400 family of readers are optical code readers designed specifically for the recognition and processing of numerous machine-readable codes and plain text in industrial production. The readers provide a wide range of options for identification: Reading numerous machine-readable 1D and 2D codes Reading plain text Model-based object recognition/classification A combination of the options listed above Over and above this, the readers provide important functions for: Verification of the marking quality of machine-readable codes (according to standards) "OK"/"N_OK" evaluation based on numerous criteria. Position and orientation recognition, for example for "pick & place" tasks. In the SIMATIC MV400 device family, particular emphasis was placed on: Ruggedness Reliability Ease of operation This applies not only to the mechanical properties but also to the high-quality image processing functions of all devices in the SIMATIC MV400 product family. Key functions of the reader Reading machine-readable markings The list of readable codes includes all common matrix and barcodes that can usually be detected reliably regardless of the print technique or the carrier medium used. Reading plain text For reading plain text, font libraries are stored for all commonly found fonts and these already cover many important applications. For special fonts and applications, userdefined character libraries can also be created and adapted optimally to the particular application. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 19 Description 1.1 Area of application Model-based object recognition With the integrated object recognition, objects can be recognized, distinguished and checked. In addition to this, extremely precise position and orientation recognition is possible. Objects can be stored in so-called model libraries and are then available for a variety of recognition and checking tasks. Verification of the marking quality One important function for quality control in production or even between different production units is ensuring the readability of machine-readable codes. Uniform standards worldwide allow comparisons to be made. SIMATIC MV400 code readers provide the required verification reports for quality assurance. "OK"/"N_OK" evaluation Whether for checking quality criteria, comparison criteria, position or angle of rotation deviation with the help of SIMATIC MV400, actuators can be controlled directly to take workpieces that do not match the requirements out of the production process. Position and orientation recognition The model-based object recognition Pat-Genius returns extremely precise position and angle information relating to the detected object position. Available versions SIMATIC MV420 Available preassembled or ready to connect up with integrated lens and lighting. Class of protection IP67: Protected against environmental influence. Can be flexibly configured since it is available in parts (base unit, ring light, lens). SIMATIC MV440 Can be supplied with particularly powerful integrated lighting due to its own power output stage. The device can be adjusted for nearly all read distances and code sizes with a C/CS mount lens. IP67 degree of protection is also possible for this version with the protective lens barrel. SIMATIC MV440 is also available in 3 different resolutions. Industrial applications Due to their ruggedness and high degree of protection, the readers are suitable for industrial applications in which optical identification tasks are necessary. This applies equally to production processes and logistics processes. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 20 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Description 1.1 Area of application Communication Interfaces The readers have all the common communications interfaces of industrial sensors and can therefore be connected to a wide variety of systems. Through the communications module interface, they can be seamlessly combined with the communications modules (ASM/CM) of the RFID system, for example, via PROFIBUS. Simple operation and commissioning Despite the wide range of possible applications, a main feature of the readers is their ease of operation and commissioning. For most applications, the parameters are set automatically. If, however, readjustment becomes necessary, the parameters can be assigned using the integrated Web server and an Internet browser without prior software installation. As of release 04/2011, all SIMATIC MV440 readers can also be suppled by Power over Ethernet (PoE) which further simplifies installation. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 21 Description 1.2 Product characteristics 1.2 Product characteristics The reader is a compact camera system with an integrated processing unit for industrial applications with the following product characteristics. Reading code For codes with maximum quality, the read reliability for data matrix code is 99.999 % (compare quality grading). Reading speed: - Max. of 80 reads per second (Rps) in SIMATIC MV440 SR - Max. of 70 Rps (SIMATIC MV420 SR-P) SIMATIC MV440 only: Variable read distance thanks to exchangeable lenses (typically: 100 mm to 3000 mm) Object speed up to 10 m/s Code sizes (example: DMC) from 1 mm2 to 200 mm2 Autotrigger and scan mode (not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B) Up to 15 parameter sets and code reading settings can be stored and selected (up to 5 with SIMATIC MV420 SR-B). Up to 150 codes can be read per image acquisition (SIMATIC MV440 UR) Reading plain text With Text-Genius license High-performance optical character recognition (OCR) is available for all SIMATIC MV440 readers as of firmware version V3.0. The license can be ordered under the article number 6GF3400-0SL01. Flexible reading of numerous fonts without time-consuming training Fast and reliable reading (up to 1 000 reads per minute) Plain text and up to 50 machine codes (SIMATIC MV440 UR: 150) read simultaneously Automatic text localization Automatic line detection (up to 12 x 15 lines) Flexible reading of character heights of between 15 and 220 pixels Up to 12 image regions can be read with independent settings. Reading of mirrored, rotated and inverted text Numerous filter and comparison functions SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 22 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Description 1.2 Product characteristics With Text-Genius Plus license Read tasks and functions above and beyond reading plain text with Text-Genius. The license can be ordered under the article number 6GF3400-1SL01. Suitable for all SIMATIC-MV440-readers as of firmware V5.0 Can be adapted to customer-specific fonts Optimizes distinction of ambiguous characters by saving character styles. Object detection With Pat-Genius license Suitable for all SIMATIC-MV440-readers as of firmware V6.0. Model-based object recognition Precise position and rotation recognition Resilient to fluctuations in object sizes (scaling) Resilient to masking, contamination and mirroring Reliable distinction of objects even when the objects are very similar Several objects of the same or different types can be recognized in one step OCR with any shape of symbol Checks for the completeness of workpieces Checks for the tolerance of the position and angle of rotation Position specification for OCR with Text-Genius and Text-Genius Plus Code verification Without Veri-Genius license Without Veri-Genius license, the following methods are possible for determining the code quality for all SIMATIC-MV440 readers and for SIMATIC MV420 SR-P: Code verification according to ISO/IEC 16022:2000 AIM specification Uncalibrated verification according to ISO/IEC 29158 (firmware version V6.5 or higher) With Veri-Genius license With Veri-Genius license (article number 6GF3400-0SL02, firmware version 4.0 or higher), the following verification methods are possible for all SIMATIC-MV440 readers: ISO/IEC 15415:2004 AS9132 Rev A, 2005 - previously IAQG ISO/IEC 29158:2011 ISO/IEC 15416:2000 - ANSI X3.182-1990 Siemens DPM SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 23 Description 1.2 Product characteristics Integrated communications interfaces Ethernet 10/100 Mbps for TCP/IP and PROFINET IO 1 trigger input and 1 flash output - Response time of the trigger input: 50-70 us - Jitter (fluctuation of response time): max. 40 ns Incoming triggers during an already running image acquisition do not interrupt it. Triggers that are incoming during an image acquisition are processed as NOK processing procedures and included in the processing statistics count (new as of V7.0). SIMATIC MV420 - MOBY-ASM or RS-232 with TxD and RxD - 2 customizable digital outputs SIMATIC MV440 - RFID communications module interface - RS-232 with TXD and RXD - 4 cutomizable digital I/Os Advanced communication via MOBY-ASM With ASM 456 communications module for PROFIBUS DP/V1 With RF180C communications module for PROFINET With other MOBY communications modules Power over Ethernet For all SIMATIC-MV440-readers as of version 04/2011. Robust construction, suitable for industry Class of protection IP67 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 24 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Description 1.2 Product characteristics Optical system SIMATIC MV420 - Integrated continuously adjustable optic for different read distances - HD lens with 16 mm field of vision now available in addition to the 6 mm standard lens for extremely small codes and large read distances. SIMATIC MV440 - Lens can be selected - C/CS-mount lenses Lighting With internal lamp With external lamp User interface Via integrated Web server, no installation needed Extensive operator control and monitoring functions, even in processing mode Versatile HTML pages for monitoring the reader, for example in WinCC flexible. Extensive operator control and monitoring functions, even in processing mode Wide-ranging diagnostics and logging functions: - Error image memory - Event logging Firmware update System backup and restoration Option of user-defined, integrated user interfaces SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 25 Description 1.3 Design of the SIMATIC MV420 1.3 Design of the SIMATIC MV420 The figure below provides an overview of the SIMATIC-MV420-reader. Rotatable protective lens barrel Nameplate Ethernet socket LED displays for operating mode Housing SIMATIC MV420 Internal lamp Combined cable socket for the power supply, I/O connectors and RS232/MOBY-ASM Figure 1-1 Design of the SIMATIC MV420 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 26 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Description 1.4 Design of the SIMATIC MV440 1.4 Design of the SIMATIC MV440 The figure below provides an overview of the SIMATIC MV440 reader. LED display for operating mode Nameplate Protective lens barrel 65 Ethernet connection socket (PoE) M12, 4pin, D-coded Figure 1-2 ASM female connector Housing SIMATIC MV440 Combined cable socket for the power supply, I/O connectors and RS-232 Internal lamp Design of the SIMATIC MV440 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 27 Description 1.5 Structure of the nameplate 1.5 Structure of the nameplate The nameplate is located on the housing of the reader and shows the article number and other important product information. Nameplate right Manufacturer Product designation Warning symbol C-Tick mark CE mark Nameplate left Data matrix code Product designation with article number and manufacturer code/serial number IP rating MAC address, 12-character Product version of the device KC symbol Figure 1-3 Example of the SIMATIC MV440 nameplate Note A second MAC address is also reserved when the device supplied. This MAC address is the MAC address on the nameplate + 1. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 28 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Description 1.6 System components 1.6 System components The figure below shows a typical system design with a SIMATIC-MV440-reader. Figure 1-4 Example of a typical system configuration with conveyor system (illustration showing SIMATIC MV440) Note While the SIMATIC MV440 has a separate ASM socket (middle socket in the figure), the ASM interface function on the SIMATIC MV420 is integrated in the power IO RS-232 socket. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 29 Description 1.7 System requirements 1.7 System requirements Reader To equip an application with the SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 readers, you require the following hardware components: SIMATIC MV420 or SIMATIC MV440 basic unit Lens suitable for the code size and read distance (only for SIMATIC MV440) LED ring light, integrated in the protective barrel or external such as lighting unit for the SIMATIC Vision Sensors (SIMATIC MV440 only) Depending on the application (SIMATIC MV440 only): - Veri-Genius license for code verification - Text-Genius or Text-Genius Plus license for reading plain text - Pat-Genius license for object recognition tasks Power supply 24 V DC, 2 A (tolerance: 19.2 ... 28.8 V) - As an alternative over I/O cable or ASM cable - Alternatively over Power Over Ethernet (SIMATIC MV440 and SIMATIC Body variants only) Alternative communications connection over: - RS-232 integrated in the I/O cable - ASM cable - Ethernet cable Note If you use a reader in conjunction with a MOBY communications module, the power supply is via the ASM interface. For SIMATIC MV420, you need a special ASM cable, article no. 6GT3420-0AC002CB0. See also section "Cables" (Page 418). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 30 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Description 1.7 System requirements PC/programming device Apart from the components for operating the reader, you also require a PC/programming device (PG) to commission the device: PC / PG with at least the following configuration: - Ethernet interface with at least 100 Mbps Software: - Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP1 or higher - Internet Explorer V8.0, SP1 or higher (32-bit version). - Java Runtime Environment, see java homepage (http://www.java.com). Recommended: Java Runtime Environment 1.7.x. The system requirements of SIMATIC-MV400-readers for communication partners in the process depend on the selected communication connection described in Network and system interfacing (Page 125). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 31 Description 1.8 Functional description 1.8 Functional description Image acquisition The readers detect the object features required for the task using digital image acquisition. Following image acquisition, the image is analyzed by a powerful digital signal processor. Depending on the application, multilevel complex algorithms are used during the analysis: To find and decode the codes contained in the image. To verify codes. To find and read the plain text in the image. To perform object recognition. The results of the evaluation are transferred to an automation system connected via the communications interfaces. When using the reader, the user is supported by numerous feedback messages: Live image display Autodetection for code type recognition Result and quality preview Display of diagnostics images Warning and error messages 6-language online help on the reader User interface The user interface is based on Web server technology. This means that only a computer with an Internet browser connected via Ethernet is necessary. The reader is then called using its IP address. The display of the user interface appears in the display window of the Internet browser. Display via Ethernet allows convenient setting and control of all parameters of the reader. Operator control of the readers is supported by context-sensitive online help. If an automatic setting does not produce an ideal result due to special conditions, you can readjust individual parameters of the reader manually using the user interface. You can store 15 different settings on the reader. Depending on the task, up to 12 processing steps can be set as a sequence in one program. The following processing steps are available: Decoder step for reading 1D/2D codes OCR step for reading plain text Locator step for object recognition tasks You can store up to 15 different programs on the reader. You must make the settings for communication with other devices on the user interface. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 32 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Description 1.8 Functional description Processing The actual processing is triggered by different events. In the simplest situation, the code reader generates the trigger event itself. The readers have an auto trigger function for this purpose. Depending on the application, it may be advisable to provide the trigger event via the I/O cable. In this case, the code reader obtains the signal, for example, from a light barrier. The trigger signal immediately triggers image acquisition followed by evaluation. The result of the evaluation is then transferred to the higher-level control system through the selected communications connection. Once the evaluation result has been transferred, reading can be started again. User management and access protection The functions of the reader can be protected from unauthorized access and manipulation. The access rights can be assigned to various personified users in the form of user roles. Configuration via remote client The configuration of the reader can be backed up and restored automatically, for example, when there is a shift change, using a connected PC. This means the validation of your production plant can be restored at the press of a button. Track&Trace support With comprehensive match options and remote commands, badly marked parts can be reliably ejected with the aid of the integrated digital outputs. This also applies to applications with high parts rates and speeds. Scanner portal support If the ultra-high resolution of the SIMATIC MV440 UR reader means that the large field of view is not adequate for covering a transport path in a given application, multiple SIMATIC-MV400-readers can be configured as the portal. The readers synchronize with each other. The master reader transfers the read result of the portal to the higher-level controller. Diagnostics functions The reader has a wide range of diagnostics functions. If incorrect readings are made, the diagnostics functions can be used to find reasons for the errors based on the recorded images. This is, for example, necessary when problems occurred in the prior marking process. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 33 Description 1.8 Functional description SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 34 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Safety notices 2 This device conforms to the pertinent safety regulations according to IEC, VDE and EN. If you have questions about whether it is permissible to install the device in the planned environment, please contact your service representative. Qualified personnel Startup and operation of the device/system in question must only be performed using this documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Qualified personnel as referred to in the safety guidelines in this documentation are those who are authorized to start up, earth and label units, systems and circuits in accordance with the relevant safety standards. Proper use The unit may be used only for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description, and only in combination with the equipment, components and devices of other manufacturers where recommended or permitted by Siemens. This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended. Repairs Repairs to the device may only be performed by authorized specialists. WARNING Risk of injury/material damage Unauthorized opening or improperly performed repairs can cause considerable damage to property or danger to users. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 35 Safety notices System expansions Install only system expansions that are intended for this device. Installing other expansions can damage the system or violate the safety provisions and regulations for radio interference suppression. You can obtain information on system expansions suitable for installation from the technical customer service or from the sales office responsible for your area. NOTICE Invalidation of the warranty Any damage to the device caused by installing or replacing system expansion products will void the warranty. NOTICE Voltage can destroy electrostatic-sensitive modules The device contains modules that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Modules that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge can be destroyed by voltages well below those that can be perceived by human beings. Such voltages occur if you touch a component or electrical connectors of a module without first discharging the static from your body. The damage caused by overvoltage on a module cannot normally be detected immediately and only becomes apparent after a longer period of operation. Measures for protecting against discharge of static electricity: * Before working with modules, make sure that you discharge static from your body, for example by touching a grounded object. * The devices and tools used must also be free of static charges. * Disconnect the power supply. * Pick up the modules only on their edges and do not touch any pins or printed conductors. Connecting the 24 V DC power supply WARNING The device should only be connected to a 24 V DC power supply which satisfies the requirements of safe extra low voltage (SELV). When the device is operated on a wall, in an open rack or other similar locations, an NEC Class 2 current source is required for the compliance of the UL requirements (according to UL 60950-1). In all other cases (according to IEC/EN/DlN EN 60950-1), a current source with limited power (LPS = Limited Power Source) is required. 24 V DC supply voltage (19.2 to 28.8 V) The generation of the 24 V DC supply voltage by the line-side power supply must be implemented as functional extra-low voltage with safe electrical isolation according (floating) to IEC 80364-4-41, or as SELV to IEC/EN/DlN EN 60950-1 and LPS/NEC class 2. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 36 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Safety notices Overvoltage protection NOTICE Protection of the external power supply If the reader is supplied via extensive supply lines or networks, interference by strong electromagnetic pulses on the supply lines is possible, e.g. from lightning or the switching of large loads. The connection of the external power supply is not protected against strong electromagnetic pulses. An external overvoltage protection module is required for this purpose. The requirements according to EN 61000-4-5, Surge test on power supply lines, are only met when a suitable protective element is used. A suitable device would be, for example, the Dehn Blitzductor BVT AVD 24, article number 918 422, or a comparable protective element. Manufacturer: DEHN+SOHNE GmbH+Co.KG Hans Dehn Str.1 Postfach 1640 D-92306 Neumarkt, Germany Use in an area of plants with high-energy radiation NOTICE Protection of the image sensor from damaging radiation When the SIMATIC MV440 reader is used in an environment of plants with high-energy radiation, for example, laser light or arcs, the image sensor of the reader must be protected from damaging radiation. The image sensor is protected by means of suitable daylight filters: * Radiation outside the visible light spectrum (IR and UV radiation) is filtered out. * Visible light can pass without problem. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 37 Safety notices SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 38 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) 3.1.1 Area of application and sample applications 3 The reader reads the types of code listed below. Two-dimensional codes DMC PDF417 QR DotCode VeriCode (requires additional license) One-dimensional codes Codabar Code 32 Code 39 (without checksum) Code 39+CS (with checksum) Code 93 Code 128 EAN 8 EAN 13 GS1 Databar Expanded GS1 Databar Limited GS1 Databar Omnidirectional GS1 Databar Stacked Int. 2/5 (without checksum) Int. 2/5+CS (with checksum) Pharmacode Postnet SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 39 Image processing 3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) UPC-A UPC-E 3.1.1.1 Applications for two-dimensional codes Below, you will find several examples of data matrix codes, QR codes, PDF417 codes, VeriCodes and DotCodes: Printed code Laser code (plastic surface) Laser code (pcb) Code created with an ink jet printer. Punched code Data Matrix ECC080 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 40 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) Data Matrix ECC100 Data Matrix ECC140 Printed QR code Printed PDF417 code VeriCode DotCodes SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 41 Image processing 3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) 3.1.1.2 Applications for one-dimensional codes Codabar Code 32 Code 39 Code 93 Code 128 EAN 8 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 42 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) EAN 13 Interleaved 2/5 GS1 Databar Expanded GS1 Databar Limited GS1 Databar Omnidirectional GS1 Databar Stacked SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 43 Image processing 3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) Postnet Pharmacode UPC A UPC E SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 44 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) 3.1.2 Performance characteristics when reading codes 3.1.2.1 Demanding data matrix codes and VeriCodes with "ID-Genius" recognition Note ID-Genius not available for SIMATIC-MV420 SR-B-readers The ID-Genius recognition method is not available for SIMATIC-MV420 SR-B-readers. Note VeriCode support only with activated VeriCode(R) license VeriCode is only supported by readers with an activated VeriCode(R) license. The license can be activated by entering a license key in the user interface. Note Changing to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution If the cells are larger than 10 pixels, change to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution. This change is also useful at high object speeds. The self-adaptive recognition technique of the reader "ID-Genius" allows reliable and robust reading of the most difficult codes. The most reliable recognition is reached by the reader when you make adequate time available for the device to adapt itself by setting a high cycle time limit. Range of application Any alignment and position of the code in the image. The code can be printed both dark on a light background and light on a dark background. Reading codes even when cells overlap or are largely isolated. Reading of mirror-inverted codes. Tolerance of distortion due, for example, to inclined installation of the image sensor (viewing angle down to a lower limit of approximately 40 degrees to the printed surface). Resistant to similar-looking foreign objects in the area of the code. Resistant to interference patterns (grooves, granularity) in the area of the code Wide tolerance of contrast fluctuations. Wide range of imaging sizes from 5 to 35 pixels per cell. Light shadows or shiny areas in cells are tolerated. The polarity of the cells compared with the background must not, however, become inverted within a code. The ratio of the distance to the closest neighbor and the diameter of any cell can be between 2 and 0.8. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 45 Image processing 3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) Although code dots must be printed according to a regular square grid pattern, individual points can be displaced from their ideal position by up to 1/3 of the grid unit. Even slight parallelogram-shaped distortions during printing are tolerated. With large-image but small-dimensioned codes, slight curves in the printed material surface are tolerated. With larger dimension codes (for example, more than 14 x 14) or a strongly inclined sensor axis, curves are not allowed. Large tolerance of background disturbances that cannot be described quantitatively Large tolerance of poor contrast conditions The reader reads codes with a maximum code dimension of 72 x 72 cells. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 46 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) 3.1.2.2 Good quality data matrix codes Note Changing to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution If the cells are larger than 10 pixels, change to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution. This change is also useful at high object speeds. The "standard" recognition processes of the reader allow reliable and fast reading of printed data matrix codes of good quality. Range of application In this mode, the read rates achieved are higher than those when reading complex codes. The range of image sizes is from 1.5 to 35 pixels per cell. The range is static. The cells do not overlap or only slightly, nor are the majority isolated. The distortions are minimal, for example due to installation of the reader at an angle. There are no or only a few foreign objects in the area of the code. There are no interference patterns (grooves, granularity) in the area of the code. Fluctuations in contrast are slight. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 47 Image processing 3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) 3.1.2.3 QR codes Note Maximum code dimension/unsupported code types * Codes with a maximum code dimension of 89 x 89 can be read. * The following code types are not supported: Micro QR code, Macro QR code. Note Changing to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution If the cells are larger than 10 pixels, change to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution. This change is also useful at high object speeds. The recognition processes of the reader allow reliable and fast reading of printed QR codes of good quality. Range of application The range of imaging sizes ranges from 5 to 35 pixels per cell. The range is static. The codes can have any alignment in the image. The code can be printed both dark on a light background and light on a dark background. The viewing angle of the reader to the surface can be between 70 and 90. The diameter of the cells must be uniform over the entire code field. The contrast between cells and the background must be approximately the same over the entire code field. The image background must have a homogeneous brightness, for example no texture such as stripes. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 48 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) 3.1.2.4 PDF417 codes Note Unsupported code types The following code types are not supported: Truncated PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417. Note Changing to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution With bar widths > 6 pixels, change to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution. This change is also useful at high object speeds. The recognition processes of the reader allow reliable and fast reading of printed PDF417 codes of good quality. Range of application The codes can have any alignment in the image. The code can be printed both dark on a light background and light on a dark background. Codes with a bar width 3 pixels and in which the height of a single row of symbols is 9 pixels can be read. The width of the black and white bars must be uniform over the entire code field. The viewing angle of the sensor to the surface can be between 70 and 90. The code should not make contact with any other objects in the image, you can do this, for example by keeping the quiet zone free with twice the column width. Within the code, the ratio of contrast (in other words, the difference between black and white) to noise should be at least three. This ratio must be similar over the entire code field. The image background must have a homogeneous brightness, for example no texture such as stripes. The error correction codes (in other words, the lower part of the barcode) must not be covered. At the minimum bar width, each symbol column requires 51 pixels. Along with the four start and stop patterns, the width of the code with n code columns is at least: Width = 51 x (n + 4) pixels. Due to the limited image resolution, codes can be read as follows: - SIMATIC MV440 SR reader up to 40 code lines and up to 6 code columns. - SIMATIC MV440 HR reader up to 60 code lines and up to 12 code columns. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 49 Image processing 3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) 3.1.2.5 DotCodes Note Changing to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution If the cells are > 10 pixels, change to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution. This change is also useful at high object speeds. The recognition processes of the reader allow reliable and fast reading of printed DotCodes of good quality. Range of application The range of image sizes is from 4 to 40 pixels per cell. The range is static. The cells are isolated. The distortions are minimal, for example due to installation of the reader at an angle. There are no or only a few foreign objects in the area of the code. There are no interference patterns (grooves, granularity) in the area of the code. Fluctuations in contrast are slight. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 50 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) 3.1.2.6 One-dimensional codes The recognition processes of the reader allow reliable and fast reading of printed onedimensional codes of good quality. If the code type has a checksum, the checksum is also transferred in the read result (text). Do not work with variable string lengths with "Interleaved 2/5" or "Code 39". To avoid incomplete codes being read, set the number of bars to "Saved" on the "Advanced" tab of under speedup options. The "Full ASCII" coding of the code type "Code 39" is not supported. - To read this code type with the reader, use code type "Code 39". - To obtain the original text with the additional "Full ASCII" characters, you need to postedit the textual read result. Reliable reading of Pharmacode Because the Pharmacode has a simple structure, set the following speedup parameters to "Trained" in the "Advanced" tab under "Options": - Height - Length - Module width - Number of bars - Minimum quiet zone length - Sample spacing Save the program before reading. For the program to be successfully saved, the Pharmacode to be saved must have both narrow and wide elements. This avoids reading errors due to the absence of error correction of this code type. Since a Pharmacode on its head cannot be detected automatically, select the code type "Pharmacode (0)" or "Pharmacode (180)". Standard code generators allow a maximum of 63 bars for a Pharmacode. The integrated Pharmacode decoder is therefore also limited to maximum of 63 bars per code. Range of application The codes can have any alignment in the image. The code can be printed both dark on a light background and light on a dark background. Codes with a height of 25 pixels and height/length ratio 0.15 are read. The viewing angle of the sensor to the surface can be between 80 and 90. The codes must not be printed on a curved surface. The quiet zone around the code must be undisturbed. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 51 Image processing 3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) Code and background must have a homogeneous brightness. The following limit values for the bar width must not be exceeded: - Code 39: 8 pixels - Code128: 12 pixels - Int. 2/5: 5 pixels - EAN 13/UPC-A/UPC-E/EAN 8: 12 pixels - Code 93: 14 pixels - Codabar: 9 pixels Range of applications for "low" codes For special applications in the printing industry, optimization is available for 1D codes with extremely low bar heights. This can be activated in the options on the "Speedup" tab. The range of applications for 1D codes (see "Range of applications") is to be limited with the following supplementary conditions: Bar height must be > 20 pixels. Bar height must be > twice the minimum bar width (1x width). The codes must be parallel to the axis (horizontal or vertical): Tolerance < 5. The print quality must be extremely good. The minimum quiet zone must be > 5.5 x the minimum bar width (1x width). See also Options (Page 245) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 52 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) 3.1.3 Reading multiple codes in the image Note Restricted availability of multicode Multicode functionality is not available for: * QR codes * DotCodes * PDF417 codes * VeriCodes Note Order of output Output is line by line starting with the code of the top left and finishing at the bottom right. If the order of the codes is required for an application (for example, for writing a "triggersynchronized match string"), make sure that the position and rotation of the selected object remains constant during every image acquisition. In "Multicode" mode, up to 50 codes per image acquisition can be decoded. SIMATIC MV440 UR can decode up to 150 codes image acquisition. Range of application Even different code types can be read in one image. Combined operation with "TextGenius" and "Text-Genius Plus" optical character recognition (OCR) is also possible. Available for data matrix codes that can be read with standard methods. See Good quality data matrix codes (Page 47). The maximum number of codes and the code types used are specified when the program is saved. Depending on the configuration, the actual number and the code types found in processing mode can vary. Due to the multiple decoding, the processing time is extended approximately proportional to the number of codes per image. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 53 Image processing 3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) Example With this function, you can record a one-dimensional code and a data matrix code on packaging with one image acquisition and output the read result of both codes in the same cycle. Figure 3-1 Example: Reading multiple codes in the image SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 54 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.2 Code verification 3.2 Code verification 3.2.1 Overview Verification The readability of a 1D or 2D barcode will never be better than at the time the barcode leaves the marking device. With the help of code verification, it is possible to make sure that the markings are correctly applied during the marking process and that readability is good enough so that it will remain ensured throughout the entire life cycle. Verification makes sure that corrections can be made to the marking procedure before it leaves a range of tolerance and produces unusable or incomplete markings. Marking quality To recognize and ensure the readability and quality of a marking, a verifier is required instead of a pure code reader. A simple code reader merely outputs the result read or not read to inform the operator of potential read errors. This means the reader does not provide any trending data to the marking device or to the operator. Figure 3-2 Sequence involved in marking quality when using a reader The verifier assigns a quality grade from 4 to 0 to the readable markings. This grade informs the marking device or operator when preventive maintenance is required. Based on this knowledge, maintenance can be planned at a suitable time before the machine actually becomes defective. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 55 Image processing 3.2 Code verification Figure 3-3 Sequence involved in marking quality when using a verifier It is, however, important that the measuring procedure and marking quality are suitable for the marking method used. Depending on the particular requirements, there are several test standards. Data matrix codes on labels can be tested with test systems according to ISO/IEC 16022. For directly marked parts, however, a verification tailored to this purpose is necessary. With direct part marking (DPM), the data matrix code is applied directly to the surface of the object. Here, other marking errors occur that make it necessary to use verification specially designed for this purpose. The verifiers of the SIMATIC MV440 series support several verification standards for a wide range of applications and marking processes. In contrast to the standards for DPM verification, traditional standards can lead to false alarms or to serious marking errors being overlooked. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 56 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.2 Code verification 3.2.2 Grading Quality levels The verifier reports the quality in five grades known as "quality levels". Older verifiers identify these grades based on a single letter A to F (without E) with F being the lowest quality level. Verifiers of the newer generations identify the value range numerically from 4 to 0 with 0 being the lowest quality level. With the verifiers of the SIMATIC MV440 series, the user can choose either of the quality grading systems. Evaluation The evaluation is shown in the user interface as a value from 4 to 0 (or A to F without E). In addition to this, each quality grade is assigned one of three evaluation levels (good/adequate/poor). This evaluation not only allows fast visual checks of the quality using the color coding of the display, but also automatic rejection of the read result as N_OK if it falls below a certain quality threshold. Old grade New grade A 4 Good B 3 Can be set specifically by user 1) Green2) = good C 2 Can be set specifically by user 1) Yellow2) = Fair D 1 Can be set specifically by user 1) F 0 Defaults for quality grading Poor User interface Defaults for the read result OK Red2) = Poor 1) The user-specific setting is only for ascending or descending order. 2) Color coding in the user interface. OK N_OK (can be set specifically by the user) Example In an application in which only very good markings are acceptable, all grades below 4 are set to "Poor". This allows the rejection of all unacceptable specimens. 3.2.3 Verification methods for different application scenarios 3.2.3.1 Verification of printed labels In 1996, the "Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility" (AIM) published the data matrix symbology specification with an evaluation procedure for print quality. According to this evaluation procedure, test systems could evaluate a symbol according to its degree of acceptability (4 to 0). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 57 Image processing 3.2 Code verification The specification later became the ISO/IEC 16022 standard. This type of test was developed for paper labels with high contrast. It allows a quantitative measurement of the print quality and allows the testing of printed 2D codes based on a quality standard. Here, the important fact is that the printing of a data matrix code on paper is a high-quality process. White paper is printed with black ink to achieve a high contrast. With this background, the threshold values for grading in the ISO/IEC 16022 standard are very restrictive because the marking quality is so high. Less exacting requirements are neither suitable nor useful in the printing industry. The AIM standard identifies the following typical errors: Blocked ink jets Too much or too little ink Inconsistent application of the ink Inadequate contrast due to a combination of ink color and background color 3.2.3.2 Verification of direct part marks Test procedure In contrast to printed labels, most workpieces are not optimized for marking but rather for their primary purpose. It is, for example, more difficult to apply a laser marking to bare aluminum than to stainless steel. Aluminum is, however, more suitable in the production of parts for aircraft because it is lighter. The weight is therefore more important than markability. A test object with a marking on aluminum does not normally pass the test according to the ISO/IEC 16022 standard due to the low degree of contrast. Here, a verification method suitable for DPM must be used. For open applications, a public standard such as ISO/IEC 15415, ISO/IEC 29158 or AS9132A is normally used. Use ISO/IEC 29158 for applications with demanding lighting conditions. In contrast to all other verification standards, automatic exposure control is performed here to optimally capture the code to be verified. Siemens DPM For closed applications with a focus on checking the marking quality, Siemens DPM verification is the best choice. Siemens DPM verification can be configured very flexibly to be able to test markings applied with a variety of marking methods on different materials. The quality characteristics to be checked can be selected individually. In addition to this, a separate quality evaluation (good/fair/poor) can be set for each selected quality characteristic to give priority to certain characteristics. When combined with a flexible lighting setting, the quality monitoring with Siemens DPM can also solve applications that are too restrictive or simply unsuitable for the public standards. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 58 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.2 Code verification Measuring the marking Each marking is measured based on the quality characteristics defined in the relevant verification process and assigned to a quality level. Deviations in the quality grade can usually be attributed to the following causes: Changed marking parameters or errors in the marking device Changed material concepts or surface structure Parts incorrectly secured or traced Changes in a disturbed environment such as oil or light on the part Incorrect securing or tracing of parts Provided with the data of the verifier, the production line remains operational because necessary maintenance or modifications to improve the marking can be performed before the markings become unreadable. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 59 Image processing 3.2 Code verification 3.2.3.3 Examples of defects in the marking quality The following pictures show examples of defects in the marking quality: Figure 3-4 Incorrect or non-uniform cell size in the marking Figure 3-5 Incorrect or non-uniform cell position in the marking Figure 3-6 Incorrect overall geometry of the marking Figure 3-7 Damaged surface of the marking or part Figure 3-8 Very little or non-uniform contrast in the marking SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 60 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.2 Code verification 3.2.3.4 Verification standards supported Note "Veri-Genius" only available for SIMATIC MV440 readers This option is available only for the SIMATIC MV440 readers. For productive use, you require a Veri-Genius license (article number 6GF3400-0SL02). The readers without a verification license support the following: - Uncalibrated verification according to ISO/IEC 29158 and ISO/IEC 16022 The readers with a "Veri-Genius" license also support the following standards: - Data matrix verification to ISO/IEC 15415:2004 - Data matrix verification to AS9132 Rev A:2005 (previously IAQG) for dot peen marking - Siemens DPM - Data matrix verification to ISO/IEC 29158:2011 - Barcode verification to ISO/IEC 15416:2000 (previously ANSI X3.182-1990) Note Uncalibrated verification If you select the uncalibrated verification reference, data matrix codes are evaluated according to ISO/IEC 16022 or ISO/IEC 29158 and barcodes are evaluated according to ISO/IEC 15416, depending on the selection in the advanced settings of the decoder step. The evaluation is, however, made without any basic calibration. The standard report corresponds to the Standard report for ISO/IEC 16022 "Standard" decoder (Page 83) or Standard report for ISO/IEC 29158 (Page 86) for data matrix codes or the Standard report for ISO/IEC 15416 (Page 86) for verifiable barcodes. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 61 Image processing 3.2 Code verification Note Verification with the "ID-Genius" decoder If you select the "ID-Genius" decoder (Standard report for ISO/IEC 16022 "ID-Genius" decoder (Page 83)), only uncalibrated verification is possible. The verification standard to be used for this (ISO/IEC 16022 or ISO/IEC 29158) can be selected in the advanced settings of the decoder step. Please note that the ID-Genius implementation of the quality calculation according to ISO/IEC 16022 deviates from the standard. Note Demo mode To evaluate the verification standards, the readers of the SIMATIC MV440 series support a demo mode. The demo mode is indicated in the "Task" drop-down list by the addition of "Demo". In the demo mode, remember the following restrictions: * The check box "Evaluate quality 'Poor' as 'N_OK'" is disabled. No N_OK reads will be generated due to the quality evaluation. * In the verification report, the four-digit quality values are replaced by the word "DEMO". All quality grades will be output as '0' or 'F'. Note Compatibility For the "verify" task, the readers of the SIMATIC VS130 series provided quality parameters that were implemented according to the AIM specification. Please note that the value calculation and output have changed compared with SIMATIC VS130-2. Note Manually readjusting exposure settings You can readjust the read settings manually following normalization and calibration. * Deselect the "From reference" check box in the image settings. Please note that the quality values calculated will no longer comply with the standard. * For documentation, use the "formatted output of the verification" that contains the read settings used for image acquisition. For ambitious applications for which no public standard needs to be adhered to, Siemens AG recommends the use of "Siemens DPM". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 62 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.2 Code verification 3.2.4 Data matrix verification 3.2.4.1 Siemens DPM In Siemens DPM verification, the user can select the test parameters to be used and configure the levels "Good", "Fair" and "Poor" for every test parameter individually. The range of options for verification is ideal for process control in data matrix applications in which no public standard needs to be adhered to. Note "Symbol contrast" and "Cell size" The test parameters "Symbol contrast" and "Cell size" are not enabled in the default setting because these parameters can only make limited statements regarding direct part marks. The test parameters can be activated in the user interface. Quality parameters Cell size: The overall width divided by the number of columns or the overall height divided by the number rows. The value output is the cell size in mils (milli-inches). The assignment to the quality level is based on the number of pixels: See "Assignment of the numeric grade of Siemens DPM to the quality levels". Center offset: Measurement of the offset of the cell center to the center of the ideal grid starting at the four corners of the codes. Size offset: Measurement of the difference in cell sizes compared with each other. Cell modulation: Measurement of the uniformity of the reflection values of the dark cells compared with the light cells. Border match: Percentage of border cells that match the pattern formed by the four borders of the data matrix. Symbol contrast: Difference between the average reflectance of the lightest pixels and the darkest pixels. Axial non-uniformity: Difference between the height and width relative to the rows and columns. Print growth: Positive or negative size ratio of the printed cells relative to the ideal grid. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 63 Image processing 3.2 Code verification Unused error correction: Proportion of error correction information not used for correction of the read result. Angle of distortion: Difference between the two solid edges of the data matrix and the vertical edges measured in degrees. Assignment of the numeric grade of Siemens DPM to the quality levels Grade (abbreviation) 4 3 2 1 0 Comment Cell size (CS_) 10 9 7 5 <5 Center offset (CO_) 2.5 5.0 7.5 10.0 > 10.0 Without unit Without unit Size offset (SO_) In pixels 2.5 5.0 7.5 10.0 > 10.0 Cell modulation (MOD) 90 % 80 % 70 % 60 % < 60 % Border match (BM_) 95 % 90 % 85 % 80 % < 80 % Symbol contrast (SC_) 70 % 55 % 40 % 20 % < 20 % Axial non-uniformity (AN_) 6% 8% 10 % 12 % > 12 % Print growth (PG_) 10 % 20 % 30 % 40 % > 40 % Unused error correction (UEC) 62 % 50 % 37 % 25 % < 25 % Angle of distortion (AOD) 2% 4% 6% 7% >7% Codewords in ECC 200 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 64 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.2 Code verification 3.2.4.2 ISO/IEC 16022 This standard is based on data for printing data matrix codes with black ink on white paper and can normally only be used in such scenarios. Note As the second edition of the ISO/IEC 16022 standard, the ISO/IEC 16022:2006 document refers to the ISO/IEC 15415 standard as a guideline for print quality. Quality parameters Axial non-uniformity: Difference between the height and width relative to the rows and columns. Print growth: Positive or negative size ratio of the printed cells relative to the ideal grid. Contrast: Difference between the average reflectance of the lightest pixels and the darkest pixels. Unused error correction: Proportion of error correction information not used for correction of the read result. Assignment of the numeric grade of ISO/IEC 16022 to the quality levels Grade (abbreviation) 4 3 2 1 0 Axial non-uniformity (AN_) 6% 8% 10 % 12 % > 12 % Print growth (PG_) 15 % 21 % 26 % 30 % > 30 % Contrast (SC_) 70 % 55 % 40 % 20 % < 20 % Unused error correction (UEC) 62 % 50 % 37 % 25 % < 25 % Comment Absolute value for x and y SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 65 Image processing 3.2 Code verification 3.2.4.3 ISO/IEC 15415 This standard is a specification for testing the print quality of barcodes for two-dimensional symbols. The ISO/IEC 16022:2006 document relates to this standard in the guidelines for print quality. The functions described in the ISO/IEC 15415 standard "5-Scan Average" and "Extended Reflectance Check" are not supported by the verifiers of the SIMATIC MV440 series. Quality parameters Axial non-uniformity: Difference between the height and width relative to the rows and columns. L/F fixed pattern damage: Measure of the errors in the borders of the data matrix and all errors in the quiet zone around the code necessary for decoding. Grid non-uniformity: This is the deviation of the measured grid relative to the ideal grid starting from the four corners of a data matrix. Modulation: Measurement of the uniformity of the reflectance of the dark and light cells of the data matrix. Print growth: Positive or negative size ratio of the printed cells relative to the ideal grid. Is only calculated as a reference, no quality grade is assigned. Reference decode: A measurement of the data matrix with the result passed/failed. The measurement is based on a binary image of the code to ISO/IEC 16022:2006. Symbol contrast: Difference between the highest and lowest reflectance of the data matrix surface. Unused error correction: Proportion of error correction information not used for correction of the read result. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 66 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.2 Code verification Assignment of the numeric grade of ISO/IEC 15415 to the quality levels Grade (abbreviation) 4 3 2 1 0 Axial non-uniformity (AN_) 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 > 0.12 L/F fixed pattern damage (FPD) Grid non-uniformity (GN_) Modulation (MOD) This measurement is made in a three-stage process. There is no direct correlation between the intermediate results and the quality grade. 0.38 0.50 0.63 0.75 > 0.75 This measurement is made in a three-stage process. There is no direct correlation between the intermediate results and the quality grade. Print growth Reference decode (RD_) Comment Reference only, no grading pass X and Y Failed Symbol contrast (SC_) 0.70 0.55 0.40 0.20 < 0.20 Unused error correction (UEC) 0.62 0.50 0.37 0.25 < 0.25 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 67 Image processing 3.2 Code verification 3.2.4.4 AS9132 Rev. A This standard first appeared as a data matrix standard of the IAQG (International Aerospace Quality Group). This standard applies directly to three specific types of marking: Dot peen marking Laser marking Electrochemical etched markings The readers of the SIMATIC MV440 series concentrate on the quality parameters of dot peen markings that are the most commonly used. Module fill and contrast are calculated as a reference but are not included in the overall grading. Quality parameters of dot peen Angle of distortion: Difference between the two solid edges of the data matrix and the vertical edges measured in degrees. Module center offset: Linear deviation of the location of the center point of the cell compared with the center of the ideal grid calculated as a percentage of the nominal cell size. Module size offset: Difference in the apparent size of each individual data element in the data matrix. Module fill: Measurement of the completeness of the ideal grid as a percentage. Nominal module size: Average value of the two values nominal module size X and nominal module size Y. - Nominal module size X: Width of the data matrix code in pixels divided by the number of columns. - Nominal module size Y: Height of the data matrix code in pixels divided by the number of rows. Ovality: Difference between the widest part of the round cell and the narrowest part of the round cell. Contrast: Difference between the average reflectance of the lightest pixels and the darkest pixels. Calculated only as a reference Note No expanded quality parameters are used for laser marking and electrochemical etched marking. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 68 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.2 Code verification Assignment of the numeric grading of AS9132 Rev. A to the quality levels Grade Angle of distortion (AOD) Module center offset (CO_) 4 3 < 3.5 <7 C1 < 2 % C2 < 2 % 2 1 0 Comment >7 C2 > 2 % C1 is the number of modules with a center offset less than 10% of the module size C2 is the number of modules with a center offset less than 20% of the module size Module size offset (SO_) C1 < 2 % C2 < 2 % C2 > 2 % C1 is the number of modules with a size offset between 70% and 90% of the module size C2 is the number of modules with a size offset between 60% and 105% of the module size Module fill (MF_) 65 % ... 1 05 % Nominal module size (NMS) Ovality (OV_) < 65 % or Reference only, 80% is ideal >105 % Reference only, no grading C1 < 2 % C2 < 2 % Contrast C2 > 2 % C1 and C2 is the number of modules with an ovality greater than 20% of the module size Reference only, no grading SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 69 Image processing 3.2 Code verification 3.2.4.5 ISO/IEC 29158 This standard is based on ISO/IEC 15415 but includes modifications for more robust measurements of Direct Part Marks. The standard can be used for a wide range of applications, sectors and marking technologies. The most noticeable differences are the use of automatic exposure control and a much greater contrast tolerance. Note ISO/IEC 29158 uses its own algorithm for exposure control The ISO/IEC 29158 standard uses its own algorithm for exposure control. With this, the exposure time is adjusted so that the average gray scale value of the code to be verified is between 70% and 86%. If such an exposure is not possible for a particular code, a verification error (4707, 4708, or 4709 (Page 384)) is generated. Automatic exposure control requires multiple decodings of the code to be verified. The time needed for this can vary significantly depending on the type and marking quality of the code. The "Timeout" parameter in the exposure settings of a program can be used to limit the time available for exposure. Occurrence of the verification error 4709 and, in particular, 4708 indicates that the value is too low. Checking of the average gray scale value can be disabled by clearing the "From reference" check box in the exposure settings of a program (not recommended). The verification no longer conforms to the standards in this case. Note Uncalibrated verification or verification not conforming to standards according to ISO/IEC 29158 Because the "Cell contrast" quality parameter in ISO/IEC 29158 is calculated depending on the average gray value: If the average gray value fluctuates from one image acquisition to another, the calculated value is not informative. See also the note above on exposure control "ISO/IEC 29158 uses its own algorithm for exposure control". Therefore, when ISO/IEC 29158 is used for uncalibrated verification, the "Cell contrast" quality parameter is not used by default for determining the overall quality. A poor grade for cell contrast thus does not affect the overall grade. The same applies if the "From reference" check box is cleared for calibrated verification. If the "cell contrast" quality parameter is to be used for the overall quality, select the "Evaluating symbol contrast" check box in the "Advanced" tab of decoder steps. Note Verification report You can create a verification report according to ISO/IEC 29158 using the user interface, see section Monitoring via HTML pages (Page 266). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 70 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.2 Code verification Quality parameters Axial non-uniformity: Difference between the height and width relative to the rows and columns. Cell contrast: Measure of the uniformity of the average reflectance of the light pixels and the dark pixels. This corresponds to "symbol contrast" according to ISO/IEC 15415, however with different details in the implementation. Cell modulation: Measurement of the uniformity of the reflectance of the dark and light areas of the data matrix. Similar to "Modulation" according to ISO/IEC 15415, however with different details in the implementation and lower limits for the quality levels. L/F fixed pattern damage: Measure of the errors in the borders of the data matrix and all errors in the quiet zone around the code necessary for decoding. Grid non-uniformity: This is the deviation of the measured grid relative to the ideal grid starting from the four corners of a data matrix. Minimum reflectance: The lowest reflectance of any area in the data matrix. Reference decode: A measurement of the data matrix with the result passed/failed. The measurement is based on a binary image of the code to ISO/IEC 16022:2006. Unused error correction: Proportion of error correction information not used for correction of the read result. Print growth: Positive or negative size ratio of the printed cells relative to the ideal grid. Calculated only as a reference. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 71 Image processing 3.2 Code verification Assignment of the numeric grade of ISO/IEC 29158 to the quality levels Grade 4 3 2 1 0 Axial non-uniformity (AN_) 6% 8% 10 % 12 % > 12 % Cell contrast (SC_) 30 % 25 % 20 % 15 % < 15 % Calculation different from ISO 15415 Cell modulation (MOD) This measurement is made in a three-stage process. There is no direct correlation between the intermediate results and the quality grade. Calculation different from ISO 15415 L/F fixed pattern damage (FPD) This measurement is made in a three-stage process. There is no direct correlation between the intermediate results and the quality grade. Calculation different from ISO 15415 Grid non-uniformity (GN_) 0.38 Minimum reflectance (RMI) 5% <5% Reference decode (RD_) pass fail Unused error correction (UEC) Print growth 62 % 0.50 50 % 0.63 37 % 0.75 25 % Comment > 0.75 < 25 % Reference only, no grading SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 72 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.2 Code verification 3.2.4.6 Graphical support for analysis of verification errors Searching for cause of marking problems The information used by the reference decoder can be displayed to simplify troubleshooting for marking problems. The detailed view is activated via "Options" - "Extras" tab/verification details. You can see the results using the "Monitoring" link on the start page and in the user interface (Page 266). The following information is displayed: The grid lines by which the cells are separated. The incorrectly marked cells (shown in red). The correctly marked cells (shown in green). Note The identification of the incorrectly marked cells only takes into account cells that were recognized as being incorrectly set based on the error correction information. Other quality parameters that cause lowering of the grade, such as inadequate modulation or errors in the quiet zone, are not displayed. Example 3.2.5 Barcode verification The principles underlying barcode verification are similar to those of data matrix verification. These principles are, however, diversified to make full use of the characteristics of onedimensional barcodes. ISO/IEC 15416 The code is scanned in several parallel scan lines to obtain a reliable measured value for the marking quality of a barcode. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 73 Image processing 3.2 Code verification Each scan line has its own set of quality grades and the lowest of these decides the overall quality grade of the reflectance profile of the scan line. The average value of the quality values of the reflectance profile is the overall quality grade of the code. The reader uses ten scan lines that result in individual results for each of the following quality parameters. Quality parameters Scan grade: Lowest grade of all characteristics of the reflectance profile for a scan line. Edge determination: Clarity of the identification of element edges in the scan reflectance profile. Reference decode: A symbology reference algorithm is used to decode based on the edge detection. Maximum reflectance: Percentage of the reflectance of the lightest gap. Minimum edge contrast: Lowest value of the edge contrast. The edge contrast is the difference between the bar reflectance and the gap reflectance of two adjacent elements. Minimum reflectance: Percentage of the reflectance of the darkest bar. Symbol contrast: Difference between the maximum and minimum reflectance. Decodability: The proportion of the available surrounding space (between the ideal dimension of an element or a combination of elements and the relevant reference threshold value) that is not used by the element or the combination of elements. The ratio is calculated for the element or the combination of elements that deviates most from the ideal dimension. Defects: Irregularities in elements and quiet zones measured based on the non-uniformity of the reflectance of the elements. Modulation: Ratio of the minimum edge contrast to the symbol contrast. Start quiet zone: Area outside the start codeword with a length of 10 modules. Stop quiet zone: Area outside the stop codeword with a length of 10 modules. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 74 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.2 Code verification Assignment of the numeric grade of ISO/IEC 15416 to the quality levels Grade 4 Scan reflectance profile Lowest single grade per scan line 3 2 1 0 Edge determination pass fail Reference decode pass fail Minimum edge contrast (MEC) 0.15 < 0.15 Minimum reflectance (RMI) 0.5Rmax > 0.5Rmax Symbol contrast (SC_) 0.70 0.55 0.40 0.20 < 0.20 Decodability (DEC) 0.62 0.50 0.38 0.25 < 0.25 Defects (DEF) 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 > 0.30 Modulation (MOD) 0.70 0.60 0.50 0.40 Quiet zone (QZ_) 10 modules 3.2.6 Comment Rmax is the maximum reflectance. < 0.40 < 10 modules DotCode quality evaluation Quality characteristics Symbol contrast: The symbol contrast is the difference between the average brightness of the points of the DotCode and the average brightness of the background. Grid non-uniformity: The value indicates the average deviation of the position of the points from an ideal grid with same distances of grid points in parallel and vertical alignment to the code in each case. Unused error correction: Proportion of error correction information not used for correction of the read result. Print growth: The print growth specifies the ratio (subtracted from 1) of the average diameter of the points to the average spacing of the points from each other. Cell size: Average diameter of the points in pixels. Assignment of the numeric grading of DotCode to the quality levels Grade 4 3 2 1 0 Symbol contrast 35 % 21 % 14 % 7% <7% Grid nonuniformity 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.5 > 0.5 Unused error correction 0.62 0.50 0.37 0.25 < 0.25 Print growth 0.8 and 1.1 0.7 and 1.2 0.6 and 1.3 0.5 and 1.4 < 0.5 or > 1.4 Cell size 6 and 9 5 and 10 4 and 20 3 and 30 < 3 or > 30 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 75 Image processing 3.2 Code verification 3.2.7 Calibration and activating verification Calibrate To be able to use the reader as a verifier, a calibration must be performed. Calibrating the reader ensures that with every test setup, correct and reproducible results are returned in keeping with the selected standard. You will need to calibrate the reader the first time you commission it in your production area. Verification library Calibrations are created as elements of the verification library according to the procedure described below. You can then reference a stored calibration in one or more programs. Requirement: Stable lighting conditions The conditions must be stable in the operating environment of the verifier. If the position of the device or the ambient lighting or ambient temperature changes, recalibration is necessary. Without calibration, the results may fluctuate considerably. Regular recalibration it is necessary for stable results: If for example, you perform a verification once with high surrounding brightness and another time with very low surrounding brightness. After successful recalibration of an element of the verification library, all programs that reference this element can be used immediately. Siemens AG recommends that you operate the reader with its own lighting. You should also shield the reader and the code to be measured from the surrounding light. Some verification procedures (e.g. ISO/IEC 15415 and ISO/IEC 29158) require the use of certain lighting types and lighting equipment. You will find detailed information on this in the relevant documents from ISO/IEC. Normalizing system and calibrating the reflectance The "Veri-Genius" license is supplied with a calibration card; see section Calibration card (Page 436). Once you have set up the reader in the location where it will be used, the system needs to be calibrated with the calibration card. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 76 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.2 Code verification 3.2.7.1 Calibrating the reader The calibration determines suitable lighting parameters and obtains the correct calculation of the contrast and the size measurements of the test system. Procedure Calibrate the reader as follows: 1. Make sure that you have stable and uniform illumination of the working area of the reader, in particular the surrounding lighting. Refer also to the introductory remarks in "Calibration and activating verification". 2. Place the calibration plate in the viewing range of the reader. 3. Position the data matrix code with approximately 80% contrast in the center below the reader. 4. Align the borders of the code parallel to the borders of the image. If, during processing, the code to be read is always positioned in a region below the reader that is clearly offset from the center, you should also position the calibration code in this region. 5. Check the image of the code. To set the ideal image sharpness, change to adjustment mode if necessary. The value for the "Symbol contrast" can be used as an indicator for the sharpness. Using a small aperture achieves a greater depth of focus. A small aperture is also advisable if the reader cannot be protected from surrounding light. A large aperture, however, allows shorter exposure times and is therefore useful for fast applications and for verification according to ISO/IEC 29158 (see also the note in step 7). 6. If there are other data matrix codes in the image field or the code is not located in the center of the image due to the application, the calibration ROI will need to be adapted. Adjust the ROI so that the code is located in the center. The exact size of the ROI is unimportant but must contain the complete code and the quiet zone (minimum width: 1 code cell). 7. If required to meet the requirements of your application, configure the maximum exposure time and brightness. To achieve a good image quality, the maximum brightness for the verification is more restricted than when using the device as a reader. - To minimize any possible deterioration of the measured code quality due to the image acquisition procedure, the brightness is set to as low a value as possible during calibration. The required exposure time is therefore relatively high in many cases. For applications with direct part marking (DPM) a lower calibrated exposure time should be selected under certain circumstances. This applies in particular if active exposure control is used with ISO/IEC 29158. The exposure time can then be corrected during processing mode to be able to verify parts with weak reflectance. - To achieve a shorter exposure time, set a lower value for the maximum exposure time. The maximum exposure time allowed in processing mode can be adapted in the program settings (only ISO/IEC 29158). 8. Enter the values for contrast and maximum reflectance specified on the calibration card in the appropriate boxes 9. Start the calibration and, if necessary, follow the instructions for eliminating errors. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 77 Image processing 3.2 Code verification See also Warnings and notes (Page 382) 3.2.7.2 Basic requirements Recommended cell sizes for verification of 2D codes The following basic requirements must be met for a reliable verification: Recommended cell size calibration code: 10 pixels (min. 5 pixels) Recommended cell size target code: 10 pixels (min. 5 pixels) Quiet zone in double cell height contained all around the code the image If the target code differs strongly from the calibration code in terms of its cell size, you must make sure to select a sufficiently high resolution when you select the camera model. Based on the basic requirements described above, the following table lists the approximate limits of the print size of the codes to be verified depending on the camera resolution. For the calculation it was assumed that only up to 80% of the image height is used to prevent positioning accuracy errors. Camera resolution Min. print size Max. print size Max. print size 640 x 480 pixels (SIMATIC MV440 SR) 8 mil (16 x 16 cells) (32 x 32 cells) 28 mil 16 mil 1024 x 768 pixels (SIMATIC MV440 HR) 5 mil 46 mil 25 mil 1600 x 1200 pixels (SIMATIC MV440 UR) 4 mil 72 mil 40 mil Assumption/requirement: The calibration code is mapped in such a way that it takes up 80% of the image height. To then reach a mapping of the target codes with 10 pixels/cell, these must have the listed minimum print sizes. The calibration code is mapped with the minimum of 10 pixels/cell. The listed maximum print sizes results when the target code takes up a maximum of 80% of the image height. 1 mil = 0.0254 mm Recommended module widths for verification of 1D codes Minimum module width: 4 pixels Recommended module width: 5 pixels Maximum module width: 20 pixels SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 78 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.2 Code verification Camera resolution Min. module width Max. module width 640 x 480 pixels (SIMATIC MV440 SR) 4 mil Depends on code type, number of coded characters 1024 x 768 pixels (SIMATIC MV440 HR) 3 mil 1600 x 1200 pixels (SIMATIC MV440 UR) 2 mil The calibration code is mapped in such a way that it takes up 80% of the image height. To then reach a mapping of the target codes with 5 pixels/module, these must have the listed minimum print sizes. 1 mil = 0.0254 mm 3.2.8 Formatted output of the verification One important feature of a verifier is the ability to document results. To allow this, the reader provides verification reports that can be accessed over the various interfaces. If a verification report has been configured, this is generated and output each time a read was successful. For some verification standards, the standard defines a verification report that can be regarded as a summary of the verification result. A detailed verification report consists of two parts: Verification settings Verification result Verification report With %R, you receive a verification report containing the overall quality and information on the lighting used. The precise formatting and the values contained depend on the verification standard that was used and are defined in the specific standard. Note Values enclosed in square brackets are optional. The verification report is not available for verification according to ISO/IEC 16022, AS 9132 Rev. A and Siemens DPM. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 79 Image processing 3.2 Code verification Output for ISO/IEC 15415: <overall grade>/<aperture or cell size>/<wavelength>/[<radiation angle 45>] Output for ISO/IEC 29158: DPM<overall grade>/<percentage aperture>/<wavelength>/[<radiation angle 45>] Output for ISO/IEC 15416: <overall grade>/<module size>/<wavelength>/ Verification settings With %v (lower-case "v"), you obtain an output of the all the settings relevant for verification in the printed order. All field values are separated by semicolons. The field names are not part of the report. Field name Value Exposure time 0000 ... 9999 Brightness 0000 ... 0999 Brightness offset (coarse) -255 ... 0255 Brightness offset (fine) -255 ... 0255 Histogram peak low 0000 ... 0255 Histogram peak high 0000 ... 0255 Cell scaling * 100 0000 ... 9999 Target contrast 0000 ... 0100 Maximum reflectance 0000 ... 0100 Minimum X dimension 0000 ... 0999 Maximum X dimension 0000 ... 0999 Avg. gray scale value 0000 ... 0255 Calibrated exposure time 0000 ... 9999 Calibrated brightness 0000 ... 0999 Light source Name of the lamp Radiation angle 0000 ... 9999 Wavelength 0000 ... 9999 List of characteristics Abbreviation: G[GFP][GFP][GFP]P Note Calibrated verification according to ISO/IEC 29158 Calibrated verification in compliance with the ISO/IEC 29158 standard works with automatic exposure control. The value output for "Exposure time" in the verification settings therefore differs from the value of the "calibrated exposure time" and corresponds to the value selected by the exposure control. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 80 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.2 Code verification List of characteristics The characteristics list consists of the abbreviation for a quality parameter followed by five letters. The five letters represent the quality evaluation ([G]ood, [F]air, [P]oor) associated with the possible grades 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 or A, B, C, D, F (in each case in this order). For Siemens DPM, the characteristics list contains 10 entries since all the quality characteristics can be configured individually here. For all other standards, only the overall grade is output whose evaluation is relevant for all grades. 3.2.9 Verification result %V (upper-case "V") gives you a standard test report with all valid grades and evaluations. This report is automatically adapted to the verification standard stored in the program. All field values (grades and evaluations) are separated by a semicolon. The field names are not part of the standard report. If you do not require all the grades and/evaluations, the test report can be composed of the individual tags %Q or %q. Note Combination of multicode and verification * If you select "Uncalibrated" for the verification task, all the data matrix codes found are evaluated according to ISO/IEC 16022 or ISO/IEC 29158 and all barcodes are evaluated according to ISO/IEC 15416. The evaluation is, however, made without any basic calibration. The standard test report is automatically adapted to the standard being used for each code. * If you select a specific verification method, this is used for all matching code types, other code types are not evaluated. * If a read code has not been evaluated, the output of the verification report for this code is skipped. Note Verification error Whenever a verification error occurs, all quality grades are output as "E" and the error number is output instead of the quality values. Please see Read and verification error messages (Page 384) for information on the meaning of the error number. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 81 Image processing 3.2 Code verification 3.2.9.1 Standard report for Siemens DPM Note Grades and evaluations in the standard report for Siemens DPM The standard report for Siemens DPM only ever contains the grades and evaluations whose quality characteristics are activated in the user interface. With the default setting, activated quality characteristics include all characteristics except for "Symbol contrast" and "Cell size". Field name (TAG) Verification type (Qt) Value 5 If the exposure settings do not comply with the standard: F Evaluation (Qs) 3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor) Overall grade (Q0) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Contrast grade (Q1) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Contrast (q1) Axial non-uniformity grade (Q2) Axial non-uniformity (q2) Unused error correction grade (Q4) 0 ... 100 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0.00 ... 1.00 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Unused error correction (q4) 0.00 ... 1.00 Cell modulation grade (Q6) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Cell modulation 1 (q6) 0 ... 100 Cell modulation 2 (q6) 0 ... 100 Print growth grade (Q9) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Print growth X (q9) -100 ... 100 Print growth Y (q9) -100 ... 100 Cell size grade (Q10) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Cell size (q10) 0.0 ... 99.9 mil Center offset grade (Q19) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Center offset (q19) Size offset grade (Q20) Size offset (q20) Border match grade (Q21) Border match (q21) Angle of distortion grade (Q22) Angle of distortion (q22) ECCLevel (q14) 0.0 ... 99.9 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0.0 ... 99.9 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0 ... 100 4, 3 or 0 -45 ... 45.0 200 Height (q15) 0 ... 9.99 inch Width (q16) 0 ... 9.99 inch Angle (q17) 0 ... 360 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 82 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.2 Code verification 3.2.9.2 Standard report for ISO/IEC 16022 "Standard" decoder Field name (TAG) Value Verification type (Qt) 4 If the exposure settings do not conform to the standard or uncalibrated verification is active: E Evaluation (Qs) 3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor) Overall grade (Q0) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Contrast grade (Q1) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Contrast (q1) 0 ... 100 Axial non-uniformity grade (Q2) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Axial non-uniformity (q2) 0.00 ... 1.00 Print growth grade (Q9) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Print growth X (q9) -100 ... 100 Print growth Y (q9) -100 ... 100 Unused error correction grade (Q4) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Unused error correction (q4) 0.00 ... 1.00 Cell size (q10) 0 ... 99.9 mil ECCLevel (q14) 3.2.9.3 200 Height (q15) 0 ... 9.99 inches Width (q16) 0 ... 9.99 inches Angle (q17) 0 ... 360 Standard report for ISO/IEC 16022 "ID-Genius" decoder Field name (TAG) Value Overall grade (Q0) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Symbol contrast grade (Q1) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Symbol contrast (q1) 0 ... 100 Axial non-uniformity grade (Q2) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Axial non-uniformity (q2) 0.00 ... 1.00 Unused error correction grade (Q4) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Unused error correction (q4) 0.00 ... 1.00 Print growth grade (Q9) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Print growth (q9) -999 ... 999 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 83 Image processing 3.2 Code verification 3.2.9.4 Standard report for ISO/IEC 15415 Field name (TAG) Verification type (Qt) Value 2 If the exposure settings do not comply with the standard: C Evaluation (Qs) 3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor) Overall grade (Q0) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Reference decode grade (Q7) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Contrast grade (Q1) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Contrast (q1) Axial non-uniformity grade (Q2) Axial non-uniformity (q2) Grid non-uniformity grade (Q3) Grid non-uniformity (q3) Unused error correction grade (Q4) Unused error correction (q4) 0 ... 100 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0.00 ... 1.00 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0.00 ... 1.00 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0.00 ... 1.00 Grade L/F fixed pattern damage (Q5) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Modulation grade (Q6) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Print growth X (q9) -100 ... 100 Print growth Y (q9) -100 ... 100 Cell size (q10) 0 ... 99.9 mil Aperture (q12) 0, 4 ... 20 mils (0 corresponds to automatic) ECCLevel (q14) 200 Height (q15) 0 ... 9.99 inch Width (q16) 0 ... 9.99 inch Angle (q17) 0 ... 360 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 84 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.2 Code verification 3.2.9.5 Standard report for AS9132, Rev A Field name (TAG) Verification type (Qt) Value 3 If the exposure settings do not comply with the standard: D Evaluation (Qs) Overall grade (Q0) 3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Module size offset grade (Q20) 4, 3 or 0 Module size offset 1 (q20) 0 ... 99.9 Module size offset 2 (q20) 0 ... 99.9 Module center offset grade (Q19) 4, 3 or 0 Module center offset 1 (q19) 0 ... 99.9 Module center offset 2 (q19) 0 ... 99.9 Angle of distortion grade (Q22) 4, 3 or 0 Angle of distortion (q22) -45 ... 45 Ovality grade (Q23) Ovality (q23) 4, 3 or 0 0.00 ... 99.9 Module fill X (q9) 0 ... 200 Module fill Y (q9) 0 ... 200 Contrast (q1) 0 ... 100 Nominal module size (q10) ECCLevel (q14) 0 ... 99.9 mil 200 Height (q15) 0 ... 9.99 inches Width (q16) 0 ... 9.99 inches Angle (q17) 0 ... 360 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 85 Image processing 3.2 Code verification 3.2.9.6 Standard report for ISO/IEC 29158 Field name (TAG) Verification type (Qt) Value 1 If the exposure settings do not conform to the standard or uncalibrated verification is active: B Evaluation (Qs) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Reference decode grade (Q7) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Cell contrast grade (Q1) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Cell contrast (q1) Axial non-uniformity grade (Q2) Axial non-uniformity (q2) Grid non-uniformity grade (Q3) Grid non-uniformity (q3) Unused error correction grade (Q4) Unused error correction (q4) 0 ... 100 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0.00 ... 1.00 4, 3, 2, 1, or 0 0.00 ... 1.00 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0.00 ... 1.00 Grade L/F fixed pattern damage (Q5) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Cell modulation grade (Q6) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Minimum reflectance grade (Q8) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Minimum reflectance (q8) Print growth X (q9) 0 ... 100 -100 ... 100 Print growth Y (q9) -100 ... 100 Cell size (q10) 0 ... 99.9 mil Current average gray scale value (q11) 0 ... 255 Aperture (q12) 0 ... 999 Percentage aperture (q13) ECCLevel (q14) 3.2.9.7 3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor) Overall grade (Q0) 50, 80 or 0 200 Height (q15) 0 ... 9.99 inch Width (q16) 0 ... 9.99 inch Angle (q17) 0 ... 360 Standard report for ISO/IEC 15416 The verification report for barcode verification according to ISO 15416 is significantly larger than the reports of other standards because the results are output separately for each of the 10 scan lines. With a standard report (%V), the values are output sorted according to scan lines, in other words, first the fields "Scan line grade", "Edge determination grade", "Minimum reflectance grade", "Maximum reflectance grade", ... for scan line 1, the same fields for scan line 2 etc. The "Verification type" to "Overall grade" and "Module size " to "Angle" fields are output only once in the standard report either at the very beginning or at the very end. In an individually formatted verification report, the fields are sorted according to scan lines as long as they follow each other directly without a separator in the formatting instruction. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 86 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.2 Code verification Example "%Qt;%Q24%Q25" generates a report in the form: Verification type;\r10 x [scan line grade; edge determination grade\r]. "%Qt;%Q24;%Q25" generates a report in the form: Verification type;\r10 x [scan line grade\r]; 10 x [edge determination grade\r]; Field name (TAG) Verification type (Qt) Value 6 If the exposure settings do not comply with the standard: G Status (Qs) 3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor) Overall grade (Q0) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Overall grade (q0) 4.0 ... 0.0 Scan line grade (Q24) 10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1, or 0 Edge determination grade (Q25) 10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Reference decode grade (Q7) 10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Minimum edge contrast grade (Q26) 10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Minimum edge contrast (q26) 10 values: 0 ... 100 Minimum reflectance grade (Q8) 10 values of 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Minimum reflectance value (q8) 10 values: 0 ... 100 Symbol contrast grade (Q1) Symbol contrast (q1) Modulation grade (Q6) Modulation (q6) Defects grade (Q27) Defects (q27) Decodability grade (Q28) Decodability (q28) Maximum reflectance value (q18) 10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 10 values: 0 ... 100 10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 10 values: 0.00 ... 1.00 10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 10 values: 0.00 ... 1.00 10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 10 values: 0.00 ... 1.00 10 values: 0 ... 100 Start quiet zone (q29) 10 values: 0.00 ... 10.00 Stop quiet zone (q30) 10 values: 0.00 ... 10.00 Nominal module size (q10) 0 to 99.9 mil Aspect ratio 1 (q31) 1.00 ... 5.00 Aspect ratio 2 (q32) 1.00 ... 5.00 Aspect ratio 3 (q33) 1.00 ... 5.00 Height (q15) 0 to 9.99 inches Width (q16) 0 to 9.99 inches Angle (q17) 0 ... 360 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 87 Image processing 3.2 Code verification 3.2.9.8 Standard report for OCR and OCV The standard report uses OCR grades when OCR steps are used. Field name (TAG) 3.2.9.9 Value Verification type (Qt) 7 Poorest character quality (q40) 0 ... 255 Minimum character height (q42) 0 ... 255 Maximum character height (q43) 0 ... 255 Greatest confusion risk (q44) 0 ... 255 Average character quality (q45) 0 ... 255 Average confusion risk (q46) 0 ... 255 Standard report for Locator The standard report uses Locator grades when Locator steps are used. Field name (TAG) Value Verification type (Qt) 8 Match (q50) 0 ... 100 Conformity (q51) 0 ... 100 Combination of decoder and OCR steps If you use decoder as well as OCR/locator steps in a program: The standard report belonging to the selected verification standard or, if "uncalibrated", to the read code type is used. The OCR/locator grades can also be output via the relevant tags. See also Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) (Page 90) 3.2.9.10 Standard report for DotCode Field name (TAG) Value Verification type (Qt) 9 Evaluation (Qs) 3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor) Overall grade (Q0) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Contrast grade (Q1) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Contrast (q1) 0 ... 100% Grid non-uniformity grade (Q3) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Grid non-uniformity (q3) 0.00 ... 1.00 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 88 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.2 Code verification Field name (TAG) Value Unused error correction grade (Q4) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Unused error correction (q4) 0.00 ... 1.00 Print growth grade (Q9) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Print growth (q9) 0.00 ... 1.40 Cell size grade (Q10) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Cell size (q10) 0.0 ... m.n pixels SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 89 Image processing 3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) 3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) Optical Character Recognition and Optical Character Verification "Optical Character Recognition" (OCR) allows not only machine-readable codes but also human-readable plain text to be recognized and machine-processed. With "Optical Character Verification" (OCV), the plain text read can also be compared with a target specification and deviations in the read result can be detected. The readability of the text can be accessed and rejected using a threshold value for the reading quality. However, this OCV functionality is very different from a printing inspection, which involves comparison of the printed image with a template. This task is not covered by the OCV functionality. 3.3.1 Text-Genius and Text-Genius Plus There are two high-performance character recognition processes (Page 435) which can be activated as required depending on the application requirements. Text-Genius Plus offers all the benefits of Text-Genius character recognition plus additional performance features. 3.3.2 Performance features of Text-Genius character recognition Highlights of Text-Genius character recognition Flexible reading of multiple fonts such as OCR A, OCR B, without time-consuming training Fast and reliable reading (up to 1 000 reads per minute) Lines of plain text and machine-readable codes can be flexibly combined and read in one single image. Automatic text localization Automatic line detection (up to 12 x 15 lines) Flexible reading of character heights of between 15 and 220 pixels Reading of up to 12 image regions with independent settings Reading of mirrored, rotated and inverted text Numerous filter and comparison functions SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 90 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) Integrated universal fonts Fonts optimized for machine reading The following fonts optimized for machine reading are supported: Font Typeface OCR-A OCR-B Semifont M13 "Polyfont" setting With the "Polyfont" setting, the following fonts (and similar fonts) are automatically detected and read especially well and reliably. Font Typeface Courier Letter Gothic Arial Helvetica SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 91 Image processing 3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) Font Typeface Century Eurostile Frutiger Futura medium Franklin Gothic medium Lucida Sans Bookman medium 3.3.3 Performance features of Text-Genius Plus character recognition Text-Genius Plus character recognition includes all Text-Genius character recognition functions, but is far more advanced. Highlights of Text-Genius Plus character recognition Text-Genius Plus provides all Text-Genius functions. Adjustment to printed image in the application: - Special character fonts, e.g. with special characters - Various different printing procedures (e.g. laser, ink, scribed, needled) - Variations of characters SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 92 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) You can vary characters by creating your own fonts in the reader. Multiple styles can also be saved for each character. Up to five user fonts can be used in the reader. A wide range of standard fonts are available as a basis. Specific font creation ensures an optimal distinction between characters which are hard to distinguish. Excellent performance: - With 300 items/min: Up to 150 isolated characters + DMC per item - With up to 1000 items/min: Up to 24 isolated characters per item High read reliability with very good print quality: - > 99.5% with 24 isolated characters per item - > 99.5% with 150 isolated characters with DMC match per item Optimization of custom fonts by supervised training in processing mode. Blob binarization method for accelerated reading: - Up to 1500 items/min for up to 12 isolated characters per item 3.3.4 Supervised training The Text Genius Plus character recognition supports process optimization through supervised training. For this, character forms which were detected with less than optimal quality are recorded in processing mode. The recorded data can be used to improve custom fonts and optimize their reading reliability. 3.3.5 Examples of plain text applications: The following examples illustrate applications that can be solved with the "Text Genius" license and how some of the functions can be configured. Prerequisites Note Change template: Template icon must be visible To adjust the template, you need to switch the Template icon to visible: * Activate the "Show program template" check box under "Options" > "Tools" > "View". SIMATIC-MV440 Code Reader (not SIMATIC MV420!) Firmware version V5.0 or higher (older versions can be upgraded) The Text Genius or Text-Genius Plus license must be have been transferred to the reader (see "Transferring optional licenses (Page 177)" for more information) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 93 Image processing 3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) Application 1: Read single-line plain text on various materials 1. Select a program or the template from the "Programs" task. 2. Add a new OCR step. 3. In the "Read" tab in the image displayed, set the region of interest (ROI) containing the text to be read in this OCR step. 4. Adjust the read settings to the image details. 5. Press the "Update" button in the "Read" tab in the image control to briefly check whether your settings are correct. If the settings are correct, a read result is displayed. Remember the following Provide for adequate contrast for the text. The character height must be within the range of 15 to 55 pixels. Character heights of up to 220 pixels are possible if you have configured the undersampling function in the "Improve image" field. The text orientation should be approximately horizontal. The deviation from the horizontal must be < 5. If possible, avoid dirty backgrounds and interfering edges in the text field. The following images illustrate the capability for reading with the default settings, using a real example: Figure 3-9 Read results: 9238072 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 94 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) Figure 3-10 Read results: 9230120 The following images demonstrate capability for reading using real examples with varying character boldness: Figure 3-11 Read results: F4KEWF4KWY7C SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 95 Image processing 3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) Figure 3-12 Read results: 15010829006116 Figure 3-13 Read results: 15010826009503 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 96 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) Application 2: Decoding a data matrix code and reading plain text in the same image The task Both the data matrix code and plain text must be read from the image in the same read cycle. The plain text is located next to the data matrix code in this example. Both codes are printed together, so they are always legible and do not overlap. The reading results must be output via an interface. 1. If there is no decoder step yet, add a decoder step to the template under "Programs". 2. Add an OCR step and proceed as in application 1. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 97 Image processing 3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) Note Avoid disturbing structures within the ROIs If possible, avoid disturbing structures within this ROI, which might be confused with text: e.g edges or portions of the data matrix codes. 3. Save these settings in the template and return to the "Adjustment - Set image" page. Both the data matrix code as well as the plain text is found: Preview of reading result ]d201086912345678902113234246797654304935\x1D1708031810X2512110004935(01)08 691234567890\x0A(21)132N246mN543o4935\x0A(17)080318\x0A(1o)x251211ooo4935\x0 A Explanation of this reading result The reading result of code and plain text recognition is sequentially displayed. The "\x0A" output indicates that a new line in the read text begins at this point. The result of the plain text recognition is still not correct using the default settings for character recognition. Note Why does this happen? Because plain text is not clearly defined, several reading tasks can be correctly performed even by humans only due to their previous knowledge, expectations and experience. To work reliably and consistently, mechanical optical character recognition also requires this type of previous knowledge. The more knowledge you can provide for your application, the better. Such reading errors can be easily eliminated if you provide some information for more reliable and consistent character recognition. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 98 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) Go through the parameters of the OCR step in Programs/Template, starting with the "Read" tab. 1. If the decoder step is the first processing step in the step sequence, set the ROI position as "Follow ROI1". This means that the ROI of the OCR step follows the position of the data matrix code in the current image and is always positioned at exactly the correct position for reading. 2. Character spacing: In the example, the characters are printed very close, so you change the setting from "Default" to "Narrow". 3. Characters occurring: Restrict the alphabet your application uses to the characters that are actually used, i.e. '()0123456789X "(can also be entered as: "()[ 0-9] X") After saving these settings, the read result in "Adjustment - Set image" appears as follows: ]d201086912345678902113234246797654304935\x1D1708031810X2512110004935(01)08 691234567890(21)13234246797654304935(17)080318(10)X2512110004935 The plain text has now been read correctly with these settings. Many more options are available on the other OCR tabs, with which you can provide more information and make further adjustments to your application. To do this, use the information about the parameters in the online help! Note Increasing read reliability and processing speed If you are working with the Text-Genius Plus license and save the typeface as a user-defined character font, you will improve the reading reliability and increase the processing speed. You create character fonts with the user interface of the reader in the character font library in the Programs task You can use the "Monitored learning" function to easily change from an integrated universal font to a user-defined character font. The processing speed of custom-defined character fonts can also be increased by selecting the "Fast+ (Blob)" binarization method. You set this function on the user interface of the reader in the Programs task: Read plain text - OCR step - Read tab - Preprocessing - Text binarization. See also Read plain text (OCR step) (Page 219) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 99 Image processing 3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) 3.3.6 Quality characteristics in optical character recognition Fast feedback about the reliability of the character recognition To obtain fast feedback about the reliability of the character recognition: Just like during code verification, during optical character recognition, quality characteristics are calculated and output on the user interface or via the interfaces. Quality characteristic Value output Poorest character quality The value output is the poorest (lowest) probability value of all the characters found. Since plain text cannot be uniquely identified, a probability is calculated for a character that is found. This can be interpreted as a match between the printed a theoretical, "ideal" character. Highest confusion risk The value output is the poorest (lowest) probability difference of all the characters found. For each identified character position, up to seven character hypotheses each with their own probability are calculated. The hypothesis with the highest probability is selected as the read result for the character position. The confusion risk is the difference in probability between the two hypotheses with the highest evaluation. Minimum character height Height in pixels of the smallest character found measured perpendicular to the reading direction. Maximum character height Height in pixels of the highest character found measured perpendicular to the reading direction. Average character quality Average probability of all characters found Average confusion risk Average probability difference for all characters found Assignment of the numeric evaluation of OCR to the quality levels Grade 4 3 2 1 0 Poorest character quality (OCQ) 208 156 104 52 < 52 Highest confusion risk (OCC) 208 156 104 52 < 52 Minimum character height (OCL) > 26 and 30 > 30 and 20 and 45 and < 20 < 40 < 25 < 50 or or 50 40 and < 45 Maximum character height (OCH) > 26 and 30 > 30 and 20 and 45 and < 20 < 40 < 25 < 50 or or > 50 40 and < 45 Average character quality (OAQ) 208 156 104 52 < 52 Average confusion risk (OAC) 208 156 104 52 < 52 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 100 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only) 3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only) 3.4.1 The term "object recognition" Object recognition - definition The term "object recognition" describes methods for identifying a known object within an object space using optical, acoustic or other physical recognition processes. The presence of an object and its position and orientation are determined in an image or section of the image. Object recognition - optical recognition process Pat-Genius Pat-Genius is an optical recognition process for object recognition. Prior to recognition, the object is stored as a model in a so-called model library. With the help of this model, the object can then be searched for and recognized in the image. Object recognition - application Object recognition is a function often required in industrial image processing. With PatGenius object recognition, the SIMATIC MV440 reader has a very extensive, powerful and flexible image processing library. As of firmware V6.0, Pat-Genius object recognition can be integrated seamlessly into the existing operator control and application concept of the SIMATIC MV440 readers. Objects that need to be recognized can be stored in up to five model libraries. Depending on their size, several models and also very different objects can be stored in each model library. This is done, as with SIMATIC MV440, interactively with the integrated user interface. Model libraries are not only available for a specific program but can also be used by several programs. In one program, up to twelve object recognition steps can activate different models of a model library. This means that a single program can flexibly implement a task that can be divided into a maximum of twelve subtasks. The subtasks can be very different and versatile: see section Performance features of Pat-Genius object recognition (Page 102). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 101 Image processing 3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only) Apart from the normal functions for object recognition such as determining the object position, angle of rotation and quality, the Pat-Genius algorithm has the following properties: - Invariance (= insensitivity) to size scaling (selectable range) - Very high accuracy - Simultaneous recognition of up to 200 instances of one or more models in one step. - Simultaneous search for different models. - Important for classification tasks: Very good selectivity even with very similar objects. By means of comparisons with desired specifications in the form of the processing result when saving the program, even complex presence checks can be created very quickly and simply. A preview function is available in the tabs of the locator step. At all times, the preview function provides feedback about the effects of the currently active settings. The very flexible parameter assignment of the result output using format tags also provides many options for representing the object recognition results. This means that results that are important for your application can always be transferred to the process. You will find information on working with the Pat-Genius functions in the section Model library (Page 238) Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. 3.4.2 Performance features of Pat-Genius object recognition Requirements for using the Pat-Genius license Note No Pat-Genius license necessary for tracking search ROIs To use locator results for tracking search ROIs with "ROI-oriented", no Pat-Genius license is necessary. SIMATIC MV440 code reader Firmware as of version V6.0; older versions can be upgraded. Pat-Genius license must have been transferred to the reader: See Transferring optional licenses (Page 177) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 102 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only) Performance features Pat-Genius object recognition is based on a fully developed and versatile implementation on the reader. This means that many extremely different tasks can be solved. The most important performance features of Pat-Genius object recognition are: Precise location of objects in the image, output or checks for: - Position - Angle of rotation - Scaling - Quality - Number - Object class Identification (classification) - Reliable distinction of similar objects - OK/N_OK distinction - Tracking function e.g. for OCR - OCR for any symbol - Presence check - Complex check for completeness - Flexible combination of up to twelve subtasks SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 103 Image processing 3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only) 3.4.3 Examples of object recognition tasks with Pat-Genius The following examples illustrate the applications that can be implemented with the PatGenius license. Examples of locating objects Figure 3-14 Location of a reference mark and position output SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 104 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only) Figure 3-15 Location of an object and output of the position, angle of rotation, scaling and quality Figure 3-16 Location of the LEDs and lenses. Output of the position of the LEDs and angle of rotation of the lens. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 105 Image processing 3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only) Examples of identification (classification) Figure 3-17 Variants of chain links that need to be reliably identified Figure 3-18 Reliable identification with result SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 106 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only) Figure 3-19 N_OK if the arrangement is mirrored Examples of OCR for any symbol Figure 3-20 Detection of the Siemens logo and approval marks SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 107 Image processing 3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only) Figure 3-21 Detection of Chinese labeling on packaging labels Example of a presence check Figure 3-22 Checking the presence of cover screws and the test label SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 108 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only) Example of a complex presence check Figure 3-23 3.4.4 Complex presence check: Lens, LEDs, Siemens label are present Operation The Pat-Genius object recognition is implemented by inserting a step of the type "Recognize object". Note In order to be able to insert an object recognition step, you first have to store the object to be recognized in a model library. For more information on this refer to the section Model library (Page 238) and to the online help. The parameters of "Recognize object" steps are assigned using four tabs that map the logical order of object recognition. Basic settings for the models to be searched for can be made in the "Model" tab. These include the selection of the model library to be used and the models contained therein, the position and size of the Region of Interest (ROI), and the parameters for optimizing the feature search. The "Update display" function is used to execute a feature search in which no assignment is yet made to models. All the features found in the ROI are plotted in the image and allow you to check whether all the main features were found with the selected settings. The classification, which means the assignment of found features to the objects to be recognized, is configured in the "Find" tab. The main settings include the number of objects to be recognized and the tolerance with respect to scaling and rotation in relation to size and rotation angle of the models stored in the model library. In the "Recognition" and SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 109 Image processing 3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only) "Positioning" groups, the classification can be adapted to the application requirements regarding accuracy / strictness and speed. Please note that a higher processing speed usually comes at the expense of recognition accuracy. The "Filter" tab is used to further process the results after the completion of the object recognition, especially in the search for multiple objects. In the "Sorting" group, the output order of the found objects can be adjusted (according to quality, position, etc.) for this purpose. Information on the expected number and order can be entered in the "Reference" group. Please note that to reliably apply the reference you must select a suitable object ordering for the application, usually a position-based ordering such as "top-bottom" or "String". The "Result" tab is used mainly for output formatting. Various decision criteria for OK or N_OK results can be selected for this purpose. The output per object and the combined output of the step is defined using two format strings. When the reference function is used in the "Filter" tab, an automatic comparison can be performed between the reference and the actual result. In addition to the number and class of objects found, the deviation in rotation or position can also be controlled. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. 3.4.5 Quality features during object detection Fast feedback on the reliability of the object recognition To obtain fast feedback about the reliability of the object recognition, execute a test recognition in the "Find" tab by clicking the "Update" button. When you then click the "Show details" button, you can select the individual objects. As is the case with code verification, the following quality characteristics are then displayed for the selected objects: Quality characteristic Value output Conformity (LFI) The output value indicates the normalized, average deviation from matched model features and the currently found features of the object instance. Match (LMA) * A value of 100 means an average deviation of zero. * Accordingly, the value 0 signifies: No match. The output value indicates the proportion of matched model features. * A value of 100 means that 100% of the required model features were successfully matched. * A value of 0 means that none of the required model features were matched. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 110 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only) Quality characteristic Value output Clear percentage (LCL) The output value describes the clear percentage of the instance. A value of 100 means that the found object instance is free of disturbances. Note * This value is calculated only if the "Minimum clear percentage" parameter is enabled in the "Find" tab of the relevant locator step. Otherwise, the value 100 is output. Rotation tolerance (LRT) The output value describes the adherence to the limit value set for rotation deviation. * A value of 100 means that the rotation of the found object instance corresponds exactly to the stored rotation. A value of 0 means that the angle deviation was well off target (but not exceeded). Note * This value is calculated only if the "Max. angle deviation" parameter is enabled in the "Result" tab of the relevant locator step. Otherwise, the value 100 is output. Position tolerance (LPT) The output value describes the adherence to the limit value set for position deviation. * A value of 100 means that the position of the found object instance corresponds exactly to the stored position. A value of 0 means that the position deviation in the x or y direction was well off target (but not exceeded). Note * This value is calculated only if the "Max. position deviation" parameter is enabled in the "Result" tab of the relevant locator step. Otherwise, the value 100 is output. Assignment of the numeric evaluation of locator to the quality levels Grade 4 3 2 1 0 Conformity (LFI) 84 63 42 21 < 21 Match (LMA) 84 63 42 21 < 21 Clear percentage (LCL) 84 63 42 21 < 21 Rotation tolerance (LRT) 84 63 42 21 < 21 Position tolerance (LPT) 84 63 42 21 < 21 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 111 Image processing 3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing 3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing Image acquisition options The image acquisition options of the reader were developed for a wide range of applications. There are three different ways of controlling image acquisition and processing: Single trigger Auto-trigger (not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B) Scan (not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B) Architecture of the internal processing sequence The principle underlying the processing performed by the reader is a buffered processing method in three steps: Image acquisition Decoding (reading) Outputting. Between each processing step, the reader has a buffer and you can configure the size of the buffer depending on the application. This allows the ideal throughput to be achieved in every processing step resulting in the maximum overall throughput for the reader and a flexible application. Figure 3-24 Architecture of the internal processing sequence SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 112 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing 3.5.1 "Single trigger" image acquisition option How it works With this setting, one image is acquired per trigger followed by one read. If several objects need to be acquired in a very short time, acquired images can be buffered before they are processed. Up to 50 objects can therefore be acquired at an image frequency of more than 80 images per second and then processed (SIMATIC MV440 SR models at half resolution). To allow this, the images can be buffered and the image buffer size can be selected: SIMATIC MV420 can buffer 15 images. SIMATIC MV440 SR and SIMATIC MV440 HR can buffer 50 images. SIMATIC MV440 UR can buffer 30 images. The reader transfers the results of the reads as soon as it has processed them. "Image buffer size 1" setting If the image buffer size is set to the value 1, this mode corresponds to a sequential processing chain of trigger image acquisition processing result transfer. The next trigger comes only after processing is completed. Figure 3-25 Time diagram of option single trigger for image buffer size 1 "Image buffer size > 1" setting With image buffer sizes greater than 1, intermediate buffering takes place between image acquisition and processing and between processing and result output. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 113 Image processing 3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing Image acquisition can at times be performed in a faster sequence and processing can also buffer results briefly prior to transfer. This allows brief periods of peak load to be handled. Figure 3-26 3.5.2 Time diagram of option single trigger for image buffer size > 1; buffer = 2 in this example "Auto trigger" image acquisition option How it works With this setting, codes entering the viewing field of the reader are read automatically. In this case, the reader does not require any external trigger signals, for example from a light barrier. This option is particularly suitable for the following objects: Objects with which precise triggering using a light barrier is difficult. The monitoring frequency with which the reader monitors the viewing field can be higher than 90 Hz, for example SIMATIC MV440 SR with half resolution and good DMC quality. The "Auto trigger" option operates in time with the steps. The acquired images are decoded in the same clock cycle. The "Auto trigger" option can therefore be used continuously without time limits. To optimize the power used by this function, the monitoring can be started by an initial trigger and can then terminate itself after a selectable time or a falling trigger edge. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 114 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing Figure 3-27 Time diagram of the Auto trigger option Auto trigger with initial trigger and timeout 1 Limit of the decoding time 2 Image acquisition time 3 Interval of image acquisition 4 Set timeout Triggers after the procedure has started are ignored until the result has been transferred. Figure 3-28 Time diagram auto trigger with initial trigger and timeout Note 1 (limit of the decoding time) = 3 (interval of image acquisition)! Number of acquired images = {(Timeout/Acquisition interval) - 1} SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 115 Image processing 3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing Auto trigger edge-triggered with timeout 1 Limit of the decoding time 2 Image acquisition time 3 Interval of image acquisition 4 Timeout Rising trigger edges after the procedure has started are ignored until the result has been transferred. Figure 3-29 Time diagram auto trigger with the edge-triggered start/stop option Note 1 (limit of the decoding time) = 3 (interval of image acquisition)! Number of acquired images = {(Timeout/Acquisition interval) - 1} 3.5.3 "Scan" image acquisition option How it works With this setting, the reader is suitable for scanning codes located, for example, on a rotating axle. In contrast to the "Auto trigger" option, acquired images can also be buffered and processed later. Only one code is read per trigger signal. The code must be fully visible in one of the acquired images. If a code cannot be decoded in any of the acquired images, an N_OK read is output. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 116 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing With the default settings, with first read success following triggering, the read result is output and further processing of the scan sequence is exited. With the "Options"/"Image sequences" function, you can change this behavior as follows: With the selection Result output: "Best read result", all configured image acquisitions are made and evaluated. Following this, the qualitatively best read result is output. If you select "All read results", all the configured image acquisitions are made and evaluated and all successfully evaluated image acquisitions are output. By using the "edge-triggered start/stop" option, you can adapt the image acquisition sequence dynamically to your process using a trigger signal. 1 Limit of the decoding time 2 Image acquisition time 3 Interval of image acquisition Figure 3-30 Time diagram of the scan option with multiple trigger signals SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 117 Image processing 3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing 1 Limit of the decoding time 2 Image acquisition time 3 Interval of image acquisition Figure 3-31 Time diagram scan with the edge-triggered start/stop option 3.5.4 Image acquisition in program sequence mode How it works You can enable the "Program sequence" option on the "Extras" tab in "Options". With this option, you can evaluate several image acquisitions with different image settings for each trigger, if, for example: Objects have a very large dynamic range in terms of contrast and reflectance, that cannot be covered with one image acquisition setting. Codes or plain text must be searched for and read at different, defined positions. Several evaluations, including different evaluations (for example, with different program settings) are to be performed for each object. The number of definable program steps of an individual program is not sufficient. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 118 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing Evaluation attempts In "Program sequence" mode, processing is attempted with up to five saved codes for each trigger. With the default setting, a separate image is acquired and evaluated with the settings saved in this program for each program in the program sequence. Following the first successful evaluation, processing of the trigger is stopped and the result is output. Each evaluated program uses the cycle time limit specified in this program. The maximum cycle time for the complete program sequence thus corresponds to the sum of the maximum cycle times of the activated programs. "Best read result" and "All read results" settings In program sequence mode, as with the image acquisition option "Scan", you can use the "Best read result" and "All read results" settings. If you select "Best read result", an evaluation attempt is always made with all activated programs. All successful evaluations are compared based on a selectable quality criterion. The qualitatively best result is output. If you select "All read results", an evaluation attempt is also made with all activated programs. All successful evaluations are output. Same image settings for all programs to be evaluated If you want the same image settings to be used for all programs to be evaluated, you can also activate the "Use 1st image" option. In this case, only one image acquisition is made for each trigger. The settings of the program in the program sequence that has the lowest number are used. The image acquired is then used for processing for all programs in the program sequence. 3.5.5 Match options for Track&Trace tasks 3.5.5.1 Trigger-synchronized matching (XMATCH command) Note Availability of XMATCH The XMATCH function is not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B. The XMATCH function is extremely versatile and optimized specifically for Track&Trace applications. XMATCH is available via the interfaces TCP, RS-232 and ASM. The section "Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)" (Page 279) explains the XMATCH command. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 119 Image processing 3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing Properties of this function The comparison default (match string) can be changed "on the fly" from object to object. The match default can be set separately and individually for all codes (including multicode) and lines of plain text (OCR steps) to be read. A synchronization mechanism ensures the checking of each individual object without gaps. The function is optimized for manufacturing processes including those with very high object rates, in other words, for high manufacturing speed. Integration in the plant is possible via Ethernet/TCP, ASM or RS-232. Example of an application SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 120 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing A typical example of the use of XMATCH it is a manufacturing process in which packaging is printed with individual information: Use by date Serial number Manufacturing location etc. The information can be represented both as 1D/2D code or as plain text. The task of the reader is to check that the printing is correct and readable. A match string is assigned using the three indexes trigger ID, program number and ROI ID (OCR) or code index ("Read code"). Synchronization is achieved with a trigger ID. The trigger ID is a counter of the external trigger signals. This counter is reset to "1" by the reader at the start of processing mode, when there is a program change, and following an error. The match strings are buffered. The match string buffer has the following size: Maximum of 200 KB with SIMATIC MV440 readers Maximum of 100 KB with SIMATIC MV420 SR-P At the same time, it is also possible to buffer in advance: A maximum of 20 trigger IDs with SIMATIC MV440 readers A maximum of ten trigger IDs with SIMATIC MV420 SR-P. With XMATCH, you can also send match strings with a "permanent flag" that become valid starting at the next trigger or after a specific trigger ID. Up to two permanent settings (XMATCH with permanent flag) can be buffered. If a third permanent setting is received, the last received setting is overwritten. Example If the permanent buffer is empty, XMATCH commands with a permanent flag are received with the trigger IDs 50, 150, and 100 one after the other. The buffer then contains the corresponding match strings for the trigger IDs 50 and 100. Availability of XMATCH The availability of XMATCH depends on the image acquisition mode. With single trigger, autotrigger with initial trigger and scanning, the full functionality of XMATCH is available. In the image acquisition mode "autotrigger" (no external trigger signal), XMATCH can only be used with a permanent flag and trigger ID "0". This means that the new match strings are valid starting at the next image acquisition. Logging the received match strings If enabled under Options/Diagnostics&Monitoring ("Match string frames" checkbox selected), the match strings in the diagnostic data sets will also be logged. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 121 Image processing 3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing 3.5.5.2 Simple match (MATCH mode and MATCH match) Note MATCH command not suitable for changing during production In contrast to the XMATCH command, the MATCH command is not suitable for changing during production. For comparison tasks that are not complex, the match string can: Be specified permanently when the program is saved. be specified by a simple MATCH command from a connected controller or a PC. MATCH is available via the interfaces TCP, RS-232 and ASM. The section "Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) (Page 279)" explains the MATCH command and the structure of the MATCH command in detail. Static match default when saving a program For applications in which the match default is already known during commissioning, the match can be defined and activated when the program is saved. Match options are available for 1D/2D codes on the "Decoder"/"Match options" tabs under" "Options". To compare a plain text with "Text-Genius" optical character recognition: The default can be specified separately for each OCR step in "OCR/Filter", "String specification". The comparison is activated with "OCR"/"Output". Simple comparison default by the connected controller/PC The use of the MATCH command it is practical if, for example, the current date, the batch number or similar needs to be updated prior to the start of production. The MATCH command can be sent to the reader via the TCP, RS-232 and ASM interfaces. The match string received by the reader is valid as of the next trigger. The sent match string remains valid: until another match string is sent until processing mode is ended (for example by a fault) If a further match string was sent and in the meantime no evaluation was triggered, the previously sent match string is overwritten. If the relevant comparison mode is enabled, a sent match string for the comparison of the content is used in the following situations: A single 1D/2D code For each single 1D/2D code (with multicode) For each OCR step SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 122 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Image processing 3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing Logging the received match strings If the received match strings are not deactivated, the match strings are logged in the diagnostics data records. With a suitable format text, used match strings can be output as the result string and also logged in the diagnostics data records. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 123 Image processing 3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 124 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Network and system interfacing 4.1 4 Overview You have the following options for the acquisition and processing of recognition values during system configuration of the reader: PROFIBUS DP-V1 with ASM 456 and FB45 or Ident profile PROFINET IO with RF180C and FB45 or Ident profile Onboard PROFINET IO and FB79 or Ident profile RS232 interface *) Ethernet interface (TCP/IP) SIMATIC S7-300 with ASM475 and FB45 SIMATIC ET 200M with ASM475 and FB45 SIMATIC ET200pro with RF170C and FB45 Ethernet/IP with RF181EIP ) With SIMATIC MV420 only available when the ASM interface is not being used. Note No separate ASM connector in the SIMATIC MV420 There is no separate ASM connector in the SIMATIC MV420. The ASM interface is implemented via the digital I/O cable and must be connected via this when required. The applications listed below are also available with SIMATIC MV420. Other possible combinations include: Reader and RFID reader on an ASM 456 Auto-trigger Image display via WinCC flexible External lamp SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 125 Network and system interfacing 4.2 System setup via PROFIBUS DP with ASM 456 and FB45 or Ident profile 4.2 System setup via PROFIBUS DP with ASM 456 and FB45 or Ident profile Acquisition and output of recognition values in a PROFIBUS DP environment Figure 4-1 Example: System setup via PROFIBUS DP-V1 with ASM 456 and FB45 or Ident profile System characteristics Attachment to PROFIBUS is via the ASM interface of the reader and an ASM 456. The connection to an automation system is established via PROFIBUS DP. The reader is controlled via PROFIBUS DP-V1 by the automation system with a function block FB45 or Ident profile. The results are output to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP. The power for the reader is supplied by the ASM 456 (SIMATIC MV440 only). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 126 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Network and system interfacing 4.2 System setup via PROFIBUS DP with ASM 456 and FB45 or Ident profile The reader is triggered either via the digital I/O or the automation system or by the integrated autotrigger function. A PC/programming device is connected via the Ethernet port to allow adjustment of the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 127 Network and system interfacing 4.3 System setup via PROFINET IO with RF180C, FB45 or Ident profile 4.3 System setup via PROFINET IO with RF180C, FB45 or Ident profile Acquisition and output of recognition values in a PROFINET IO environment Figure 4-2 Example: System setup via PROFINET IO with RF180C, FB45 or Ident profile System characteristics Attachment to PROFINET is via the ASM interface of the reader and an RF180C. The connection to an automation system is established via PROFINET. The reader is controlled via PROFINET by the automation system with a function block FB45 or Ident profile. The results are output to the automation system via PROFINET. The power for the reader is supplied via an RF180C (SIMATIC MV440 only). The reader is triggered either via the digital I/O, the ASM (PROFINET) or by the integrated auto-trigger function. A PC/programming device is connected via the Ethernet port to allow adjustment of the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 128 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Network and system interfacing 4.4 System setup of the reader as PROFINET IO device and FB79 or Ident profile 4.4 System setup of the reader as PROFINET IO device and FB79 or Ident profile Acquisition and output of recognition values with a PROFINET IO device Note Power supply with "Power over Ethernet" (PoE) If the reader is supplied by PoE, for example when connected to a SCALANCE X108POE, the power IO RS-232 cable is not needed. Note PoE functionality not available for older devices The PoE functionality is not available for older devices with the following article numbers: * 6GF3440-0CD10 * 6GF3440-0GE10 * 6GF3440-0CD11 * 6GF3440-0GE11 * 6GF3440-0CD21 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 129 Network and system interfacing 4.4 System setup of the reader as PROFINET IO device and FB79 or Ident profile Figure 4-3 Example: System setup of the reader as PROFINET IO device and FB79 or Ident profile System characteristics There is a connection to a PROFINET IO compliant automation system via Ethernet and a switch. The reader is controlled by the automation system. The results from the specimens are output to the automation system via PROFINET IO. The reader is triggered either via the digital I/O, PROFINET or by the integrated autotrigger function. A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet and a switch to allow adjustment of the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 130 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Network and system interfacing 4.5 System setup via the RS-232 interface 4.5 System setup via the RS-232 interface Acquisition and output of recognition values via the RS-232 interface Figure 4-4 Example: System setup via the RS-232 interface System characteristics The reader results are output via the RS-232 interface. The reader is triggered either via the digital I/O, RS-232 or by the integrated auto-trigger function. A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet to allow adjustment of the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 131 Network and system interfacing 4.6 System setup via the Ethernet interface 4.6 System setup via the Ethernet interface Acquisition and output of recognition values with Ethernet Note Power supply with "Power over Ethernet" (PoE) If the reader is supplied by PoE, for example when connected to a SCALANCE X108POE, the power IO RS-232 cable is not needed. Note PoE functionality not available for older devices The PoE functionality is not available for older devices with the following article numbers: * 6GF3440-0CD10 * 6GF3440-0GE10 * 6GF3440-0CD11 * 6GF3440-0GE11 * 6GF3440-0CD21 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 132 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Network and system interfacing 4.6 System setup via the Ethernet interface Figure 4-5 Example: System setup via the Ethernet interface System characteristics The reader results are output via the Ethernet interface. The reader can be triggered in the following ways: - Digital I/O - TCP/IP - The integrated autotrigger function A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet and a switch to allow adjustment of the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 133 Network and system interfacing 4.7 System setup for reader and RFID reader on a communication module 4.7 System setup for reader and RFID reader on a communication module Figure 4-6 Example: System setup for reader with RFID reader on a communication module System characteristics To operate in mixed mode, the reader can be connected to an RFID SLG, for example of the RF300 series on a communication module, for example, an ASM 456. Both the reader and the RFID reader are integrated in STEP 7 by the function block FB45 or Ident profile. A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet to allow adjustment of the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 134 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Network and system interfacing 4.8 System setup for the reader with auto-trigger 4.8 System setup for the reader with auto-trigger Figure 4-7 Example: System setup for reader with auto-trigger function System characteristics Power supply and system integration are, for example, via an ASM 456 or via Ethernet. To trigger the reader, a light barrier or similar must be installed; the triggering itself is performed on the reader as soon as a legible code enters the reader viewing field (auto trigger). A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet to allow adjustment of the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 135 Network and system interfacing 4.9 System setup reader and WinCC flexible 4.9 System setup reader and WinCC flexible Figure 4-8 Example: System setup reader with WinCC flexible System characteristics The image is displayed on the Web pages of the reader (see also "System setup for reader and HTML browser (Page 137)for WinCC flexible on a PC with WinCC flexible, an HMI Panel MP 277 or MP 377. The results from the reader are obtained and displayed by WinCC flexible via a connection to the automation system. A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet to allow adjustment of the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 136 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Network and system interfacing 4.10 System setup for the reader and HTML browser 4.10 System setup for the reader and HTML browser Figure 4-9 Example: System setup for the reader with HTML browser System characteristics For visualization, an HTML browser is used: For example Microsoft Internet Explorer on a PC/programming device, Panel PC or similar device. The reader can be monitored via the live image page or diagnostics pages with needing Java VM on the PC/PG. A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet to allow adjustment of the device. Note Further information For further information, please see "Monitoring via HTML pages" (Page 266). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 137 Network and system interfacing 4.11 System setup of reader and external light 4.11 System setup of reader and external light Figure 4-10 Example: System setup reader with external light System characteristics An external lamp, for example a lighting unit, can be controlled via an external power supply unit and a stroboscope signal of the reader. For the external lighting units MV400 LED ring light metal IR clear/metal red clear (article numbers: 6GF3400-0LT01-7BA1 and 6GF3400-0LT01-8DA1), an additional power supply unit is not needed for the power supply. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 138 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Network and system interfacing 4.12 Other system extensions 4.12 Other system extensions System integration with FB45 Integration into further systems is possible with the FB45 function block: Into SIMATIC S7-300 or ET 200M with communication module ASM 475 Into SIMATIC ET 200pro with communication module RF170C System integration via EtherNet/IP connection System integration via an Ethernet/IP connection is possible with the communication module RF181EIP. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 139 Network and system interfacing 4.12 Other system extensions SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 140 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 5 Installation 5.1 Important notes on installation Note When you install the reader, make sure that the code to be read is visible to the reader with the best possible quality. To install the reader, use "Adjust reader" in the user interface. The following requirements must be met: The code must be clearly visible: - There must be as little reflection in the code field as possible. - The code field must be uniformly lit without shadows. - All the code parts must be sharply imaged. The viewing angle to the code may vary between 40 to 90 and 80 to 90 depending on the code type, see Performance characteristics when reading codes (Page 45). The distance between a two-dimensional code and image border must be at least 2 cell widths. Maintain the quiet zone around the code. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 141 Installation 5.2 Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440 5.2 Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440 The readers are separate compact devices that need to be mounted in a suitable location and only require a lens, a power supply cable and a communications connection. The SIMATIC MV440 reader has four threaded holes on both the front and back (SIMATIC MV420: has two threaded holes) allowing flexible mounting of the device. Installing the SIMATIC MV440 reader with protective lens barrel To provide lighting when reading the codes, you have several options available. The simplest and most space-saving option is the ring light integrated in the protective lens barrel. The SIMATIC MV420 reader has a lens and light already integrated. Built-in LED ring light Lens M2.5 hexagon socket-head screws Protective lens barrel 65 Reader Figure 5-1 Design of SIMATIC MV440 reader with protective lens barrel and built-in LED ring light Installing the SIMATIC MV440 1. Remove the "protective cap of the lens threaded connector", see section: 2. Install the following: - Your selected lens - The LED built-in ring light - Protective lens barrel 65 3. Select a suitable location to install the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 142 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Installation 5.2 Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440 4. Drill four holes with the following dimensions at the installation site/use the optional mounting bracket. Figure 5-2 SIMATIC MV440 reader drilling template 5. Mount the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 143 Installation 5.2 Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440 Installing the SIMATIC MV440 reader with lighting unit If you require a lot of light for the applications, you can connect an external lamp. The external lamp is also used, for example, when the incident light is not parallel to the viewing direction with strongly reflecting objects. Lighting unit SIMATIC Vision Sensor VS100 Socket for lighting unit Reader External ring light holder Protective lens barrel 65 Securing screws Hole for securing device Figure 5-3 Setup of SIMATIC MV440 reader with lighting unit Install the following: 1. Your selected lens 3. Ring light holder (external) 4. Lighting unit 2. Protective lens barrel 65 5. At the installation site, screw the reader directly into the securing holes or to the "reader mounting plate", see Dimension drawings (Page 407) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 144 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Installation 5.2 Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440 Installing the SIMATIC MV420 1. Select a suitable location to install the device. 2. Drill two holes of the following dimensions at the installation site: Figure 5-4 SIMATIC MV420 drilling template 3. Mount the reader. See also Dimension drawings (Page 407) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 145 Installation 5.3 Installing the LED ring light for SIMATIC MV440 5.3 Installing the LED ring light for SIMATIC MV440 NOTICE Only install the built-in LED ring light for SIMATIC MV440 The built-in LED ring light can only be used in conjunction with the SIMATIC MV440 readers (6GF3440-1CD10, 6GF3440-1GE10, 6GF3440-1LE10) and the D65 protective lens barrel (6GF3440-8AC11, 6GF3440-8AC12, 6GF3440-8AC21). Required components: 1 offset screwdriver SW 2 1 module LED built-in ring light 3 hexagon socket-head screws M2.5 Built-in LED ring light Lens M2.5 hexagon socket-head screws Protective lens barrel 65 Reader Figure 5-5 SIMATIC MV440 reader with protective lens barrel and built-in LED ring light NOTICE Disconnecting SIMATIC MV440 from the power supply The LED ring light can only be fitted when the SIMATIC MV440 is disconnected from the power supply. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 146 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Installation 5.3 Installing the LED ring light for SIMATIC MV440 1. Disconnect the SIMATIC MV440 reader from the power supply. 2. Guide the built-in LED ring light over the lens onto the protective lens barrel : At the same time, insert the connecting circuit board for the built-in LED ring light into the lamp connection of the protective lens barrel . 3. Screw the built-in LED ring light into the protective lens barrel using the three premounted hexagon socket-head screws . 4. Tighten the screws with maximum 0.45 Nm. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 147 Installation 5.3 Installing the LED ring light for SIMATIC MV440 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 148 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 6 Connecting 6.1 Guidelines for installation free of electrical interference To prevent interference, you will need to provide shielding for your system. Low-frequency (LF) and high-frequency (HF) interference signals can result in an incorrect response if the system is badly grounded or not shielded. Interfering signals can be caused by: Switching relays or contactors (large, rapid changes in current or voltage and HF interfering signals). Different ground potentials between two parts of the system (LF interfering signals). NOTICE Class A device to EMC The reader can cause radio interference in residential areas. In this case, you will have to take appropriate countermeasures to prevent radio interference. Use/installation of interference-proof cables Only use the recommended cable to connect the reader. All cable connectors must be carefully and correctly connected. Do not lay signal lines and heavy current lines together. Use a separate cable duct at least 50 cm from the heavy current lines. Note * Refer to the instructions and guidelines in the installation manual SIMATIC Automation System S7-300 Hardware and Installation, section "Wiring". * Please note the guidelines for use of PROFINET IO to control and/or transfer results. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 149 Connecting 6.2 Power over Ethernet (PoE) Only connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) to IEC 60950/EN 60950/VDE 0805 WARNING The device is designed for operation with safety extralow voltage (SELV). This means that only safety extra-low voltages (SELV) complying with EC 60950/EN 60950/VDE 0805 can be connected to the power supply terminals. The power unit for supplying the device must comply with NEC Class 2 as described by the National Electrical Code(r) (ANSI/NFPA 70). The power of all connected power supply units must total the equivalent of a power source with limited power (LPS limited power source). 6.2 Power over Ethernet (PoE) "Power over Ethernet" (PoE) is a power supply technology for network components complying with 802.3af. The power is supplied over the Ethernet cables that connect the individual network components together. This makes an additional power cable unnecessary. MV440 is a powered device (PD) of type 1, class 2 (max. 6.49 W). Restriction of the power supply type The IEEE standard 802.3af specifies two types of power supply: Power via pairs of wires that are not used for data transmission (redundant wires). Power via pairs of wires that are used for data transmission (phantom power). The Ethernet connector of the SIMATIC MV440 reader is four-wire. Power can only be suppled via these four wires with phantom power. The device supplying the power must provide the phantom power. The following Siemens switches with PoE provide phantom power: SCALANCE X108POE SCALANCE X308-2M POE SCALANCE XR324-12M POE SCALANCE XR324-4M POE SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 150 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Connecting 6.3 Connecting the components 6.3 Connecting the components Connecting the 24 V DC power supply WARNING The device should only be connected to a 24 V DC power supply which satisfies the requirements of safe extra low voltage (SELV). When the device is operated on a wall, in an open rack or other similar locations, an NEC Class 2 current source is required for the compliance of the UL requirements (according to UL 60950-1). In all other cases (according to IEC/EN/DlN EN 60950-1), a current source with limited power (LPS = Limited Power Source) is required. 24 V DC supply voltage (19.2 to 28.8 V) The generation of the 24 V DC supply voltage by the line-side power supply must be implemented as functional extra-low voltage with safe electrical isolation according (floating) to IEC 80364-4-41, or as SELV to IEC/EN/DlN EN 60950-1 and LPS/NEC class 2. NOTICE Protection of the external power supply If the reader is supplied via extensive supply lines or networks, interference by strong electromagnetic pulses on the supply lines is possible, e.g. from lightning or the switching of large loads. The connection of the external power supply is not protected against strong electromagnetic pulses. An external overvoltage protection module is required for this purpose. The requirements according to EN 61000-4-5, Surge test on power supply lines, are only met when a suitable protective element is used. A suitable device would be, for example, the Dehn Blitzductor BVT AVD 24, article number 918 422, or a comparable protective element. Manufacturer: DEHN+SOHNE GmbH+Co.KG Hans Dehn Str.1 Postfach 1640 D-92306 Neumarkt, Germany Note Maximum ASM cable length * You can use an ASM with the reader with a maximum cable length of 50 m. * In some situations, longer connecting cables up to 1000 m are possible. In this case, take into account the current consumption of the reader of 0.17 A for SIMATIC MV420 and 0.27 A for SIMATIC MV440. * Avoid connecting more than two cable sections in series to create a longer cable due to the connector resistance. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 151 Connecting 6.3 Connecting the components Cable sockets Note Only the SIMATIC MV440 reader has an ASM socket. Note Power supply via for SIMATIC MV440 Ethernet also via Power over Ethernet The power for the SIMATIC MV440 readers can also be supplied using Power over Ethernet (PoE), for example when using PoE switches such as: * SCALANCE X108POE * SCALANCE X308-2M POE * SCALANCE XR324-12M POE * SCALANCE XR324-4M POE Note PoE functionality not available for older devices The PoE functionality is not available for older devices with the following article numbers: * 6GF3440-0CD10 * 6GF3440-0GE10 * 6GF3440-0CD11 * 6GF3440-0GE11 * 6GF3440-0CD21 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 152 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Connecting 6.3 Connecting the components Combined cable socket for the power supply, I/O connectors, ASM and RS-232 Ethernet socket Combined cable socket for the power supply, I/O connectors and RS-232 ASM female connector Ethernet connection socket (PoE) M12, 4-pin, D-coded Figure 6-1 Cable sockets for SIMATIC MV420 (left) and SIMATIC MV440 (right) Power IO RS-232 cable The power IO RS-232 cable is used for the power supply, to connect the digital I/O connectors and for the communications interface of an automation system via the RS-232 interface. The pin assignment of the Power IO RS-232 cable is shown in the table below. Pin assignment of the Power IO RS-232 cable NOTICE INPUT - COMMON / OUTPUT - COMMON must be connected INPUT - COMMON / OUTPUT - COMMON must be connected before you can use the inputs and outputs detailed below. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 153 Connecting 6.3 Connecting the components Table 6- 1 SIMATIC MV440 Pin Color Signal name H Red 24 V DC Power supply G Blue 0V Power supply K Violet INPUT1 TRG TRG Trigger input D Yellow INPUT / OUTPUT2 DISA, SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3, TRN, RES, IN_OP, TRD, RDY, READ, MATCH, N_OK, EXT_1, EXT_2, EXT_3, EXT_4 IN_OP Freely selectable input or output. L Gray/ pink INPUT / OUTPUT3 DISA, SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3, TRN, RES, IN_OP, TRD, RDY, READ, MATCH, N_OK, EXT_1, EXT_2, EXT_3, EXT_4 RDY Freely selectable input or output. C Green INPUT / OUTPUT4 DISA, SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3, TRN, RES, IN_OP, TRD, RDY, READ, MATCH, N_OK, EXT_1, EXT_2, EXT_3, EXT_4 READ Freely selectable input or output. B Brown INPUT / OUTPUT5 DISA, SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3, TRN, RES, IN_OP, TRD, RDY, READ, MATCH, N_OK, EXT_1, EXT_2, EXT_3, EXT_4 N_OK Freely selectable input or output. A White INPUT COMMON P type inputs/outputs: E Gray OUTPUT COMMON Possible values Default Meaning Reference point 0 V or 24 V for inputs. INPUT - COMMON = 0 V and OUTPUT - COMMON = + 24 V DC Reference point 0 V or 24 V for outputs. N type inputs/outputs: INPUT - COMMON = + 24 V DC and OUTPUT - COMMON = 0 V J Black STROBE (OUTPUT) Signal output for connecting external flashes F Pink RS-232 TXD RS-232 send line M Red/blue RS-232 RXD RS-232 receive line Table 6- 2 SIMATIC MV420 Pin Color Signal name H Red 24 V DC Possible values Default Meaning G Blue 0V K Violet INPUT1 TRG TRG Trigger input D Yellow OUTPUT2 IN_OP, TRD, RDY, READ, MATCH, N_OK, EXT_1, EXT_2, EXT_3, EXT_4 RDY Freely selectable output. L Gray/ pink OUTPUT3 IN_OP, TRD, RDY, READ, MATCH, N_OK, EXT_1, EXT_2, EXT_3, EXT_4 READ Freely selectable output. C Green ASM TxD_N TxD_N signal of the ASM interface B Brown ASM TxD_P TxD_P signal of the ASM interface Power supply Power supply SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 154 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Connecting 6.3 Connecting the components Pin Color Signal name Possible values A White INPUT COMMON P type inputs/outputs: E Gray OUTPUT COMMON Default Meaning Reference point 0 V or 24 V for inputs. INPUT - COMMON = 0 V and OUTPUT - COMMON = + 24 V DC Reference point 0 V or 24 V for outputs. N type inputs/outputs: INPUT - COMMON = + 24 V DC and OUTPUT - COMMON = 0 V J Black STROBE (OUTPUT) Signal output for connecting external flashes F Pink RS 232 TxD or ASM RxD_P RS-232 TxD, ASM RxD_P RS-232 TXD RS-232 send line or ASM RxD_P of the ASM interface M Red/blue RS-232 RxD or RS-232 RxD,ASM RxD_N ASM RxD_N RS-232 RXD RS-232 receive line or ASM RxD_N of the ASM interface MV400 push-pull power cable pin assignment See Pin assignment of the interfaces (Page 405). ASM cable The connectors are already fitted to the ASM cable. Using the ASM cable, you connect the communication modules, for example RF180C and ASM456. For SIMATIC MV420, a special ASM cable with M16 socket is available. Refer to the chapter "Cables" (Page 418). The following cable assignment is defined for the connection to the ASM 475: SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 155 Connecting 6.3 Connecting the components Status and error displays Wiring diagram; the numbers of the connection refer to the X1 connector of the upper housing Figure 6-2 Front panel and inside of the front door of the ASM475 module Pin M16 socket Wire color of the connecting cable Terminal ASM475 (Channel 1/Channel 2) H Red 8 / 16 G Blue 9 / 17 F Pink 4 / 12 M Red/blue 5 / 13 B Brown 6 / 14 C Green 7 / 15 Ethernet cable M12/RJ-45 With a preassembled Ethernet cable, you connect a PC / PG to control and operate the reader. Attach the Ethernet cable to a switch to connect the reader to an automation system via onboard PROFINET IO. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 156 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Connecting 6.3 Connecting the components 6.3.1 Wiring example I/O interface as P type Wire the "Output Common" signal with + 24 V DC and the "Input Common" signal with 0 V. Figure 6-3 I/O interface as P type I/O interface as N type Wire the "Output Common" signal with 0 V and the "Input Common" signal with + 24 V DC. Figure 6-4 I/O interface as N type SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 157 Connecting 6.3 Connecting the components Connecting up the power IO RS-232 interface as P type Connecting up the power IO RS-232 interface as N type SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 158 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Connecting 6.3 Connecting the components 6.3.2 Operating the reader with external lighting Operating the reader with the external lighting units: SIMATIC VS100 MV400 LED ring light metal IR clear/metal clear MV400 LED ring light metal red clear/metal clear Connecting cables Note Use the strobe output signal to operate external lighting If you use the strobe output signal, you can use external lighting. The strobe signal is high active. The "high active" time corresponds to the ON period of the external lighting. If you use a reader with an external lighting unit in your application, wire up your application according to the following wiring diagrams. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 159 Connecting 6.3 Connecting the components MV400 LED ring light metal IR clear/metal red clear SIMATIC MV440 reader Figure 6-5 Circuit diagram for MV400 LED ring light metal IR clear/metal red clear External ring light holder Lighting unit Lamp cable Power IO RS-232 cable SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 160 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Connecting 6.3 Connecting the components MV400 LED ring light metal IR clear/metal red clear with Y adapter Y adapter External ring light holder Lighting unit SIMATIC MV440 reader Power IO RS-232 cable Figure 6-6 Circuit diagram for MV400 LED ring light metal clear, mounting without cabling errors SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 161 Connecting 6.3 Connecting the components SIMATIC VS100 SIMATIC MV440 reader External ring light holder Lighting unit Lamp cable DIN rail power unit Bridging Power IO RS-232 cable Figure 6-7 Circuit diagram for SIMATIC VS100 Detailed circuit diagram Note Identical wiring for the SIMATIC MV420 reader The wiring is identical for the SIMATIC MV420 reader. However, the SIMATIC MV420 reader does not have any drill holes for direct mounting of the VS100 lamp. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 162 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Connecting 6.3 Connecting the components Figure 6-8 SIMATIC VS100 Figure 6-9 MV400 LED ring light metal IR clear/metal red clear SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 163 Connecting 6.3 Connecting the components SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 164 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Commissioning 7.1 7 Prerequisites To commission the device, you require a PC that meets the following requirements: Operating system Windows XP Professional SP 1 or Windows 7; .NET Framework v4.0 must be installed in addition. An Internet browser with Java Runtime Environment as of V1.2 - Always use the latest Java version. You will find information on this on the Internet at (www.java.com) or ask your system administrator. - The user interface is optimized for viewing with Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 and Java Runtime Environment V.1.7.x. Note Names of "Java Runtime Environment" Different names exist for "Java Runtime Environment": * Java Runtime * Runtime Environment * Runtime * JRE * Java Virtual Machine * Virtual Machine * Java VM * JVM * VM * Java download PRONETA is installed. You will find PRONETA and the corresponding documentation (application description): - On the supplied product DVD of the reader. - As a free download on the Internet pages of the Siemens Industry Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/67460624). Refer to the documentation for information on how to install the tool. PRONETA is a free commissioning and diagnostics tool for PROFINET networks. The required WinPcap driver is part of the PRONETA installation package. You can find more information on the Internet pages on PRONETA (http://www.siemens.com/proneta). There is a network connection via Ethernet TCP/IP. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 165 Commissioning 7.1 Prerequisites Notes on installation You need administrator rights to edit the network settings of your PC: - Check the settings of your PC. To work with the user interface, you require Java Runtime Environment. Java could be installed on your PC but not activated: - Check the settings of your Internet browser. For initial commissioning, you need the PRONETA or the SIMATIC Manager. Using PRONETA or SIMATIC Manager: - You can browse your network for the reader. - Integrate the reader in your network. - Configure the network connection of your reader. Note These operating instructions contain a practical example of the PRONETA procedure. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 166 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Commissioning 7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface 7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface Steps for initial commissioning Step Activity 1 Connect the reader and PC using an Ethernet cable. 2 Turn the reader on. 3 Select network adapter. 4 Start the user interface. 5 Adjust the reader using the user interface. Configure the connection between reader and PC. Note The user interface takes the form of a Java applet stored on the reader and can be activated using an Internet browser. Step 1 Connect the reader and PC using an Ethernet cable Connect the reader directly to your PC/programming device over an Ethernet cable. Note You do not need a crossover cable because the reader is capable of autocrossing and automatically detects the type of cable you are using. Step 2 Turn the reader on Turn on the power supply for the reader. The reader is supplied with power either via a connected ASM cable or via the power IO RS-232 cable or PoE cable, see also Connecting (Page 149) . Each time it is started, the reader runs a self-test. This is indicated by the Power LED flashing. After a period of between several seconds and 2 minutes, the self-test is completed and the Power LED shines green. The reader is ready for operation. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 167 Commissioning 7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface Step 3 Select network adapter Before you can work with PRONETA, you need to select the network adapter via which you want to connect the reader to the PROFINET network. 1. Start PRONETA by double-clicking on the "Proneta.Gui.exe" file. 2. Click the "Settings" module in the PRONETA start screen. Figure 7-1 Start screen - Settings The "Settings" menu opens. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 168 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Commissioning 7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface 3. Close the "Network Adapter Selection" dialog. 4. Select the hardware interface to be used with a double-click. A green checkmark shows you the interface being used. Figure 7-2 Select network adapter Configuring the Ethernet connection between reader and PC 1. Start PRONETA by double-clicking on the "Proneta.Gui.exe" file. 2. Click the "Network Analysis" module in the PRONETA start screen. Figure 7-3 Start screen - Network Analysis SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 169 Commissioning 7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface The "Topology View" network overview opens. Figure 7-4 Network overview 3. Select the reader in the "Topology View". 4. Right-click and select "Configure Device" in the short-cut menu: Figure 7-5 Network overview - Configuring the reader 5. The "Set Network Parameters" dialog box opens. 6. Activate the option "IP configuration". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 170 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Commissioning 7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface 7. Enter values for the IP address and subnet mask as shown below in the "IP address" and "Network mask" input fields. Figure 7-6 Entering network parameters Alternatively, you can make the "Configure Device" settings in the "Accessible Devices" list. 8. Click "Set" to adopt the changed properties. Note Displaying the updated parameters The updated parameters are not shown in the "Topology View"/"Accessible Devices" list immediately: * Complete the parameters by clicking "Refresh" . IP address 192.168.100.100 * Using the IP address 192.168.100.100 simultaneously configures the reader as a DHCP server, which means that a connected PC can obtain an IP address from the reader. You may use addresses that differ from this IP address and from 0.0.0.1 to manually assign a static IP address to the reader. PCs operating in a network are usually configured as DHCP clients and obtain their IP addresses from a server. * If your PC network is configured differently or you do not know how your PC is configured, check with your network administrator. Result The reader now has the manually assigned IP address 192.168.0.8 and can be accessed at this address by your PC. Note Depending on the mode being used, you may need to restart the reader by turning the power off and on again. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 171 Commissioning 7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface Step 4 Starting the user interface with PRONETA 1. Select the reader in the "Topology View" in PRONETA. 2. Right-click and select "Open in Web Browser" in the short-cut menu. Figure 7-7 Network overview - opening the user interface of the reader Note Alternative: Starting the user interface with your Internet browser You can also start the user interface of the reader with your Internet browser: 1. Enter the IP address of the reader in the address field of your Internet browser. 2. Confirm the instruction with the Enter key. The home page of the reader is loaded. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 172 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Commissioning 7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface Note Check the signature during the first call of the user interface Check the following signature data during the first call of the user interface. Make sure that the user interface is actually that of the Siemens AG: * Name: SIMATIC MV400 * Supplier, SIEMENS AG The validity of the signature is indicated with the symbol . Note Certification check when calling the user interface As of Java Runtime Environment version 1.7 update 25, a certificate revocation check is performed when you call the user interface. Internet access is required for this check. If no Internet access is available, the start of the user interface is delayed by about one minute, and a safety warning is displayed. In the Java Control Panel, carry out the following steps to avoid the delay and the safety warning: 1. Select the "Advanced" tab. 2. In the "Conduct certificate revocation check on signed code for" area, select the "Do not check (not recommended)" option. Note that security will be compromised when you disable the certificate revocation check. Therefore, the certificate revocation check should only be disabled in administered environments. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 173 Commissioning 7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface 3. Now click on the image of the reader or the "Adjust" menu command. The user interface of the reader will open after a brief loading period. 4. This is followed by the Adjustment page of the user interface in the Internet Explorer. Result The reader is now connected and can be operated from the user interface. You can now perform the next step and adjust the reader and display the first read results. Step 5 Aligning the reader Before you put the reader into productive operation, you must first align it correctly. Use the user interface and click the "Adjustment" entry for this purpose. The dialog window shows you an image as seen by the reader. Note Focus image (SIMATIC MV440 only) In order to focus the image you may have to loosen the fixing screws on the lenses. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 174 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Commissioning 7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface Note Access online help with the "?" button In the top right corner of each page of the user interface there is a "?" button which can be used to access the online help at any time. The online help opens with the context-sensitive help text relating to your current task. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 175 Commissioning 7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface 1. Position the reader so that the code to be read appears in the center of the image and is focused sharply. The reader automatically attempts to recognize and decode a data matrix code. You can recognize a successful read by the green frame around the code. The more precise the triggering and greater the contrast in the code, the greater the read reliability. 2. If necessary, correct the settings on this page: - Exposure settings - For example, if you wish to read an EAN13 code rather than a data matrix code, press the "Recognize code type" button. The reader will launch code type recognition and remember the code type it finds for subsequent reads. - Correct the trigger settings to find the correct image acquisition time for moving objects. - Adjust distortion correction to correct significant distortion by the lens (only rarely necessary!). Note If exposure = Auto, the code must be completely in the image after the triggering until the automatic exposure is completed (approximate value: 50 to 100 ms). 3. If you make modifications, save your new settings by clicking the "Apply" button. Result You have successfully commissioned the reader. You can now read codes for your application. You can now make specific settings and save them to individual programs. For detailed information on saving programs and processing, please see Operator control and monitoring (Page 191). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 176 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Commissioning 7.3 Transferring optional licenses 7.3 Transferring optional licenses 7.3.1 Installing a license Procedure You can transfer an optional license to a SIMATIC code reader in three steps: 1. Installing the Automation License Manager 2. Install the MV plug-ins for code reader devices 3. Transfer a license to a SIMATIC code reader Requirement Note Licenses are only transferable if they have been released for the target system You can only successfully transfer licenses if they have been released for the target system. You can, for example, transfer the Text-Genius or Veri-Genius license to the SIMATIC MV440 reader but not a STEP7 license. First step: Installing the Automation License Manager Install the Automation License Manager (ALM) from the supplied product DVD of the reader: Software" > "Automation License Manager (ALM)": - If no Automation License Manager (ALM) is installed on your PC. - If the ALM is older than V4.0 SP5. Follow the instructions in the setup program: Reboot the PC if necessary. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 177 Commissioning 7.3 Transferring optional licenses Second step: Install the MV plug-ins for code reader devices Install the MV plug-in from the supplied product DVD of the reader: Software" > "Automation License Manager (ALM)" Follow the instructions in the setup program: Result Your PC is now ready for the transfer of licenses to SIMATIC code readers. Third step: Transfer a license to a SIMATIC code reader NOTICE Reader must be stopped for license transfer The reader cannot be in RUN mode when transferring a license to the reader. * Ensure that the reader is stopped. Note The reader only tolerates one Automation License Manager connection The reader will only tolerate one Automation License Manager connection at a given time. You cannot connect two PCs to the reader at once. * Disconnect the first connection before attempting to establish a new connection from another PC. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 178 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Commissioning 7.3 Transferring optional licenses 1. Run Automation License Manager. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 179 Commissioning 7.3 Transferring optional licenses 2. Open the MV plug-in with "Edit" "Connect target systems" "Connect code reader system": SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 180 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Commissioning 7.3 Transferring optional licenses 3. Enter the IP address of the reader and press the "OK" button: SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 181 Commissioning 7.3 Transferring optional licenses 4. The reader will now appear in the tree in the left half of the window. 5. Navigate to the drive that contains the license to be transferred (for example, Text Genius), and select the license with the mouse. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 182 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Commissioning 7.3 Transferring optional licenses 6. Then select the command, "Transfer" "Key" "Transfer" in the "License Key" menu. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 183 Commissioning 7.3 Transferring optional licenses 7. In the dialog that opens, select the reader as the destination drive and confirm with "OK". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 184 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Commissioning 7.3 Transferring optional licenses SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 185 Commissioning 7.3 Transferring optional licenses Following the successful transfer, the license is displayed on the reader. Result You have successfully transferred the license and the license is now available on the reader. Note Open user interface during the transfer If the user interface was open during the transfer, you must reopen it for the license to become visible in the user interface. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 186 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Commissioning 7.3 Transferring optional licenses Then terminate the connection to the reader ("Disconnect target system"). 7.3.2 Removing a license Note Open user interface during the transfer If the user interface was open during the transfer, you must reopen it for the change to become visible in the user interface. If a license is no longer required on a reader: Transfer the license from the reader to a different destination drive. The functionality according to the license is available only in demo mode after removing the license. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 187 Commissioning 7.4 Selecting connection alternatives 7.4 Selecting connection alternatives Note Additional DHCP servers disrupt communication in the network If you want to operate the reader as a DHCP server, there must be no other DHCP servers in the network. Any additional DHCP servers cause disruptions in the communication in the network. When it is supplied, the reader is set to DHCP client and does not interfere with communication in the network. Selecting the network configuration requires precise knowledge of the network environment in which the reader will be used. In the simplest situation, the reader is connected directly to a PC as described in Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface (Page 167). During initial commissioning, you select the IP address which decides whether or not the DHCP server integrated on the reader is enabled. If it is not, the device operates as a DHCP client. Operating modes Note When configuration is finished/check settings: Connecting with network Operating the reader as DHCP server can disrupt communication in an existing network. Do not connect the reader to the network until you have completed the configuration and checked your settings carefully. You can operate the reader in the following modes: DHCP Manual DHCP server PROFINET mode These modes allow the reader to be operated as follows: As a direct connection with a PC with or without a DHCP server. In a network with several nodes with or without a DHCP server. As a PROFINET device in a PROFINET network. You can change the network settings with the "Connections" menu command in the user interface following initial commissioning. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 188 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Commissioning 7.4 Selecting connection alternatives Operating the reader in DHCP client mode In "DHCP" IP mode, the code reader obtains its network address from a DHCP server. Note Unique reader device identifier on the nameplate Depending on the network structure, the DHCP server must be informed of the MAC address, the unique device identifier of the reader. You will find the MAC address, for example on the rating plate of the reader. Note DNS name for the reader If your network administrator has assigned a DNS name (Domain Name Service) for the reader, you can address the device using its name in much the same way as an intranet server. Operating the reader with a static IP address Assign the network address manually in "Manual" IP mode. Enter the IP address and the subnet mask to suit your network configuration and, if applicable, a gateway address. Note The IP address of the reader must be in the same subnet as the IP address of the communications partner. Note Gateway not required for direct connection A gateway is not necessary for a direct connection between the reader and a PC/PG. Operating the reader in DHCP server mode In "DHCP server" mode, a connected client can obtain its IP address from the reader. No other DHCP server may be activated in the network. In this mode, you can connect up to four PCs to the reader via a switch since a maximum of four IP addresses can be assigned automatically. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 189 Commissioning 7.4 Selecting connection alternatives Operating the reader in PROFINET mode In PROFINET mode, you can do the following with the reader: Connect the reader to the PC or programming device in your existing PROFINET IO network. Integrate the reader as a device into a PROFINET IO network. Assign the reader the IP configuration of the PROFINET IO controller Note IP configuration cannot be set on the reader The IP parameter settings for the reader are made in STEP 7. It is not possible to set the parameters on the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 190 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.1 8 Overview Web server technology The user interface of the reader uses the Internet browser of your PC. The user interface is stored on the reader, is loaded when the reader starts up and is executed in the Internet browser. This device version has the following advantages: You do not need to install the software on your PC. You can start the user interface from any PC. You can monitor the reader from more than one PC at the same time. The user interface always executes in a way suitable for your reader. This means that no version conflicts occur. You will find the requirements of your PC in the section Prerequisites (Page 165). What options are there for operator control and monitoring? Operator control and monitoring with the user interface (Page 192) Monitoring using integrated HTML pages (Page 266) Operator control and monitoring with a user-defined user interface (Page 262) (as of firmware V5.1) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 191 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface 8.2 User interface 8.2.1 Structure of the user interface To open the user interface, follow the instructions in the chapter: Commissioning (Page 165). The structure is presented here based on the example of the "Adjustment" task page in the user interface. This information applies to all task pages of the user interface. Figure 8-1 Structure of the user interface Language setting At the top right, there is drop-down list where you can select the language. You can change the language setting for the entire user interface and online help at any time. The following languages are available: English German French Spanish SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 192 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Italian Chinese (Simplified) Online help Note Access to online help: with the "?" button or product DVD. In the top right corner of each page of the user interface there is a "?" button which can be used to access the online help at any time. The online help opens with the context-sensitive help text relating to your current task. The online help is also saved on the product DVD supplied with the reader, which means it can be used offline. The user interface of the reader is based on a Web server and has the following dialog boxes for image processing: Tasks In the left part of the user interface, you will find a selection of tasks in the form of buttons. You can start the required task by clicking the appropriate button. The dialog for this task then opens on the right side of the user interface. At the same time, the text of the buttons changes to bold and the font color becomes white. You can select the following tasks: Adjustment - Set image Connections - Specify interfaces and plant integration Programs - Specify processing task Programs - Edit libraries Process - Select and start program Options - Make general device settings Information - Access device, statistical and diagnostic information Maintain - Save/restore settings, run firmware updates and enter the VeriCode(R) license Stop - Stop processing mode SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 193 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Image control Figure 8-2 Image control Image control is displayed for many of the task pages. Image control contains the image, and for some tasks also the overlays. "Image" drop-down list You select the image source, for example, "Cyclic", "Triggered (live)", or "Program X". Table 8- 1 "Image" drop-down list symbols Update display Updates the image display and also updates the result display, if necessary. Show details Enables and disables the display of result details in the image. A right click on the button opens a shortcut menu in which the details to be displayed can be selected. Zoom Switches between the display of the entire image (reduced) and the image section in full resolution. Full screen Opens the image in full size and full resolution in a new window. Load image Opens a separate HTML page that allows you to load a stored image onto the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 194 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Save image Saves the currently displayed image on your PC. Activates the display for grading the sharpness setting The symbol is then only available in the "Adjustment > Set image" task and in the "Calibrate" tab of the verification libraries. Shows symbols and values which simplify the grading of the sharpness settings for manual corrections on the lens. The green triangle is displayed when the sharpness is improved by the section of the image that is recognized by the ROI. The red triangle is displayed when the sharpness of this section of the image deteriorates. When the sharpness setting remains constant for approx. 3 seconds, both triangles are displayed simultaneously in blue. The percentage information in the bar graph indicates the ratio of the sharpness value currently measured in the ROI to an internally calculated, maximum sharpness value of ROI. Note that this maximum sharpness value is rarely achieved in practice. The range that contains the two triangles and the ROI can be freely positioned and scaled. The same ROI used to set the "Auto" lighting setting is used to set the sharpness. The display for grading the sharpness setting is also shown in full screen view. Moving an ROI with the mouse or keyboard Only available with the tasks "Adjustment" and "Programs": You can change the size of the ROIs shown in the image control using drag and shift. This option is also available with the keyboard: Shift: - Using the arrow keys: larger increments (10 pixels) - Ctrl + arrow keys: Shift pixel by pixel Pressing the shift key at the same time activates ROI size change with the arrow keys: - Shift + arrow keys: Changes the size in larger increments. - Shift + Ctrl + arrow keys: Changes the size pixel by pixel. Users and user rights The reader allows different levels of access control for different users. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 195 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Logging on users The "logon" area is displayed above the tasks. Here, users log on and can then work with the permissions assigned by the administrator. Note Hardware access protection (DISA bit) enabled Hardware access protection (DISA bit) has been activated: A user can only log on if the Options page - Security tab is active. To do this, click on the currently logged on user at the top right, see the figure below. The following users are set as defaults: WEB (default): General user who can perform tasks without explicitly logging on. WEB (WEB role) Service (role: Service) User1 (role: User1) Users create and change passwords as required. Admin (role: Admin The "Admin" user assigns rights for all users. "Password" input box Users enter their current password in the "Password" input box and then click the "Log on" button. The following table shows the defaults for the passwords. User Default password WEB WEB Service Service User1 User1 Admin Admin Currently logged-on user and mode of the user interface The following is displayed at the top right: The currently logged-on user (for example WEB). The following icons or no icon. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 196 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Padlock with red marking Read-only mode, i.e. no further operator input is possible because the user interface of another PC has control of the reader. Padlock with gray marking The logged-on user is not authorized to change settings. Padlock with red/gray marking DISA is active. Only users that have the "Take control" right are capable of taking over control of the reader from the controller. Padlock with green/gray marking The user currently logged on has control of the reader or has taken over control from the controller. DMC code The reader is active. Before you can make changes, you first have to change the reader to STOP. Note: As an alternative, you can use the without leaving the current page. button at the bottom left to change to "Stop" mode The access protection is activated. Controlling the reader via an automation system If the reader is controlled via an automation system, i.e. with the DISA bit set, you will need to log on to the reader as follows: 1. Make sure that only one PC is accessing the reader (padlock with red/gray markers). 2. Place the mouse pointer on the currently logged-on user (top right) and click. This brings you to the "Security" tab on the "Options" page. 3. To control the reader, log on as "User1" or "Service" user. This is only possible if the "Take control" check box is selected for the relevant user. Remember that, by logging on, you intervene in reader control by the automation system. This is only relevant for functions that require the DISA bit, for example program changes and saving programs. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 197 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Status display Figure 8-3 Status display (SIMATIC MV440) The reader and its three status LED displays appear below the task buttons. The status LEDs indicate the current status of the reader. LED designation Meaning POWER GREEN, permanently on The reader must be switched on before it can be accessed via the user interface. This LED therefore lights up a constant green. ETHERNET Permanently off The reader is not connected to the Ethernet. Either the reader is off or the Ethernet cable has been disconnected. Flashing YELLOW There is an active connection to the user interface. STATE/SF Permanently off The reader is in "Stop" mode, i.e. there are no errors. GREEN, permanently on The reader is in RUN mode, i.e., there are no errors. RED, permanently on The reader is in "Group error" mode. RED, flashing For errors during operation with onboard PROFINET IO SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 198 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface 8.2.2 Adjustment - Adjust image With this page, you start the adjustment of the reader. Figure 8-4 Adjust reader - Set image Instructions Brief instructions on setting up the reader are displayed in a text box at the top left. Recognizing the code type New as of V5.0: The reader supports machine-readable code for code type recognition. For example, if you wish to set up a new code, press the "Recognize code type" button. The reader will detect the code type and add it to its decoding order. Image settings You will find all the necessary settings here for the correct configuration of image acquisition. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 199 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Image control Figure 8-5 Image control Image control is displayed for many of the task pages. Image control contains the image, and for some tasks also the overlays. "Image" drop-down list You select the image source, for example, "Cyclic", "Triggered", "Triggered (live)", "Live". Table 8- 2 "Image" drop-down list symbols Update display Updates the image display and also updates the result display, if necessary. Show details Enables and disables the display of result details in the image. A right click on the button opens a shortcut menu in which the details to be displayed can be selected. Zoom Switches between the display of the entire image (reduced) and the image section in full resolution. Full screen Opens the image in full size and full resolution in a new window. Load image Opens a separate HTML page that allows you to load a stored image onto the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 200 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Save image Saves the currently displayed image on your PC. Enables/disables the display for grading the sharpness setting Shows symbols and values which simplify the grading of the sharpness settings for manual corrections on the lens. The green triangle is displayed when the sharpness is improved by the section of the image that is recognized by the ROI. The red triangle is displayed when the sharpness of this section of the image deteriorates. When the sharpness setting remains constant for approx. 3 seconds, both triangles are displayed simultaneously in blue. The percentage information in the bar graph indicates the ratio of the sharpness value currently measured in the ROI to an internally calculated, maximum sharpness value of ROI. Note that this maximum sharpness value is rarely achieved in practice. The range that contains the two triangles and the ROI can be freely positioned and scaled. The same ROI used to set the "Auto" lighting setting is used to set the sharpness. The display for grading the sharpness setting is also shown in full screen view. Moving an ROI with the mouse or keyboard Only available with the tasks "Adjustment" and "Programs": You can change the size of the ROIs shown in the image control using drag and shift. This option is also available with the keyboard: Shift: - Using the arrow keys: larger increments (10 pixels) - Ctrl + arrow keys: Shift pixel by pixel Pressing the shift key at the same time activates ROI size change with the arrow keys: - Shift + arrow keys: Changes the size in larger increments. - Shift + Ctrl + arrow keys: Changes the size pixel by pixel. Apply button Applies and saves the settings made on this page to the template SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 201 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface "Save program >>" button Saves the current image settings and switches to "Programs" task in which a new program is created with the saved image settings. Last result Displays the result of the last successful processing, if available. Information also appears below the results field about the current processing status. Quality / value The current values of the quality characteristics are displayed in the form of a bar according to the selected verification standard. To obtain details of the quality characteristic, move the mouse over the abbreviation for the quality (for example, "OCQ"), and a tooltip with more information opens. Table 8- 3 Bar color and meaning Color Length Meaning Green Long Quality grading is "Good" Yellow Average Quality grading is "Fair" Red Short Quality grading is "Poor" Black The value is only for information and is not used to decide the overall grade If you click on a bar, you can display the corresponding value. When you click on it again, the bar display is restored. If you click on the title of the quality characteristics, you change to the numeric display for all characteristics. Clicking again returns you to the bar display. Barcode quality characteristic display on the user interface Ten scan lines which return individual results are used to measure the quality of barcode marking. The overall grade is equivalent to the average quality of all scan lines; please see Barcode verification (Page 73) The individual grades displayed on the user interface each represent the average value of the quality characteristic. However, these average values are calculated solely from scan lines for which valid quality values could be calculated. For example, even if values can only be calculated for one of ten scan lines, conclusions can still be drawn on individual quality characteristics for extremely poor quality codes. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 202 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface 8.2.3 Connections The Connections task consists of the following three parts: Interfaces Integration Digital I/O Interfaces On the "Interfaces" tab, you specify the communications interfaces and the parameters for the interfaces. Figure 8-6 Connections - "Interfaces" tab The "Interfaces" tab has the following group boxes: Ethernet Here, you set the parameters for the Ethernet port. PROFINET IO Here, you set the parameters for the PROFINET IO interface. These input boxes are enabled when you select "PROFINET mode" in the "IP mode" drop-down list. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 203 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface ASM Here, you set the baud rate for communication with a communication module (ASM). The communication module provides options for interfacing, for example with PROFIBUS DP. CustomGUI You set the access rights of a CustomGUI for the Web API interface. RS232 Here, you set the parameters for the integrated RS232 port. TCP Here, you set the parameters of the TCP/IP connection via which, for example, you can send the result string. Archiving/MMI Here, you enter the address of a server to which you send images and/or data records for diagnostics. Enter a monitoring time after which the system will re-check for a connection between reader and server after failure to establish a connection. You can also specify the address of a remote client that is allowed to perform the functions described in "Remote client" (Page 361). Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. Integration You specify the following on the "Integration" tab: How the signals reach the reader. How the results and diagnostic data are output. How to operate SNMP on the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 204 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Figure 8-7 Connections - "Integration" tab Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 205 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Digital I/O Figure 8-8 Connections - "Digital" I/O tab (SIMATIC MV420) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 206 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Figure 8-9 Connections - "Digital I/O" tab (SIMATIC MV440) On the "Digital I/O" tab, you specify the assignment of digital inputs and outputs as well as the assignment of the LED displays and of the beep tone. Assignment of the inputs and outputs SIMATIC MV420 The reader has one digital trigger input and three digital outputs. Two of the three outputs can be freely assigned. SIMATIC MV440 The reader has six digital inputs and outputs, four of which can be freely assigned. Each of these four pins can be configured both as an input or an output. LEDs In the "LEDs" dialog box, you specify the output signal with which the freely programmable LED displays are to be connected. SIMATIC MV420: One freely programmable LED display SIMATIC MV440: Two freely programmable LEDs SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 207 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface DI/DO You set the switching time of the digital outputs READ, MATCH, N_OK and EXT_1 to EXT_4. Beep tone (acoustic signal) You configure the acoustic sensor. The beep tone only exists with the SIMATIC MV420. Table 8- 4 Configuring the acoustic sensor Task Possible values Default Meaning Adjustment Off, READ READ Configures the acoustic signal (beep tone) for adjustment mode. Processing mode Off, READ, Off MATCH, N_OK * OFF: No signal * READ: Short sound signal if it was possible to read a code (the higher the tone, the better the read reliability of the code). Configures the acoustic signal (beep tone) for evaluation mode (RUN). * OFF: No signal * READ: Short sound signal if it was possible to read a code (the higher the tone, the better the read reliability of the code). * MATCH: Acoustic signal when the code comparison was successful. * N_OK: Acoustic signal when reading was not possible. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. 8.2.4 Programs The Programs task allows you to set the type of processing which the reader executes in a cycle. This task is the main task of the user interface and offers a wide range of options. They enable you to adjust the reader to suit a wide range of read tasks in line with your requirements. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 208 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Scope of programs The "Programs" tasks includes: The image acquisition control functions The lighting selection Read task parameter assignment broken down into a sequence of read steps (steps) The output formatting of results The management and editing of the libraries for calibrations (verification), character fonts, and models. The template that is used for creating new programs. The maximum number of programs: 15 (SIMATIC MV420-B: 5) Maximum number of read steps: 12 (SIMATIC MV420: 1) Key function of the template The template contains the default settings that are used, for example, to create new programs with just a few mouse clicks. The settings made in the Adjustment - Image task are saved in the template. The template is used to create new programs in the "Programs" task. Note Change template: Template icon must be active To adjust the template, you need to activate the Template icon: * Activate the "Show program template" check box under "Options" > "Tools" > "View". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 209 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface 8.2.4.1 Graphic elements of the user interface Figure 8-10 Programs The screenshot shows the user interface with its graphic elements. Table 8- 5 Programs and template Template for creating programs Newly created program Table 8- 6 Steps Image acquisition step Decoder step (variable number) Character recognition step (OCR, variable number) Object recognition step (locator, variable number) Result step (fixed) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 210 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Table 8- 7 Step tab For the read settings of a step For the filter settings of a step For the result settings/formatting of a step Libraries The "Libraries" button is used to open a list of available libraries. Clicking on an entry opens the library view and allows you to edit the library and its entries. Table 8- 8 Control elements Save step (creates the program) Inserts a program/step/library element Delete a program / step / library element Image control Image control is displayed for many of the task pages. Image control contains the image, and for some tasks also the overlays. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 211 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface "Image" drop-down list You select the image source, e.g. "Current", "Triggered (1x)", "New". Table 8- 9 "Image" drop-down list symbols Update display Updates the image display and also updates the result display, if necessary. Show details Enables and disables the display of result details in the image. A right click on the button opens a shortcut menu in which the details to be displayed can be selected. Zoom Switches between the display of the entire image (reduced) and the image section in full resolution. Full screen Opens the image in full size and full resolution in a new window. Load image Opens a separate HTML page that allows you to load a stored image onto the reader. Save image Saves the currently displayed image on your PC. 8.2.4.2 Image acquisition step Image settings Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 212 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Figure 8-11 Image acquisition - "Image settings" tab On the "Image settings" tab, you define all the settings which affect image acquisition: Image format Resolution Exposure time Brightness Exposure time offset: Correction of automatically calculated shutter speed Timeout Start processing: Proportion of the acquired image in relation to the maximum image size Trigger delay Image distortion correction You can view the result of your settings "live" in the image control. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 213 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Control Figure 8-12 Image acquisition - "Control" tab You can define exactly how the reader acquires images. The most important settings: Single trigger Autotrigger Scan This is also where you specify the lighting connected: further information in available in Image processing/image acquisition (Page 112) Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 214 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface 8.2.4.3 Read code (decoder step) Read Figure 8-13 Decoder - "Read" tab This tab is used to define: The decoding method you work with. The code types to be read. The ROI is limited in the image control: Drag the rectangle with the mouse Whether the ROI follows the result of a preceding step. Whether one or more codes are read in the ROI. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 215 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Quality Figure 8-14 Decoder - "Quality" tab If you wish to assess the code quality (marking quality), you define the quality criteria here. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 216 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Result Figure 8-15 Decoder - "Result" tab This tab is used to define: The format in which the read result is output. The criteria by which the comparison with a specification was successful. The conditions under which the code did not meet the expectations, and the overall result of the program may be "N_OK". Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 217 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Advanced Figure 8-16 Decoder - "Advanced" tab In this tab, you can set parameters that may speed up the decoding process. In difficult read conditions, the settings you make can help improve reader read reliability. Note Code must meet the specifications - otherwise decoding slows down considerably! This tab contains expert settings which, when applied correctly, can speed up the decoding process and improve read reliability in difficult conditions. However: If a code to be read does not meet the specifications that have been set, decoding can slow down considerably or even fail completely. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 218 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface 8.2.4.4 Read plain text (OCR step) Note OCR function only available for SIMATIC MV440 The OCR feature is only available for the SIMATIC MV440 reader and requires an additional license. In OCR steps, you configure the tasks for optical character recognition. Read Figure 8-17 OCR - "Read" tab In this tab, you can set all options for image pre-processing and for the OCR algorithm: The character font The ROI in the image control Orientation and polarity of the text Character spacing Image enhancement filter SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 219 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. Filtering Figure 8-18 OCR - "Filter" tab The character recognition configured in the "Read" tab provides "character hypotheses" with an associated quality value for ambiguous characters at each character position. "2" and "Z" or "0" and "O", for example, are ambiguous character pairs. Using the settings in this tab, you can provide information about your application and filter out irrelevant results. This increases the reliability of the read result. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 220 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Result Figure 8-19 OCR - "Result" tab In this tab, you then define: The format in which the read result of the selected step is output. The conditions you want for this ROI in relation to the MATCH and N_OK signals. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 221 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Advanced Figure 8-20 OCR - "Advanced" tab In this tab, you set parameters that can increase the reading accuracy in especially difficult reading situations. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. See also Text-Genius and Text-Genius Plus (Page 90) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 222 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface 8.2.4.5 Recognize object (locator step) Note Locator function only available for SIMATIC MV440 The locator feature is only available for the SIMATIC MV440 reader and requires the additional Pat-Genius license. In locator steps, you configure the tasks for object recognition. Before you configure, you need to define a model library with at least one model. Model Figure 8-21 Locator - "Model" tab In this tab, first select the following: The model library with which this step will work. The models of the model library which are to be detected in this step. This is only possible if you have already generated a model library. Other important settings in this tab: The region of interest (ROI) in the image control in which objects will be searched for. ROI position: fixed or following a previous step. Parameter settings for edge-based image preprocessing. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 223 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. Find Figure 8-22 Locator - "Find" tab In this tab, you select typical settings for finding the objects. With these settings, you can significantly influence the speed, accuracy and requirements for matches with the stored models. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 224 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Filtering Figure 8-23 Locator - "Filter" tab In this tab, you make the settings for ordering and filtering the found objects. The settings make up the input for forming the result in the next tab "Result". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 225 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Result Figure 8-24 Locator - "Result" tab This tab is used to define: The format in which the results of an individual object and the entire locator step will be output. The conditions which will lead to an N_OK evaluation of the step. The conditions which will lead to a match error as compared to the specification. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 226 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface 8.2.4.6 Result step (overall result) Figure 8-25 Result step You specify how the results of the program steps are to be combined as an overall result. You also adjust error messages to your application. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 227 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface 8.2.4.7 Save step Figure 8-26 Save step In the "Save" program step you can: Save newly created and changed programs. Save and then test newly created and changed programs. Delete newly created programs. Delete changes to existing programs. Save changes of the template Note Change template: Template icon must be visible To adjust the template, you need to switch the Template icon to visible: * Activate the "Show program template" check box under "Options" > "Tools" > "View". Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 228 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface 8.2.5 Libraries The library concept available for SIMATIC MV400, version 5.0 and higher, allows you to store central functions and settings in library elements. These library elements can then be used more than once in several programs and program steps. For example, you can generate and configure user-defined character fonts in the character font library. You can save up to five user-defined character fonts as library elements in the character font library. The defined character fonts can be referenced and used in multiple OCR steps of a given program or indeed in multiple programs. symbol in the top right of the The libraries are accessed by clicking on the "Programs" task and selecting one of the available libraries: 8.2.5.1 Verification library Note Verification is only available for the SIMATIC MV440 reader. The verification library is used to define verification settings and calibrate the reader for code verification. You can run up to five calibrations and save them as library elements in the verification library. You can then reference the calibrations in the image acquisition of a program. Referencing specifies the parameters for code verification in this program for image acquisition and the decoder steps. The calibrated image acquisition may not always be enough for applications with highly specific image acquisition requirements. In this case, you can overwrite the settings specified by calibration in image acquisition. Note Verification results no longer comply with standard In this case, the verification results will not comply with the standard; this is indicated by a change in the verification type shown in the verification report. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 229 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Verify Figure 8-27 Verification library - "Verify" tab You specify the verification standard and define the lighting you want to use. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 230 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Calibrate Figure 8-28 Verification library - "Calibrate" tab 1. Calibrate the reader on this page. 2. Save the result. Regular calibration is necessary for good reproducibility To achieve good reproducibility, the reader must be calibrated at regular intervals. Calibration is required: When the setup is changed. When something changes in the surroundings, such as ambient brightness or ambient temperature. Achieving reproducible results To obtain reproducible results: You must make sure during the commissioning of the reader that the device can be operated without being influenced by changes in the brightness of the surroundings, for example due to shielding. The setup must be implemented according to the requirements of the standard being applied. Ensure that the resolution is correct (> 10 pixels with DMC). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 231 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface The complete code must be sharply imaged. No dirt on the lens or on the chip. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. Save Figure 8-29 Verification library - "Save" tab "Name" input field Specify the name under which the current calibration will be saved. The entry is optional. Possible values: Letters, numbers and underscores. Maximum of 10 characters. "Number" input field Specify the number under which you want to save the current calibration. Value range: 1 to 5 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 232 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface "Save now" button Clicking this button saves the current calibration under the name specified "Discard changes" button This button discards the changes made since the calibration was last saved. If the calibration is new and has not yet been saved, it will not be saved and will be lost. "Discard new calibration" button A newly created calibration in which no changes were made is removed and lost. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. 8.2.5.2 Character font library Note The character font library is only available for the SIMATIC MV440 reader. You can use the character font library to define your own character fonts for use in OCR steps. A greater range of applications is possible with user-defined character fonts than with predefined fonts. For example, special characters can be recognized and accurate recognition of the printed image makes recognition more reliable. The processing time required is also shorter than with predefined fonts. You can create up to five user-defined character fonts and save them as library elements in the character font library. You can select any of the character font library elements as character fonts in the OCR steps of a program. Creating a user-defined character font You can create your own, user-defined character font in four steps: 1. Compile image collection ("Image collection" tab) 2. Generate prototypes ("Create" tab) 3. Assign and evaluate prototypes ("Assign" tab) 4. Save character font ("Save" tab) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 233 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Image collection Note Saving necessary acquired images All actions you perform in "Image collection" can affect the content of the diagnostic image memory. If you still require the acquired images which it currently contains, you will need to save them; "Information" task, "Diagnostics" tab (Page 251). Figure 8-30 Character font library - "Image collection" tab In this tab, you specify the acquired images on which you want to base the prototypes for your custom font. The images that are currently in the diagnostic image memory of the reader are displayed first. Use the "Remove" button to delete the acquired images you do not need. Use the "Add" button to add the image currently displayed in the image control to the collection. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 234 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. Generate Figure 8-31 Character font library - "Generate" tab In this tab, you define the image specifications for selecting the prototypes of the custom character font. Character prototypes show the representation, form and typeface of the characters in the character set. The "Update display" button lets you preview the prototype search on the displayed image. If the result matches your expectations: Click the button. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 235 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface This extracts the prototypes for the user-defined character font. The prototypes are extracted from all acquired images selected in the "Image collection" tab with their current settings. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. Assign Figure 8-32 Character font library - "Assign" tab This tab gives you an overview of: The generated character prototypes and their automatic assignment to a character class. The prototypes contained in the character font and their assignment to a character class. In this tab, you can also: Add new prototypes to the character font and assign them to a character class. Delete prototypes you do not need from the character font. Correct wrong assignments by changing the assignment of a prototype to a character class. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 236 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Assigned prototypes must be checked Check whether the prototypes have been assigned to the right character class. 1. To do so, click on the character classes on the left. 2. Check whether the assigned prototypes match. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. Save Figure 8-33 Character font library - "Save" tab "Name" input field Enter the name under which the current character font is to be saved. The entry is optional. Possible values: Letters, numbers and underscores. Maximum of 10 characters. "Number" input field Specify the number under which the character font is to be saved. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 237 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Value range: 1 to 5 "Save now" button Clicking on this button saves the current character font under the name specified. "Discard changes" button This button discards the changes made since the character font was last saved. If the character font is new and has not yet been saved, it will not be saved and will be lost. "Discard new font" button A newly created font in which no changes were made is removed and lost. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. 8.2.5.3 Model library Note The model library is only available for the SIMATIC MV440 reader. With the model library, you define models of objects that you can then use in locator steps, for example for object recognition. A model library can contain several models depending on their size. You can create up to five model libraries. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 238 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Image collection Figure 8-34 Model library - "Image collection" tab The model image collection uses the image diagnostics memory. The images displayed in this image collection come from the diagnostics buffer. See also Info (Page 251). Note Saving necessary acquired images All actions you perform in "Image collection" can affect the content of the diagnostic image memory. If you still require the acquired images currently contained, you will need to save them; refer to the online help for the "Information" task, "Diagnostics" tab. In this dialog, you select the image from the image collection that you want to use to generate a new model. With the "New model" button, you start the model editor with the selected image. Use the "Remove" button to delete the acquired images you do not need. Use the "Add" button to add the image currently displayed in the image control to the collection. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 239 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Generate Figure 8-35 Model library - "Generate" tab In this tab, you have the option of generating new models or editing existing models from the model library. 1. In the image control, select the image with which you want to generate a new model. 2. In the image control, specify the ROI around the object from which you want to generate a model: To do this, specify a model name and the object class. 3. By clicking the "Generate" button, a model is created with the current settings. 4. The model can then be edited and saved. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 240 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Save Figure 8-36 Model library - "Save" tab "Name" input field Specify the name under which the current model library will be saved. The entry is optional. Possible values: Letters, numbers and underscores. Maximum of 10 characters. "Number" input field Specify the number with which you want to save the model library. Value range: 1 to 5 "Save now" button Click this button to save the current model library with the specified name. "Discard changes" button This button discards the changes made since the model library was last saved. If the model was newly created and has not been saved since, it will not be saved and will be lost. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 241 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface "Discard new model library" button A newly created model library in which no changes were made is removed and lost. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. 8.2.6 Run The change to "processing mode" means the start of the evaluation. The selected program is run and the read results displayed. Machine-readable codes and/or plain text can be read, compared and checked depending on the task of the selected program. The result of processing is displayed in processing mode. Note Operating and monitoring via the user interface can lead to longer cycle times. Figure 8-37 Processing mode SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 242 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Text box At the top left of the dialog you will see a static text with important information on the processing mode. "Program" drop-down list ("program sequence" for program sequence mode) Select the program you want to start. "Start" button Starts reader operation with the selected program. "Release trigger" button To optimize plant integration or read results, for example, you can send a trigger signal manually during commissioning. This function is, however, only enabled for the user with the "service" role when this user has the right to take over control. Quality / value The current values of the quality characteristics are displayed in the form of a bar according to the selected verification standard. To obtain details of the quality characteristic, move the mouse over the abbreviation for the quality (for example, "OCQ"), and a tooltip with more information opens. Table 8- 10 Color Bar color and meaning Length Meaning Green Long Quality grading is "Good" Yellow Average Quality grading is "Fair" Red Short Quality grading is "Poor" Black The value is only for information and is not used to decide the overall grade If you click on a bar, you can display the corresponding value. When you click on it again, the bar display is restored. If you click on the title of the quality characteristics, you change to the numeric display for all characteristics. Clicking again returns you to the bar display. Barcode quality characteristic display on the user interface Ten scan lines which return individual results are used to measure the quality of barcode marking. The overall grade is equivalent to the average quality of all scan lines; please see Barcode verification (Page 73) The individual grades displayed on the user interface each represent the average value of the quality characteristic. However, these average values are calculated solely from scan SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 243 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface lines for which valid quality values could be calculated. For example, even if values can only be calculated for one of ten scan lines, conclusions can still be drawn on individual quality characteristics for extremely poor quality codes. This procedure may result in the overall grade on the user interface being significantly poorer than the individual grades. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 244 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface 8.2.7 Options In the tabs of the "Options" task, enter the settings that are to apply to the entire device: For lighting that you cannot select directly using the article number. For user authorizations For saving information for diagnostic purposes. Extra functions Lighting These settings are only required if you are connecting lighting that cannot be selected by its article number: In the image acquisition/control step in the Lighting group, select "Other (int.)" or "Other (ext.)" as lighting. The lighting parameters set here will be used. Figure 8-38 Options - "Lighting" tab If you change the parameters of a selected lamp on this page or connect and select a different lamp: Programs and calibrations that use this lamp are marked as non-executable. In order for these to become executable again, you must check and save the calibrations and programs again. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 245 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Alternatively: If you reconnect the lamp used for the calibration operation without changing the parameters and select it in the lighting options, the calibration will become executable again. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. Security In the "Security" tab, the administrator specifies which user role is permitted to execute which tasks and, when necessary, changes the administrator password or the passwords of the users. Note Only an administrator can change authorizations The permissions can only be changed by the administrator. Note Changing default passwords For security reasons, make sure to change the delivery-state passwords: * Use only secure passwords. * To make sure that you have access to user administration and the security settings in the future, keep the passwords in a safe place. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 246 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Figure 8-39 Options - "Security" tab The reader allows different levels of access control for different users. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 247 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Diag.&monitoring In the "Diag.&monitoring" tab, you specify the information that is to be stored for diagnostic purposes. Figure 8-40 Options - "Diag.&monitoring" tab In the "Image" box of the "Logging" group box, you specify which images will be stored in which format on the reader. In "Report", you specify the format in which the diagnostics events will be stored on the reader. In the "Time base" group box, you specify whether the time stamp of the diagnostics events is supplied by the PC or by an SNTP server in the network. If you specify SNTP as the source, you will also need to specify the IP address of the server. In the "Monitoring" group box, you specify whether or not a live image is displayed in processing mode. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 248 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface In the "Persistence" group box, you specify which diagnostic information you want to store permanently on the EPROM. - When the "Save next error image" check box is selected, the image of the next NOK signal are stored. If an image has already been stored, it will be overwritten when this function is selected. - When the "Save next data records" check box is selected, all diagnostics entries you specify in the input box from the time of selection are entered in the EPROM. Existing entries are deleted when you switch to On. If the diagnostics buffer in the EPROM reaches the number of permanently storable diagnostic data records, no further entries are made. In the "Character fonts" group box, you determine whether prototypes for the "Supervised training" function should be recorded in processing mode. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 249 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Extras In the "Extras" tab, you can specify the additional functions you want to use for image processing. Figure 8-41 Options - "Extras" tab Program sequence Note A non-existent/non-executable program number prevents processing You cannot use a program sequence for processing: * If the program sequence contains a program number which does not exist. * If the program sequence contains a program number which cannot be executed. "Program sequence" mode allows you to acquire and process several images at the same time with one trigger. 1. Select a program sequence number (between 1 and 15) in the "Program sequence" dropdown list. 2. Under "Contains program", select the programs which are to be included in the program sequence. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 250 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Scanner portal Used to implement scanner portal applications (Page 356). Verification You can select whether quality grades are output as digits (4 to 0) or letters (A to F without E). View By selecting/deselecting the "Show program template" you choose whether the template icon is enabled or disabled under "Programs". You can only adjust the template when the program template is activated. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. 8.2.8 Info The Information task consists of three sections: Statistics Diagnostics Device information Statistics This part of the dialog shows you the statistics for recognition of the codes/code sequences which are currently active. Note Quality statistics Verification errors are recorded as "Poor evaluation" in the quality statistics. Furthermore, a diagnostics image is recorded for a verification error if "Poor evaluation" is activated as "Cause". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 251 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Figure 8-42 Info - "Statistics" tab In this part of the dialog, you will see statistical values on the reading of the codes and read quality. The meaning of the individual displays is explained in the online help that you can access with the "Help" button. If you have switched off "Code sequence" mode (see Options - " Extras"), information on the code currently used will be provided here. If you activated Code sequence mode, a drop-down list will be displayed. In the dropdown list, you can decide whether the statistics of the entire code sequence or the statistics of a specific code are displayed. If you simply want the statistics of the OK reads of a certain code, select the program number of the relevant sequence from the drop-down list. With this setting, the "*" symbol is displayed at several places. You can clear the statistics with the "Reset statistics" button if you have administration authorization (see Options - "Security" tab). Statistics are reset automatically if the program number is changed in processing mode. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 252 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. Diagnostics In this part of the dialog, you can display, delete and save diagnostics images and diagnostics reports. Figure 8-43 Information - "Diagnostics" tab Images Under "Images", you can see the number of images currently in the image buffer. Clicking the "Reset" button deletes all images in the image buffer. Clicking the "Open" button opens a website with all images of the image buffer. Clicking on an image enlarges it. Clicking the "Save" button opens a website with all images of the image buffer. You can save this website in various formats on your PC. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 253 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface System image The "Save diagnostics package" is used to save a complete system image in a diagnostics package. In addition to diagnostics data, this diagnostics package also contains the device parameter assignment and can be used by Support for error analysis. Note Do not operate reader during saving Saving the diagnostics package can take several minutes. To ensure that the diagnostics package is saved error-free, do not operate the reader during saving. * Wait until the save operation of the diagnostics package has been fully completed. * If saving is terminated via the corresponding browser function, this has no influence on the reader's transfer operation: You must wait until the reader has fully transferred the diagnostics package. Character fonts "Character fonts" shows you the number of prototypes currently in the diagnostic buffer. The prototypes are recorded with the "Supervised training" function. Clicking the "Reset" button deletes all prototypes in the diagnostic buffer. Data records The "Data records" group box shows you the number of diagnostics events currently in the event buffer. In "Content", you can use the check boxes to select the information you want to display about the diagnostics events in the buffer: Error Information on the occurrence and acknowledgment (manual or automatic) of errors Results Evaluation results Image Information on the image acquisition, for example exposure time, brightness States Mode change (change to RUN, ADJUST, Self-test, etc.) Control Changing control of the reader Diagnostics Changes that affect diagnostics, for example, changing the diagnostics options or fetching a time stamp from an SNTP server If you click the "Save as CSV" button, a dialog opens in which you can store the events currently selected under "Content" as a CSV file. Clicking the "Open & save" button opens a Web page with all the events of the events buffer. You can save this website in various formats on your PC. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 254 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Persistent data records Note Activating persistent data records The persistent data records option is activated, when necessary, in the "Diag.&monitoring" tab under Options. Clicking the "Reset" button deletes all the entries in the event buffer including the entries relating to temporary PROFINET I/O errors. Clicking the "Open & save" button opens a website with all the diagnostics entries saved permanently on the reader. You can save this website on your PC. If you click the "Save as CSV" button, a dialog opens in which you can save the diagnostics events permanently stored on the reader as a CSV file. Note Detailed description of the parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. Device information This "Device information" tab provides information on the following: The reader The firmware The optionally integrated internal lamp SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 255 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Figure 8-44 Information - "Device information" tab SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 256 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface 8.2.9 Maintain The "Maintain" task provides the following options: Saving or restoring settings and programs. Inputting the VeriCode(R) license number. Resetting the reader to the original factory state. When necessary, running required firmware updates. Loading a customized CustomGUI to the reader or backing it up from the reader. Figure 8-45 Maintain Settings and programs Use the "Save/restore" button to open a website from which you can save all connection settings, options, saved library elements, programs and the CustomGUI in an MV400 XML parameter file. To restore the named settings, load this file again in the reader. Store the MV400 XML parameter files in a safe place. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 257 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Firmware Note Control via automation system: DISA bit must not be set If you control the reader from an automation system, make sure that the DISA bit is not set during the firmware update. This prevents an automation system from switching the reader to RUN. "Incremental update..." button The "Incremental update..." button opens a Web page where you can update the firmware. To do this, you require a vsz file. An incremental update is only possible to a version in which the version has only changed in the third digit compared with the previous version. Example Updating with a vsz file from firmware version V3.0.0 to V3.0.1 is possible. Updating with a vsz file from firmware version V3.0.0 to V3.1.0 or V4.0.0 is not possible. "Full update..." button Note Full update: Saving all settings and programs During a full update, all settings and programs are lost: * Make sure that you save all settings and programs before running a full update. You will find more detailed information on running a firmware update in the online help and on the Web pages that open. The "Full update..." button opens a Web page where you can update the firmware. To do this, you require a bin file. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 258 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Figure 8-46 Updating the firmware of the reader SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 259 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface 8.2.10 Stop This page is displayed when the reader is in "Stop"mode. Figure 8-47 Stop reader Error display If an error occurs, the STATE/SF LED will turn red and display: The corresponding error message The meaning of the error The options for eliminating the error Acknowledge the error by clicking the "Acknowledge" button. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 260 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.2 User interface Figure 8-48 Error message SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 261 Operator control and monitoring 8.3 User-defined user interface 8.3 User-defined user interface The supplied user interface and HTML pages are ideal tools for classic operator control and monitoring tasks. For applications that are not covered by these tools, we recommend that you create a user-defined user interface. The basis of these user-defined user interfaces is the WebAPI communication of the Web server of the readers, which has been standardized for the readers. WebAPI communication is independent of the target hardware on which the user interface will run. This means that you have numerous options. For example, you can program .NET applications for the PC or apps for mobile end devices. HTML pages with JavaScript in particular represent one special option. You can adapt the HTML pages to your needs and upload them to the readers. You can access these HTMLbased, installed user interfaces from any Web browser. An example of an HTML-based, user-defined user interface is already stored on readers as of firmware V5.1. Based on this example, modifications or expansions can then be made. Requirements and notes on the development of user-defined user interfaces The reader must have firmware V5.1 or higher. The documentation of the standardized WebAPI communication does not ship with the product. It is intended for experienced developers and requires experience in Web-based development of user interfaces. You will find information on uploading/downloading and access protection of the userdefined user interface in the online help under the entries "Maintain" and "Connections" (keyword "Custom GUI"). 8.3.1 Example of a user-defined user interface An example of an HTML-based, user-defined user interface is already stored on readers as of firmware V5.1. You will find the example under the following URL: http://<IP address of the reader>/cgui/CGUISample.html NOTICE Disclaimer of liability and warranty Siemens AG accepts no liability or warranty for the product when user-defined user interfaces are used. Functions of the example The example of a user-defined user interface that ships with the product includes the following typical functions: Establishing a connection to MV4x0 Message about a failed connection establishment SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 262 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.3 User-defined user interface Example page for opening, changing and saving a program Mode change between stop, adjustment, processing, editing of programs Program/sequence selection for processing mode Starting processing mode "OK"/"N_OK" display for processing mode Detailed image display Representation of the read result Changing settings in adjustment mode: - Exposure - Exposure time - Brightness - Exposure time offset Display of the operating status (incl. errors) Display of device information for device identification Acknowledging errors SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 263 Operator control and monitoring 8.3 User-defined user interface HTML pages of the example Figure 8-49 Adjustment mode and save program SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 264 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.3 User-defined user interface Figure 8-50 Processing mode Figure 8-51 Representation of the device information SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 265 Operator control and monitoring 8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages 8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages The HTML pages integrated on the reader provide the opportunity of obtaining important information from the reader and monitoring the recognition process in many environments. Benefits Independent of the operating system or the browser you are using. Does not require Java Runtime on the visualization device. Requires little memory and performance on the visualization device. Can be integrated easily in existing applications. Display normally available in 6 languages, language can be changed online. Available HTML pages Home page Shows current device information on: Device reader revision level Firmware version SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 266 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages PROFINET IO device name Network identification Live image display with links Figure 8-52 Live image display with links Displays the images acquired by the reader in adjustment mode or processing mode. If the visualization device provides Java script support, the displayed image is automatically updated. With the displayed links, you can call up other pages. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 267 Operator control and monitoring 8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages Live image display without links Figure 8-53 Live image display without links Displays the images acquired by the reader in adjustment mode or processing mode. If the visualization device provides Java script support, the displayed image is automatically updated. This page does not provide any links to other pages. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 268 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages Last image Figure 8-54 Last image Purely display of the last recorded image without any further information and without automatic image updating. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 269 Operator control and monitoring 8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages Monitor Figure 8-55 Monitor Non-embedded display of the last image processed in processing mode with colored overlay showing the results of processing (ROIs and details view). Requires JavaScript support and Internet Explorer as of Version 8. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 270 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages Diagnostic images Figure 8-56 Diagnostic images Provides a dynamically created HTML page with which you can display diagnostic images buffered on the reader along with additional information. In the Options/Diag. & monitoring tab, you specify which images are buffered and displayed in the user interface. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 271 Operator control and monitoring 8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages Extended diagnostic images (optimized for touch panels) Figure 8-57 Extended diagnostic images (optimized for touch panels) Provides a dynamically created HTML page with which you can display diagnostic images buffered on the reader along with additional information. In the Options/Diag. & monitoring tab, you specify which images are buffered and displayed in the user interface. This page combines a large format image display with the most important additional information about the image such as the read result and display of the quality values. This page is particularly suitable when using touch panels. Navigation is made easier by the large area navigation symbols at the left edge. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 272 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages Diagnostics recordings Figure 8-58 Diagnostics recordings Provides a dynamically created HTML page with which you can display diagnostics recordings buffered on the reader relating to errors that occurred, signal changes etc. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 273 Operator control and monitoring 8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages Verification report Figure 8-59 Verification report SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 274 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages Is used to create a verification report to document the results. Note A configured program that is suitable for WBM is required to use this; for more information refer to the HTML page. Note The verification report is part of the example for the user-defined user interface, see sectionUser-defined user interface (Page 262). This means the HTML page can be adapted to specific requirements. However, note that the verification report is no longer available when the custom user interface is overwritten by a separate version. Overview of available URLs Using the following URLs, you can open the pages described above in the language of your choice. Example of a URL: http://<IP address of reader>/peeklive.html Overview of the HTML pages for monitoring the reader Table 8- 11 English, Chinese, German Page English Chinese German Home page index_en.html index_zh.html index_de.html Adjustment (user interface): adj_en.cgi adj_zh.cgi adj_de.cgi Diagnostics recordings *) diagrecs.cgi?rg=65535 diagrecs.cgi?rg=65535 diagrecs.cgi?rg=65535 Diagnostic images diagimgs.cgi?tn=1 diagimgs.cgi?tn=1 diagimgs.cgi?tn=1 ediagimghtml.cgi ediagimghtml.cgi ediagimghtml.cgi peeklive.html peeklive_zh.html peeklive_de.html *) Extended diagnostics screens *) Live Image with links Live image without links epeeklive.html epeeklive.html epeeklive.html Last image *) live.cgi?d=0 (d=0: not-down sampled, d=1 down sampled) live.cgi?d=0 (d=0: not-down sampled, d=1 down sampled) live.cgi?d=0 (d=0: not-down sampled, d=1 down sampled) Monitoring *) drawresults.cgi drawresults.cgi drawresults.cgi Verification report cgui/verifireport_en.html cgui/verifireport_en.html cgui/verifireport_de.html *) *) These HTML pages are displayed only in English. Table 8- 12 Spanish, French, Italian Page Spanish French Italian Home page index_es.html index_fr.html index_it.html Adjustment (user interface): adj_es.cgi adj_fr.cgi adj_it.cgi Diagnostics recordings *) diagrecs.cgi?rg=65535 diagrecs.cgi?rg=65535 diagrecs.cgi?rg=65535 Diagnostic images diagimgs.cgi?tn=1 diagimgs.cgi?tn=1 diagimgs.cgi?tn=1 *) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 275 Operator control and monitoring 8.5 Use of saved images Page Spanish French Italian Extended diagnostics screens *) ediagimghtml.cgi ediagimghtml.cgi ediagimghtml.cgi Live Image with links peeklive_es.html peeklive_fr.html peeklive_it.html Live image without links epeeklive.html epeeklive.html epeeklive_it.html Last image live.cgi?d=0 (d=0: not-down sampled, d=1 down sampled) live.cgi?d=0 (d=0: not-down sampled, d=1 down sampled) live.cgi?d=0 (d=0: not-down sampled, d=1 down sampled) Monitoring *) drawresults.cgi drawresults.cgi drawresults.cgi Verification report cgui/verifireport_en.html cgui/verifireport_en.html cgui/verifireport_en.html *) *) *) *) These HTML pages are displayed only in English. 8.5 Use of saved images The reader user interface provides the option of using the images stored on the PC for the purpose of parameter assignment or for trial mode. The resolution and format of the images must match the program selected at this time. Possible image sources are, for example, the diagnostic images saved via the user interface or images archived using diagnostics transfer (MMI). An HTML5 capable web browser is required to use the function, for example, Microsoft Internet Explorer version 10 or higher, Mozilla Firefox version 28 or higher or Google Chrome version 38 or higher. 8.5.1 Use in the "Edit programs" task You can open a separate page using the "Load image" button on the "Programs" page. On this page you can select images that are then shown in a list. To transfer the specific image to the camera, click "Upload this image". The image format and the resolution are automatically checked during the transfer. The uploaded image is displayed in the user interface and can be used to save programs or also be added to the image collection in the character font or model library. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 276 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Operator control and monitoring 8.5 Use of saved images The "Image" drop-down list in the user interface is permanently set to the entry "Loaded image" as long as the "Load image" function is active. To disable the "Load image" function again, you need to click the "Load image" button again. The "Load image" function is automatically disabled when you exit the "Programs" page. Note Automatic adaptation to the image used for saving When you save a program, the program automatically adapts to the image used for saving to optimize the reading speed and reading reliability in processing mode. This means you should always use only those images that correspond to the images acquired in processing mode. 8.5.2 Use for processing in trial mode An operation with saved images is also possible on the "Run" page. NOTICE Execution only by trained personnel If this functionality is used incorrectly it can seriously disrupt the productive operation of the reader. For this reason the function is protected by several mechanism and should only be used by users who are very familiar with the operation of the device. To use trial mode, the following requirements must be met: The user interface must be open. The logged on user must have the authorization "Take control". In the default setting, user with the roles "Service" and "User1" have this authorization. Expanded access must be permitted under "Options > Security". Processing mode must be started. If one of these requirements is no longer met, trial mode is terminated automatically. To use trial mode, the HTML page "http://<Reader-ip>/iu/replay.html" must be opened in a separate browser window. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 277 Operator control and monitoring 8.5 Use of saved images As in the "Load image" page, you can open images that are then shown in a list. The images can then be either uploaded individually or automatically processed one after the other. Every upload hereby corresponds to a (virtual) trigger signal, which means processing is started automatically. The additionally available operator controls are as follows: Operator control Function Starting automatic processing Stopping automatic processing Delay Wait time between completion of processing the current image and loading the next image. Removal of the currently loaded image (and stopping automatic processing). Images whose format or resolution do not match the saved program cannot be uploaded and are skipped during automatic processing. If no image is loaded for 100s, trial mode is terminated, which means the camera records a live image again at the next trigger. Note Trial mode only with suitable operating modes Trial mode is not suited for processing in the operating modes "Program sequence", "Scan" or "Auto trigger". When trial mode is used together with one of these operating modes, unforeseeable behavior, such as multiple processing, may occur depending on the exact parameter assignment. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 278 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9 You can also control the reader from an automation system instead of with the user interface. The automation system controls the reader and outputs read results and verification results. Note Actions such as saving and changing programs using an automation system are only possible when the user interface is active if the "Take control" check box is not selected for the current user on the "Security" tab in the "Options" task. Figure 9-1 Overview of communication modules, MV400 interfaces and function blocks Numerous interfaces are available for integration A variety of interfaces are available for integration into your automation system: Integration using a communication module and FB45 or Ident profile. Using an Ident profile via PROFINET IO without additional communication module. The FB79 provides a PROFINET IO interface that is compatible with the VS130-2 reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 279 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO Other available interfaces are: TCP/IP RS232 DI/DO This chapter describes the process connection options. Note Changed PROFINET compatibility response as of firmware V7 In firmware V7, the compatibility response of the code reader as PROFINET IO device was changed in relation to PROFINET IO controllers. The use of outdated firmware versions of PROFINET IO controllers leads to a non-functioning PROFINET connection or to a configuration that may not be possible in the configuration software you are using. Therefore, update the firmware of your PROFINET IO controller or downgrade the firmware of your code reader (e.g., to version 6.8). 9.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO MAC address The reader has two MAC addresses. The MAC address printed on the housing is the interface MAC address. The port MAC address is the interface MAC address plus 1. Generic station description (GSD file) The properties of the PROFINET IO device SIMATIC MV440 or SIMATIC MV420 are stored in the supplied GSD file. If the SIMATIC MV440/SIMATIC MV420 is not yet listed in the module catalog of HW Config in your STEP 7 version, add the reader with the menu command "Extras > Install GSD files...". In STEP 7 Professional, add the GSD file with the menu command "Extras > Manage device description files (GSD)". This requires the corresponding bitmap files "GSDML-002A-0B03-MV440.bmp" and "GSDML-002A-0B08-MV420.bmp" to be located in the same directory as the GSD file. Note GSD files and BMP file can be downloaded from the Internet If necessary, you can also download the two GSD files and the BMP file from the Internet at: Downloading the GSD files (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/ps/15147/dl) The reader then appears in the HW Config module catalog under: PROFINET IO \ Ident Systems \ SIMATIC Code Reading Systems \ MV44x or MV42x; see figure below: SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 280 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO In STEP 7 Professional the module appears under: Detect & monitoring \ Ident Systems \ PROFINET \ SIMATIC Code Reading Systems \ MV420 or MV440; see figure below: The reader detects the transmission speed of PROFINET automatically. PROFINET operates in 100 Mbps full duplex mode. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 281 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO To assign the device name for the reader, follow these steps: Step Activity 1 1. Open the properties window of the reader in HW Config. 2. Enter the device name. 3. Optional: In the "Identification" tab, enter the plant designation, location designation, installation date and additional information (I&M data records 1 to 3) 4. Save and compile the hardware configuration. 2 Inform the reader of the device name you have just assigned. There are three ways of doing this. Method 1: 1. In HW Config, select PLC Ethernet Assign Ethernet Address... 2. Click the "Browse" button. All the devices connected to the PNIO system are then displayed. Note: The reader must be in "PROFINET" IP mode; otherwise, it will not be displayed!). 3. Select the reader using its MAC address and identify it, if necessary, using the "Flash" button (the "LINK" LED on the Ethernet connector of the reader then flashes). 4. Enter the device name. 5. Click the "Assign Name" button. Method 2: Setup with the Primary Setup Tool, see Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface (Page 167). Method 3: Assign and transfer the device name using the user interface, see "Connections", "Interfaces" tab, "PROFINET IO", "Device name" parameter. Note Reader does not support update times of less than 4 ms The reader does not support any update time shorter than 4 ms and cannot be set to update times lower than this. If you configure in STEP 7 V5.3 + SP1, the lowest possible update time therefore changes to 4 ms for all PROFINET IO devices of the relevant PROFINET IO system. Note When using a CPU 317-2 PN/DP, you will need to select "Automatic Settings" for "Transmission Medium/Duplex" in the "Options" tab of the properties window of the PROFINET IO system (slot X2). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 282 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO 9.1.1 Configuration for using the Ident profile Note Using the Ident profile with a communication module To use the Ident profile with a communication module, follow the description in Integration via communication module (ASM) (Page 286). To use the Ident profile (PIB_1KB, PIB_16KB, PIB_32KB) without a communication module, select "Ident profile" in the HW Config catalog. - The base addresses of the In/Out section must be identical and be within in the process image of OB1 ("OB1-PI"). Note that input and output addresses are preset to "256" for the integration of the reader. The size of the process image is set to "256" (0 to 255) for many controllers. Therefore, you must either adjust the size of the process image or the input and output addresses of the reader. - The "ID" input parameter of the Ident profile block must match the addresses accordingly. The base address is 256 in the configuration example (see figure). Figure 9-2 HW Config with SIMATIC MV440 reader configured for use of the Ident profile (screenshot for SIMATIC MV420: similar) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 283 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO 9.1.2 Configuration for using the FB 79 "FB79" must be selected in the HW Config catalog to use FB 79 or the associated PROFINET IO interface without a function block. Figure 9-3 HW Config with SIMATIC MV440 reader (screenshot for SIMATIC MV420: similar) In the configuration example, the control byte of the reader was placed at output address 0 and the status byte at input address 0 of the CPU (slot 1). If these addresses are located in the process image of OB1 (process image partition "OB1-PI"), you can work here in OB1 with process image access (for example, "A I0.6" or "S Q0.1"). If this is not the case, you will have to work with direct I/O access (for example, "L PIB 0"). The start of the 16-word long consistent communication area of the reader is placed at input address 256 and output address 256 (slot 2). If these addresses are located in the process image of OB1 (process image partition "OB1-PI"), you can work with process image access in OB1 (for example, "L IW 2", "T QB 1") without losing consistency. (This only applies to CPUs that transfer consistent user data via the process image.) If these addresses are not located in the process image of OB1, however, you will have to access the communication area of the reader using SFCs 14 "DPRD_DAT" and 15 "DPWR_DAT" to ensure consistency. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 284 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO 9.1.3 Concept of device replacement Note Settings/programs of the reader being replaced as an XML file For simple device replacement, you save the settings and programs of the reader you are replacing as an XML file. Note The topology of the plant must be correctly configured To replace the device without a removable medium, the topology of the system must be correctly configured. Use the topology editor for this. Select "Support device replacement without removable medium" For a simple device replacement, select the PROFINET functionality "Support device replacement without removable medium": With this setting, the new reader receives its device name directly from the IO controller. The IO controller uses the configured topology and the neighborhood relations detected by the IO devices. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 285 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.2 Integration via communication module (ASM) Replacing the device: Procedure 1. Replace the reader with a new reader with factory settings. 2. Wait until the new reader is automatically assigned the IP address of the device that was replaced. 3. Start of the user interface using this IP address in the browser. 4. Start to restore the settings from the saved XML parameter file through the user interface. Make sure that the options "TCP/IP settings" and "PROFINET IO settings" are selected. 5. Wait until the parameters have been restored. 6. Following the automatic restart, the reader is ready for operation. 9.2 Integration via communication module (ASM) The reader supports a subset of MOBY commands. The reader can be integrated via the RS 422 interface as a write/read device (compatible with RF300) using a communication module (ASM). The hardware integration of the communication modules is described in the operating instructions of the respective device. The following parameters must be set for the configuration of the communication module: Table 9- 1 Configuration parameters Parameter Value USER_Mode FB45 / FC45 Note RFID standard profile MOBY_Mode MOBY U / D/ RF300 normal addressing Baud rate SLG RF300 / MOBY U / D * 19.2 kbaud * 57.6 kbaud * 115.2 kbaud Diagnostics with diagnostics messages none Use Ident profile (PIB_1KB, PIB_16KB, PIB_32KB). The selection must be identical to the configuration of the reader. Standard diagnostics. The diagnostics of the reader uses a separate mechanism. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 286 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile This section describes a process connection using FB45 or the Ident profile (PIB_1KB, PIB_16KB, PIB_32KB): With communication module Without communication module (Ident profile only) For an overview of the usable communication modules, see Figure 9-1 Overview of communication modules, MV400 interfaces and function blocks (Page 279) The functionality described in Functional description (Page 32) is provided by FB45 and the Ident profile. Note Understanding the MOBY system architecture/MOBY commands required To understand the following description, you require knowledge of: * MOBY system architecture * MOBY commands * Ident profile system architecture and Ident profile commands. You will find descriptions and software at Industry online support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/). Note Stable synchronization after error To ensure stable synchronization after an error has occurred, we recommend you check the ERROR bit of the Ident profile after each command. A reinitialization is necessary after an error has occurred. This is accomplished by setting the INIT bit. This procedure also applies to other undesirable behaviors during the connection. See also Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) (Page 279) 9.3.1 Setting parameters of FB45 For a detailed description of the parameter assignment and commissioning of FB45, refer to the relevant FB45 Function Manual (J31069-D0166-U001-A2-0018). The following blocks are required in the S7 project: "MOBY FB" (FB45) with instance DB. "MOBY Param": Parameter data block occupied by UDT10 or UDT11 (English or German). In the S7 sample program "MOBY FB45", this is DB45. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 287 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile "MOBY CMD": Command data block occupied by UDT20 or UDT21 (English or German). In the S7 sample program "MOBY FB45", this is DB47. "Data DB": A data block for result or job data (command data area). In the S7 sample program "MOBY FB45", this is DB48. Input parameters The variables should be assigned as follows: Variable Value/description ASM_address To match the start address in HW Config ASM_channel 1 or 2, depending on the connection to the ASM command_DB_number Number of the "MOBY CMD" data block command_DB_address Start address of the command in "MOBY_CMD" MDS_control B#16#1 ECC_mode FALSE RESET_long TRUE MOBY_mode B#16#5 scanning_time B#16#0 option_1 B#16#2 distance_limiting B#16#0 multitag B#16#1 field_ON_control B#16#0 field_ON_time B#16#0: INIT without program selection, B#16#1 ... B#16#15: Number of the program to be started (INIT with program selection) reserved0 B#16#0 cancel Not supported command_start TRUE = start of a command repeat_command FALSE, not supported init_run For information on initializing the ASM, refer to the FB45 function manual; for information on acknowledging a group error of the reader, refer to chapter Group errors (Page 312). ASM_failure Refer to the description in the FB45 Function Manual. Output parameters The following output parameters have a different meaning from the description in the function manual of FB45: Variable Description ANZ_MDS_present No significance. number_MDS Refer to the description in chapter Status displays of the MV reader (Page 291) ANZ_cancel Not supported. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 288 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile 9.3.2 Variable Description ANZ_ECC Not supported. LR_bat Not supported. Battery_low Not supported. error_MOBY Refer to the description in chapter Result evaluation of a command (Page 310) Configuring the Ident profile (RFID standard profile) For a detailed description of the parameter assignment and commissioning of the RFID standard profile FB, refer to the relevant RFID function manual (J31069-D0179-U001-A10018). The following blocks are required in the S7 project: "RFID standard profile FB" (FB101, FB116 or FB132 depending on the length of the data to be processed) "Instance DB RFID standard profile", field that can hold 10 commands. A command is a complex variable of the type "PIB_COMMAND" RXBUF and TXBUF for result or job data (command data area). Input parameters The following input parameters have a different meaning from the description in the function manual of the RFID standard profile: Variable Value/description INIT For information on initializing the ASM or on acknowledging a group error of the reader, refer to chapter Group errors (Page 312). Output parameters The following output parameters have a different meaning from the description in the function manual of the RFID standard profile: Variable Value/description RPTACT Not supported TPC No significance TP No significance UIN0-1 See description Status displays of the MV reader (Page 291) Initialization During initialization (INIT), the Ident profile automatically executes the "WRITE-CONFIG" command (see function manual for RFID Standard Profile, RFID Systems J31069-D0179U001-A2-0018). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 289 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile The parameter values of the "WRITE-CONFIG" command depend on whether the Ident profile is used with or without a communication module. WRITE-CONFIG Table 9- 2 Command parameter Variable Value Description Config 3 Reset with configuration data Length 16 Volume of parameter assignment data in bytes Table 9- 3 Command data attachment Variable Value Description Byte 1 4 Length of the following subparameters Bytes 2 to 5 0 Byte 6 10 Byte 7 0 Byte 8 0 Byte 9 0 Byte 10 0x25 Setting of the MOBY operating mode. Byte 11 2 Option Byte 12 0 Byte 13 0 Byte 14 1 Byte 15 0 Byte 16 0 ... 15 Length of the following subparameters Number of MDS 0: INIT without program selection 1 ... 15: Number of the program to be started (INIT with program selection) Table 9- 4 Command parameter Variable Value Description Config 1 Reset without configuration data Length 0 (no data attachment) Number of parameter assignment data in bytes. Here 0 since there is no data attachment. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 290 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile The command parameters from the "Command data attachment" table are possible (onboard PROFINET IO) only if no communications module is used. Resetting without configuration data corresponds to INIT without program selection. 9.3.3 Control with MV commands via FB 45 or Ident profile The reader is controlled with the MOBY commands "WRITE" and "READ" or with the Ident profile commands "PHYSICAL-WRITE" and "PHYSICAL-READ". Chaining of commands is not supported. An RFID system typically has a linear memory area for each RFID tag from which data can be read or to which data can be written. With a reader, the address space (in this case, purely virtual) is used to map certain MV commands (Machine Vision commands). In addition, the data that is "written" to a specific address, for example, has a defined semantic meaning. This section explains which address can be written to and which address can be read from to achieve a specific response from the reader. The semantic meaning of the read data or data to be written is also explained. 9.3.3.1 Status displays of the MV reader Note Startup of the reader with FB 45 or Ident profile For startup of the reader you need to ensure the following after power "ON" when using FB 45 or the Ident profile (with or without communication module): 1. Set a startup flag in OB100 of the controller. 2. When the startup flag is set, you need to repeat the initialization ("init_run" or "INIT" command) until positive acknowledgment is received. 3. To generate an error in the automation system, also monitor the maximum wait time for positive acknowledgment of the initialization and expected status bit values (only necessary if there is initialization without program selection). The status bits IN_OP (in operation) and RDY (ready) of the reader indicate whether the device has a group error, is in processing mode or is in STOP mode: RDY (ready) IN_OP (in operation) Description X 0 Group error 1 1 Processing mode 0 1 Stop or adjustment mode Depending on the status of the reader, various MV commands are permitted (see section Preconditions for the commands (Page 311)) or an acknowledgement of the error (see Group errors (Page 312)) is required before the next MV command can be sent. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 291 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile When there is a group error, this error must be acknowledged before further operation is possible. The acknowledgment mechanism is explained in the section WRITE commands/MV command interface (Page 293). The status display is only valid after initialization has been successfully performed (Set "MOBY Param".init_run bit in FB45 or "instance DB-RFID standard profile".INIT bit with the Ident profile). Table 9- 5 FB45 Output byte "number_MDS" ("MOBY Param" DB) Meaning Table 9- 6 9.3.3.2 Bit 2 Bit 1 These two bits are interpreted as an Corresponds to unsigned value (bit 2 is the less sigRDY bit of the nificant bit) that represents the numreader ber of available decoded codes. If the value = 3, three or more decoded codes are available. Bit 0 Corresponds to IN_OP bit of the reader Ident profile Output bit ("Instance DB RFID standard profile") Meaning Bit 3 UIN3 UIN2 UIN1 These two bits are interpreted as an Corresponds to unsigned value (bit 2 is the less sigRDY bit of the nificant bit) that represents the numreader ber of available decoded codes. If the value = 3, three or more decoded codes are available. UIN0 Corresponds to IN_OP bit of the reader Initialization To perform the initialization (FB45: init_run, Ident profile: INIT), you have the choice between an initialization with program selection and initialization without program selection. To react to a change in the operating mode and to check the preconditions to be fulfilled (Preconditions for the commands (Page 311)): Monitor the operating mode of the reader regardless of the initialization method selected by the automation system (Status displays of the MV reader (Page 291)). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 292 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Initialization with program selection Initialization with program selection enables: Initialization after startup - After the self-test, the reader switches to processing mode with the selected program number. - With initialization during self-test, the initialization is acknowledged negatively. Wait for the end of the self test and repeat the initialization until you receive a positive acknowledgment. Reset of pending error with the subsequent start of the selected program. If the selected program does not exist, the initialization is acknowledged negatively. Initialization without program selection Initialization without program selection enables: Initialization after startup - After the self-test, the reader changes to the operating mode that it was in prior to shutdown. - Initialization is acknowledged positively as early as during the self-test. This means that you need to determine the operating mode using the status display (Status displays of the MV reader (Page 291)). Identification of pending error (Group errors (Page 312)) Reset of pending error 9.3.3.3 WRITE commands/MV command interface Supported MV commands With the MOBY WRITE commands, you can send various MV commands (Machine Vision commands). An MV command is always a write command to the address 0x0000 ("MOBY_CMD".address_MDS or "PIB_COMMAND".StartAddress = 0) with a length depending on the command ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length). The first byte in the command data area codes the relevant MV command and determines the meaning of any bytes that follow. The following commands are supported and coded as follows: MV command Command identifier Program change (write program number) 0x01 Activate read program number once 0x02 Write match string 0x03 Enable read match string once 0x04 Set DISA bit 0x05 Reset DISA bit 0x06 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 293 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile MV command Command identifier Writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH) 0x07 Set digital out 0x08 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 294 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Command: Program change (write program number) To change programs, a WRITE command is sent with the data shown in the following table. If it is possible to change to the program specified in the job, there will be a positive response to the WRITE command, otherwise the response is negative. Before the program is changed, the DISA bit is set automatically on the reader and is reset again after the program change. If the DISA bit was set manually prior to the program change, it will remain set. The WRITE command must set the length 0x2 ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_ COMMAND".Length = 0x2), otherwise the command will be acknowledged negatively. If an attempt is made to change to an unsaved program or a program number > 0xF, the command will also be denied and acknowledged negatively. Table 9- 7 Moby_CMD Command [hex] Sub_ Command [hex] Length [dec] Address_ MDS [hex] DAT_DB_number [dec] DAT_DB_address [dec] 01 - 2 0 Number of the data DB (for example 48) Pointer to the start word (for example 0) Pointer to the user data to be sent to the reader. Table 9- 8 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x71 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length 0x02 StartAddress 0x00 Table 9- 9 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x01 "Program change" command identifier 0x0001 0x00 - 0x0F Number of the program SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 295 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Command: Read program number The "Read program number" command is used to prepare reading of the current program number. The MV command itself does not perform the actual read. For this reason, the data of the WRITE command contains only the MV command itself. The user sends the MV command "Read program number" with the WRITE command and waits for a positive response. A READ command is then used to read out the actual program number, see also READ commands (Page 305). The WRITE command must specify a length of 0x1 ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length = 0x1), otherwise a negative response will be sent. Table 9- 10 Moby_CMD Command [hex] Sub_ Command [hex] Length [dec] Address_ MDS [hex] DAT_DB_number [dec] DAT_DB_address [dec] 01 - 1 0 Number of the data DB (for example 48) Pointer to the start word (for example 0) Pointer to the user data to be sent to the reader. Table 9- 11 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x71 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length 0x01 StartAddress 0x00 Table 9- 12 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x02 "Read program number" command identifier SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 296 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Match string Note Sent match string takes effect immediately A sent match string takes effect immediately. The sent match string is not synchronized with the trigger signal or the processing of buffered image acquisition. * Therefore, make sure that the match string is sent when no image acquisition is running. Requirements for matching with OCR Sending a match string with OCR Sending a match string is only possible if, in "2. Filtering", the source "Filter with match text" or "Character type at pos." is configured as the string specification. The match string is then either a defined string or a syntax corresponding to "Character type at pos.". Identical formatting of the sent match string The match string that is sent must be identical to the input made through the user interface. Permitted non-printable special characters must be sent as one character. A line break (\n), for example, as '\n' (ASCII value 0x0D) and not as '\''n' (ASCII values 0x2F and 0x6E). Requirement for matching with 1D/2D codes All match options ("All", "Position", "ID", "GS1") are supported for 1D/2D codes. The match string that is sent must be formatted so that the information required for matching can be extracted. Command: Write match string This MV command allows the match string of the program currently loaded (nonpersistent) to be overwritten. Executing this command is possible only when the reader is in processing mode. If the reader exits processing mode, for example by changing to STOP mode or to the group error status, the overwritten match string is discarded. This also applies to a program change. The structure of the command data area is outlined in the table below. The total length of the data to be written is the overall length of the match string + 3 bytes for the length and the command identifier ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length = n + 3). If the new match string is applied to the current program, the command is acknowledged positively. If the match string cannot be overwritten, an extra entry is made in the diagnostic data. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 297 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Table 9- 13 Moby_CMD Command [hex] Sub_ Command [hex] 01 - Length [dez] Address_ MDS [hex] DAT_DB_number [dez] DAT_DB_address [dez] 0 Number of the data DB (for example, 48) Pointer to the start word (for example, 0) Match string length +3 Table 9- 14 Pointer to the user data to be sent to the reader. PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x71 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length Match string length + 3 StartAddress 0x00 Table 9- 15 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x03 Command identifier "Write match string" 0x0001 0x00-0xFF Match string length high byte 0x0002 0x00-0xFF Match string length low byte 0x0003 1st character of the match string ... ... n+2 (n-1)th character of the match string n+3 nth character of the match string Command: Read match string The "Read match string" MV command is used to prepare reading of the match string. The actual read is not executed with the WRITE command. The command data area of the WRITE command contains only the command identifier. Send the "Read match string" command with the WRITE command and wait for the positive response. Then read out the actual string with a READ command. The WRITE command must specify a length of 0x1 ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length = 0x1), otherwise a negative response is sent. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 298 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Table 9- 16 Moby_CMD Command [hex] Sub_ Command [hex] Length [dez] Address_ MDS [hex] DAT_DB_number [dez] DAT_DB_address [dez] 01 - 1 0 Number of the data DB (for example, 48) Pointer to the start word (for example, 0) Pointer to the user data to be sent to the reader. Table 9- 17 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x71 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length 0x01 StartAddress 0x00 Table 9- 18 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x04 Command identifier "Read match string" SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 299 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile DISA bit Command: Set DISA bit The command data to be "written" in the WRITE command simply contains the command identifier "Set DISA bit". If the DISA bit of the reader is set, the command is acknowledged positively. If the DISA bit is already set, it remains set. The WRITE command must specify a length of 0x1 ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length = 0x1), otherwise a negative response will be sent. Table 9- 19 Moby_CMD Command [hex] Sub_ Command [hex] Length [dez] Address_ MDS [hex] DAT_DB_number [dez] DAT_DB_address [dez] 01 - 1 0 Number of the data DB (for example 48) Pointer to the start word (for example 0) Pointer to the user data to be sent to the reader. Table 9- 20 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x71 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length 0x01 StartAddress 0x00 Table 9- 21 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x05 Command identifier "Set DISA bit". Command: Reset DISA bit The command data to be "written" in the WRITE command simply contains the command identifier "Reset DISA bit". If the DISA bit of the reader is reset, the command is acknowledged positively. If it was already reset, this command has no effect but is nevertheless positively acknowledged. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 300 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile The WRITE command must specify a length of 0x1 ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length = 0x1), otherwise a negative response will be sent. Table 9- 22 Moby_CMD Command [hex] Sub_ Command [hex] Length [dez] Address_ MDS [hex] DAT_DB_number [dez] DAT_DB_address [dez] 01 - 1 0 Number of the data DB (for example 48) Pointer to the start word (for example 0) Pointer to the user data to be sent to the reader. Table 9- 23 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x71 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length 0x01 StartAddress 0x00 Table 9- 24 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x06 Command identifier "Reset DISA bit". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 301 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Command: Writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH) NOTICE Availability of XMATCH The XMATCH function is not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B. Requirements for matching with OCR Sending a match string with OCR A match string can only be sent: When the source "Filter with match text" is configured as the string specification for the corresponding step (OCR type) under "Filter". When the source "Character type at pos." is configured as the string specification for the corresponding step (OCR type) under "Filter". The match string is therefore either a defined string or a corresponding "Character type at pos." syntax. Identical formatting of the sent match string The match string that is sent must be identical to the input made through the user interface. Permitted non-printable special characters must be sent as one character. A line break (\n), for example, as '\n' (ASCII value 0x0D) and not as '\''n' (ASCII values 0x2F and 0x6E). Requirement for matching with 1D/2D codes All match options ("All", "Position", "ID", "GS1") are supported for 1D/2D codes. The match string that is sent must be formatted so that the information required for matching can be extracted. Writing command data The command data to be "written" in the WRITE command contains an XMATCH header and the XMATCH user data. The command is acknowledged positively when the structure of the header and user data is correct. The WRITE command must specify the total length of the XMATCH user data + 4, otherwise a negative response is sent. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 302 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Table 9- 25 Moby_CMD Command Sub_ Length Address_ [hex] Command [dez] MDS [hex] Total length of the XMATCH user data + 4 0 [hex] 01 - DAT_DB_num ber DAT_DB_addr ess [dez] [dez] Number of the data DB (for example, 48) Pointer to the start word (for example, 0) Pointer to the user data to be sent to the reader. Table 9- 26 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x70 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length Total length of the XMATCH user data + 4 StartAddress 0x00 Table 9- 27 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x07 Command identifier XMATCH 0x0001 0x00 Reserved 0x0002 See chapter "Control over TCP/IP and RS232" (Page 340) XMATCH user data ... 0xN SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 303 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Command: Set digital out Writing command data The command data to be "written" in the WRITE command contains the command identifier and six parameters. With this command, the four logical signals "EXT_1", "EXT_2", "EXT_3" and "EXT_4" can be set and linked to other logical signals. These signals can only be set through an automation system. These signals can also be applied to the available digital output pins using the user interface. Receipt of this command is logged in the diagnostics data records. If the command contains an invalid parameter, a negative acknowledgement is sent. The WRITE command must specify a length of "0x7" ("MOBY_CMD Length" or "PIB_COMMAND Length" = 0x7), otherwise a negative response is sent. Table 9- 28 Moby_CMD Command Sub_ Length Address_ [hex] Command [dez] MDS [hex] 7 0 [hex] 01 - DAT_DB_num ber DAT_DB_addr ess [dez] [dez] Number of the data DB (for example, 48) Pointer to the start word (for example, 0) Pointer to the user data to be sent to the reader. Table 9- 29 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x71 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length 0x07 StartAddress 0x00 Table 9- 30 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x08 Command identifier "Set digital out". 0x0001 0x1-0x4 Number of the logical external signal. Corresponds to "EXT_1", "EXT_2", "EXT_3" and "EXT_4". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 304 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Address Value Meaning 0x0002 0x0-0x2 Level of the signal 0x0003 0x0004 0x1-0x7 0x0-0x5 * 0x0: Set level statically to "low". * 0x1: Set level statically to "high". * 0x2: Set level for configured pulse time to "high". Link type * 0x1: Logical "OR" * 0x2: Logical "AND" * 0x3: Logical "Exclusive OR" * 0x4: no link * 0x5: Logical "OR not" * 0x6: Logical "AND not" * 0x7: Logical "Exclusive OR not" Logical signal for linking. If the link type is 0x4, the parameter has no significance. 9.3.3.4 * 0x0: Logical signal "IN_OP" * 0x1: Logical signal "TRD" * 0x2: Logical signal "RDY" * 0x3: Logical signal "READ" * 0x4: Logical signal "MATCH" * 0x5: Logical signal "NOK" 0x0005 0x0 Reserved, must be 0x0 to retain upwards compatibility. 0x0006 0x0 Reserved, must be 0x0 to retain upwards compatibility. READ commands The following commands are supported: MV command Trigger and read result string Read result string Read program number Read match string SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 305 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Command: Trigger and read result string To activate a trigger and read the result string, you will need to send a READ command starting at address 0x0000. The table below shows the content of the command data area specified in the command ("MOBY_CMD".DAT_DB_number or "instance DB-RFID standard profile".RXREF) after fully processing the READ command (assuming that 0x0000 was selected as the start address for the read). The total length of the result string is stored at the (virtual) addresses 0x0000 and 0x0001. If the result string is longer than the number of characters to be read ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length), the character string is truncated at the back. If the result string is shorter than the number of characters to be read, the string is padded with the value 0x00. You can also configure the format text so that the result bits "READ", "MATCH", "N_OK" are inserted in the string. If you do not know of the total length of the result string, send a READ command starting at address 0x0002 ("MOBY_CMD".address_MDS or "PIB_COMMAND".StartAddress = 2). You can also start to read from any start address, for example, when the result string is only relevant starting at the 10th character in the code. Table 9- 31 Moby_CMD Command [hex] Sub_ Command [hex] Length [dec] Address_ MDS [hex] DAT_DB_number [dec] DAT_DB_address [dec] 02 - length of the result string 0 Number of the data DB (for example, 48) Pointer to the start word (for example, 0) Table 9- 32 FB45 stores the read result data here. PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x70 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length length of the result string StartAddress 0x00 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 306 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Table 9- 33 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x00-0xFF Length of the entire result string (more significant byte) 0x0001 0x00-0xFF Length of the result string (less significant byte) 0x0002 1st character of the result string 0x0003 2nd character of the result string ... ... (n + 1) (n-1)th character of the result string (n + 2) nth character of the result string Command: Read result string Using the same mechanism as "Read trigger + result string", it is possible to read out the decoded string of a code through ASM. When the trigger source selected in the user interface is not "ASM", the READ command does not activate a trigger but simply returns the result of the decoding. If a result is already available, this is returned. If there is not yet a result string available, the system waits until a result string is available. After processing the command, the result string is available in the command data area specified in the command ("MOBY_CMD".DAT_DB_number "instance DB-RFID standard profile".RXREF). You can cancel processing of the command by setting the "MOBY Param".init_run (FB45) or "instance DB-RFID standard profile".INIT bit (RFID standard profile). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 307 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Command: Read program number To have the current program number returned when a READ command is received, the MV command "Read program number" (WRITE command) must be sent immediately before, see WRITE commands/MV command interface (Page 293). The READ command must specify the start address 0x0000 and a length of 0x1 ("MOBY_CMD".address_MDS or "PIB_COMMAND".StartAddress = 0, "MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length = 1). The byte read at address 0x0000 contains the number of the program currently selected and is stored in the command data area specified in the command ("MOBY_CMD".DAT_DB_number or "instance DB-RFID standard profile".RXREF) after the command is processed. Table 9- 34 Moby_CMD Command [hex] Sub_ Command [hex] Length [dec] Address_ MDS [hex] DAT_DB_number [dec] DAT_DB_address [dec] 02 - 1 0 Number of the data DB (for example, 48) Pointer to the start word (for example, 0) FB45 stores the read result data here. Table 9- 35 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x70 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length 0x01 StartAddress 0x00 Table 9- 36 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x0 - 0xF Current program number SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 308 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Command: Read match string To have the current match string returned when the READ command is received, the MV command "Read match string" (WRITE command) must be sent immediately before, see WRITE commands/MV command interface (Page 293). After processing the READ command, the following data is available in the command data area: If the length of the data to be read ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length) is not n + 2 bytes (n = total length of the match string) the match string is truncated or the command data area is padded with 0x00. Table 9- 37 Moby_CMD Command [hex] Sub_ Command [hex] Length [dec] Address_ MDS [hex] DAT_DB_number [dec] DAT_DB_address [dec] 02 - total length of the match string +2 0 Number of the data DB (for example 48) Pointer to the start word (for example 0) Table 9- 38 FB45 stores the read result data here. PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x70 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length total length of the match string + 2 StartAddress 0x00 Table 9- 39 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x0 - 0xF Length of the total match string (more significant byte) 0x0001 0x00-0xFF Length of the total match string (less significant byte) 0x0002 1st character of the match string ... ... n+2 nth character of the match string SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 309 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile 9.3.3.5 Result evaluation of a command The result of the command execution appears as follows: Through the "ready" bit in the command and status word "BEST" and the output bytes "error_MOBY", "error_FB" and "error_BUS" ("MOBY Param"). Through the output double word "STATUS" ("instance DB RFID standard profile"). In addition to the description in the relevant function manuals of FB45 and the RFID standard profile, the following values have a specific meaning for the reader: FB45: Ident profile STATUS Meaning Error_MOBY Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 0x05 0xE6 0xFE 0x01 Command not permitted (Preconditions for the commands (Page 311)) or the command was aborted. The precise error message can be obtained with INIT without program selection. Possible causes: 0x0D 0xE1 0xFE 0x03 * The send buffer is full * Program damaged * Ethernet interface is in operation and there is a problem * The connected lamp is overloaded Bad parameter in MV command Command is incorrectly structured, for example: * The specified address for a WRITE command is not 0x0000. * Program change MV command - length of the data to be written > 0x1. - Program number transferred is > 0xF. Program number transferred is not saved. 0x15 0xE6 0xFE 0x03 Initialization with program selection (init_run/INIT) is not possible: * Program number transferred is not saved. * Reader is still in self-test. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 310 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile 9.3.3.6 Command Preconditions for the commands Trigger source Result (binary) Result string Control DISA No group error Processing mode Stop mode Program change (write program number) ASM or PROFINET IO YES YES YES Read program number ASM or PROFINET IO YES Write match string ASM or PROFINET IO YES YES NO Read match string ASM or PROFINET IO YES YES NO Set DISA bit ASM or PROFINET IO YES Reset DISA bit ASM or PROFINET IO YES XMATCH1) ~ ~ ~ ASM or PROFINET IO ~ YES YES NO Set digital out1) ~ ~ ~ ASM or PROFINET IO ~ ~ ~ ~ Read result ASM or PROFINET IO YES YES NO Trigger + read result string ASM or PROFINET IO ASM or PROFINET IO YES YES NO Acknowledge group error ASM or PROFINET IO NO NO NO 1) Not available on SIMATIC MV420 SR-B Selection is unimportant. YES State must be satisfied. NO State is not permitted. ASM If the "PROFINET IP (Ident profile)" mode is set, you must select PROFINET IO; otherwise, select ASM. If you want to send a command, make sure that the selection criteria are met according to the table above. If the selection criteria are not met, the command is acknowledged negatively. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 311 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile The columns "Trigger source", "Result", "Result string" and "Control" correspond to the selection in the user interface (Connections Integration Connection). As a general rule, "ASM" must be selected for at least one option so that the reader is accessible via the RS-422 interface. Note The following applies to all commands * The state of the DISA bit is irrelevant * There is no group error. If there is nevertheless a group error, first acknowledge the error. 9.3.3.7 Group errors If a correct command is acknowledged negatively even though all the preconditions are met, there is a group error ("IN_OP" bit not set). Acknowledging the group error To acknowledge a group error through ASM or PROFINET IO, "ASM" or "PROFINET IO" must be configured as the controller in the user interface (Connections Integration Connection). Initialization with program selection 1. Acknowledge the error by initializing with program selection. The reader changes to processing mode again with the required program. To change to processing mode, the DISA bit is set automatically and reset again after the status change. If the DISA bit was set manually before, it remains set after the status change. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 312 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Initialization without program selection If the cause of the group error is to be identified using FB 45 or the Ident profile, initialization without program selection needs to be used. Note that when using the Ident profile without a communication module, PROFINET diagnostics can be used. 1. Run the initialization without program selection. The group error is not acknowledged by this. A value identifying the group error is, however, present in the output byte "error_MOBY" ("MOBY Param") or output double word "STATUS" ("instance DB RFID standard profile"). You can find a list of possible group errors and the corresponding error codes in section Alarm, fault and system messages (Page 375). 2. Finally, repeat the initialization (if required with program selection) to acknowledge the group error. After the acknowledgment, the reader returns to processing mode. To change to processing mode, the "DISA" bit is set automatically and reset again after the status change. If the "DISA" bit was set manually before, it remains set after the status change. 3. Check the "IN_OP" status bit. This bit is normally set automatically. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 313 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 9.4 Control with FB79 Principle of data transmission via PROFINET IO The following figure shows the reader interfaces relevant for data transmission via PROFINET IO (FB79). Figure 9-4 Principle of data transmission via PROFINET IO (FB79) Note Bytes 1 to 31 of the "Send" user data interface are relevant. Bytes 1 to 4 of the "Receive" user data interface are relevant. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 314 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 9.4.1 Assignment of the interfaces relevant to PROFINET IO Control byte Bit no. Corresponds to signal Function 0 DISA Disable: Disables manual keyboard input, program selection and program saving, error acknowledgment, starting the reader 1 SEL0 Select 0: Program selection bit 0 2 SEL1 Select 1: Program selection bit 1 (when TRN=0) / Save program (when TRN=1) 3 SEL2 Select 2: Program selection bit 2 4 SEL3 Select 3: Program selection bit 3 5 TRN Save program: Saves new program. 6 TRG Trigger: Processing starts on a positive edge. 7 RES Reset: Reset error. Note The SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3, and TRN signals are effective only when DISA=1. Status byte Bit no. Corresponds to signal Function 0 In operation: 1 IN_OP TRD * 0 = error message is displayed. * 1 = reader functioning, no error Program saved: * * 2 RDY In run: - 0 = Selected program has not been saved. - 1 = Selected program has been saved. When saving program (TRN=1) - 0 = Save program active - 1 = Acknowledgment signal (RDY=0) Ready: * 0 = Startup of reader or reader in stop * 1 = Reader in run 3 READ Processing result: Code was localized and decoded. 4 MATCH Processing result: Code matches the trained code. 5 N_OK Code was not legible. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 315 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 Bit no. Corresponds to signal Function 6 - Current status of the trigger input 7 - Reserved Note Writing the control byte and reading and evaluating the status byte must be performed in the same way as in the time diagrams shown under "Select program". "Send" user data interface Byte no. Meaning 0 Reserved 1 Consecutive number of the data packet to be transferred to the I/O controller. 2 Total net length of the data to be transferred in bytes in STEP 7 format. 3 4 Data ID of the supplied data 5 1st user data byte ... ... 31 27th User data byte Note The "data ID of the supplied data" defines the data transferred. The coding matches byte 4 of the "Receive" user data interface. With a read job on the "Receive" user data interface, the ID of the data currently being transferred is entered here. "Receive" user data interface Byte no. Meaning 0 Reserved 1 Consecutive number of the current data packet received correctly by the I/O controller 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4 Data ID of the requested data. 5 Reserved ... ... 31 Reserved SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 316 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 The "data ID of the requested data" defines the data to be read. The data ID can have the following values: ID (B#16#) Meaning 09 * User data byte 1: Outputs the program number selected on the reader. * User data byte 2: When the DISA bit is set, the display indicates whether a user who has the right to overrule the DISA signal is logged on through the user interface: 00H: "Take control" is enabled, 01H: "Take control" is disabled. 81 Result string 82 Quality characteristics 83 Quality characteristics as absolute values and result string 84 Quality characteristics in classes 85 Quality characteristics in classes and result string 86 Quality characteristics in classes and absolute quality characteristics 87 Quality characteristics in classes, absolute quality characteristics and result string 88 Position of the data matrix code 89 Position and result string 8A Position and absolute quality characteristics 8B Position, quality characteristics as absolute values and result string 8C Position and quality characteristics in classes 8D Position, quality characteristics in classes and result string 8E Position, quality characteristics in classes and absolute quality characteristics 8F Position, quality characteristics in classes, absolute quality characteristics and result string Note * The code qualities will only be output correctly when a program is set with the "Read code" task and calibrated or uncalibrated verification according to ISO 16022. Otherwise the quality codes are not calculated when the code is read and cannot be output. * Use the definition of the "Format string" in the "Result" tab (result step) under "Programs" to output the quality values when another type of verification is selected. The quality values are then output according to the parameter settings along with the read result. Note * If no data ID is entered, processing takes place but no data is transferred. * When the data ID is B#16#09, no trigger is necessary. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 317 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 The table below specifies what content and which data types are returned when the data ID contains the position or the quality characteristics. The order of the code properties in the table is identical to the order of the code properties in the data packet. If applicable, the result string is returned after the code properties. Data to be read consists of ... Position of the data matrix code * Note: X position * Y position * Rotation angle * Viewing angle * Symbol contrast * Print growth * Axial non-uniformity * Unused error correction * Symbol contrast * Print growth Viewing angle is only output for DMC quality = ambitious Absolute quality characteristics Quality characteristics as classes Data type of each component INT * Axial non-uniformity * Unused error correction * Overall grade REAL CHAR Note When the data to be read contains the absolute quality characteristics, remember that the value of the "Swap" parameter (in the user interface in Connections Interfaces in PROFINET IO or "Swap") must be taken into account. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 318 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 9.4.2 Sample program for data exchange if code length 27 bytes Below, you will find a sample program for data exchange when the code length is a maximum of 27 bytes. Note The sample program can only run on the following S7 CPUs: * On a CPU 318 and the S7-400 CPUs as of firmware version V3.0.0 * On S7-300 CPUs with MMC On all other S7-300 and S7-400 CPUs, you must use SFCs 14 and 15 for all access to the two user data interfaces. Explanation of the program Only the pure result string with data ID B#16#81 is output. The I/O controller does not check how many bytes the reader has returned but always reads 27 bytes. The I/O controller does not monitor anything. The start of the "Send" user data interface is at address 4 of the process image input. The start of the "Receive" user data interface is at address 4 of the process image of the outputs. To ensure the consistency over the entire area of 32 bytes, there must be no update of the process image during the program shown here. The user data is stored in data block DB17 starting at byte 4. STL program //Enter data ID (in principle only necessary in the first cycle) L B#16#81 T QB 8 // Only result string // Check number of data packet for 1 L IB 5 // Number of data packet from reader L 1 <> I // If number does not equal 1 JC m001 // ... user data is not available yet // Read user data from reader L ID 9 // Read first 4 bytes of user data T DB17.DBD 4 // Store in DB L ID 13 // Read next 4 bytes of user data T DB17.DBD 8 // Store in DB SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 319 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 //Enter data ID (in principle only necessary in the first cycle) L ID 17 // Read next 4 bytes of user data T DB17.DBD 12 // Store in DB L ID 21 // Read next 4 bytes of user data T DB17.DBD 16 // Store in DB L ID 25 // Read next 4 bytes of user data T DB17.DBD 20 // Store in DB L ID 29 // Read next 4 bytes of user data T DB17.DBD 24 // Store in DB L IW 33 // Read second last 2 bytes of user data T DB17.DBW 28 // Store in DB L IB 35 // Read last byte of user data T DB17.DBB 30 / // Store in DB // Acknowledge with no. of data packet m001: L IB 5 // Number of data packet T QB 5 // Send as acknowledgment to reader BEU SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 320 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 9.4.3 Programming data fragmentation Handshaking The following sections introduce a handshaking procedure that ensures the consistency of all the data transferred from the reader to the I/O controller regardless of any configured consistency mechanisms in PROFINET. This procedure must be used with every data transfer, even if the transfer only consists of one data block, for example when reading out the program number selected on the reader. Remember that you need to enter the required data ID in byte 4 of the "Receive" user data interface. Note Handshaking can only run on the following S7 CPUs Handshaking using the method described here is only possible on the following S7-CPUs: * On a CPU 318 and the S7-400 CPUs as of firmware version V3.0.0 * On S7-300 CPUs with MMC On all other S7-300 and S7-400 CPUs, you must use SFCs 14 and 15 for all access to the two user data interfaces. Step Activity in the user program of the PROFINET IO controller 1 Scan byte 1 of the "Send" user data interface cyclically. As long as this byte has the value 0, there is no new data available. If it has the value 1, go to step 2. 2 The value 1 in byte 1 of the "Send" user data interface has the following meaning: The reader has started data transfer. Read out the net total length of the data to be transferred from bytes 2 and 3 of the "Send" user data interface and the user data of the 1st data packet from bytes 5 to 31. 3 Acknowledge correct receipt of the 1st data packet by writing the value 1 to byte 1 of the "Receive" user data interface. The reader scans byte 1 of the " Receive" user data interface cyclically. As soon as it reads the value 1, it fills bytes 5 to 31 of the "Send" user data interface with the user data of the 2nd data packet and enters the number of this data packet (in this case 2) in byte 1. 4 Scan byte 1 of the "Send" user data interface cyclically. As long as this byte contains the number of the previously transferred data packet (1), there is no new data available. As soon as byte 1 has the value 2 (number of the next data packet), go to step 5. 5 Read the user data of the 2nd data packet from bytes 5 to 31. 6 Acknowledge correct receipt of the 2nd data packet by writing the value 2 to byte 1 of the "Receive" user data interface. ... ... Last - 4 Scan byte 1 of the "Send" user data interface cyclically. As long as byte 1 contains the number of the second last data packet, the data of the last data packet is not yet available. As soon as byte 1 contains the number of the last data packet, go to the next step. Last - 3 Read the user data of the last data packet from bytes 5 to 31. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 321 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 Step Activity in the user program of the PROFINET IO controller Last - 2 Acknowledge receipt of the last data packet by writing the number of the last data packet to byte 1 of the "Receive" user data interface. The reader scans byte 1 of the " Receive" user data interface cyclically. As soon as it reads the number of the last data packet, it writes the value 0 to bytes 2 and 3 of the user data interface and also to byte 1. The value 0 in byte 1 signals the end of data transfer to the I/O controller. Last -1 Scan byte 1 of the "Send" user data interface cyclically. As soon as you read the value 0, go to the last step. Last Acknowledge correct receipt of all the data by writing the value 0 to byte 1 of the "Receive" user data interface. Reaction to disruptions, timeouts and errors The reader performs the following monitoring functions: The time between the arrival of two acknowledgements of the I/O controller is monitored for the value configured in the Connections Interfaces PROFINET IO Time limit window. The correct order of the data packets acknowledged by the I/O controller is monitored. If an error occurs, the reader enters B#16#FF in byte 1 of the "Send" user data interface which causes the current data transfer to abort. Siemens recommends that you implement the following monitoring functions in the user program of the I/O controller. Monitor the time between the arrival of two consecutive data packets. Monitor the correct order of the data packets sent by the reader. Check whether the total length of the user data actually transferred matches the net total length indicated by the reader at the beginning of the data transfer. If an error occurs, you can abort the current data transfer by writing B#16#FF to byte 1 of the "Receive" user data interface. 9.4.4 Function block 79 "VS130-2_CONTROL" To control the functions of the reader, there is a function block FB79 for PROFINET IO operations. In addition to the SIMATIC S7 system mechanisms for integrating the reader in a PROFINET IO environment, FB79 makes the software integration in control programs easier. Note * The description of the support provided by FB79 and the associated user data interface is mainly to retain compatibility with the VS130-2 reader. * The integration design with the highest performance is based on the Ident profile with or without a communication module. Siemens recommends the use of this concept for new plants. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 322 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 Description You will need to process the following bits of the control byte outside the FB: TRG (Trigger): Start processing RES (Reset): Acknowledge an error (refer to the error messages) The FB monitors only the data exchange between the reader and the controller, in other words, the DONE parameter provides no information about the actual read result. To obtain a good/bad evaluation, you will need to evaluate the following result bits of the status byte: READ MATCH NOK The following jobs are possible Cancel current job Select program Save a program Output result strings Output the position of the code Output the quality characteristics of the currently read code Output the number of the currently selected program Output the current mode of the reader Reset the DISA control signal Whether or not a job can execute successfully depends on the current status of the reader and its parameter settings. Which job can execute in which status of the reader is described further below. With almost all jobs, FB79 sets the DISA control signal on the reader to TRUE. This is intended to prevent the reader being controlled from an HMI device at the same time. The following four jobs are exceptions: Reset the DISA control signal Cancel current job. The FB does not change DISA with this. Output the number of the currently selected program. The FB does not change DISA with this. Output the current mode of the reader. The FB does not change DISA with this. When a new job is started, the output parameters are reset. Note Multiple FB79 calls with the same instance are not permitted Multiple FB79 calls with the same instance are not permitted. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 323 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 Remember that you can influence the execution of the FB with the parameters of the user interface "Connections Integration": If you want to read out a result string using the FB, the output of the result string must be set to PROFINET IO. With the jobs "Select program" (COMMAND =W#16#0001), "Save a program" (COMMAND =W#16#0002) and "Output currently selected program" (COMMAND =W#16#0003), the number of the selected program is queried on the reader. For this reason, output of the result string must also be set to PROFINET IO in these cases. The interface for the DISA, SEL0 to SEL3, TRN, RES, IN_OP, TRD, RDY signals must always be set to PROFINET IO. The setting of the interface for the result bits READ, MATCH, N_OK is irrelevant for the FB. How it works FB79 "VS130-2_CONTROL" is an asynchronous block, in other words, its execution may be spread over several FB calls. You start job execution, by calling the FB with a job number > 0. Job execution is completed when ACTIVE changes to the value FALSE and either DONE or ERROR has the value TRUE (positive edge). Please note that various jobs can be handled in one CPU cycle and ACTIVE does not therefore change to the value TRUE. This involves the "Read out status" and "Reset DISA bit" jobs. In this case, it may also not be possible to detect an edge change at DONE or ERROR. You should therefore evaluate the DONE and ERROR parameters at each block call. If the job completed without error, DONE is set = TRUE. In this case, you should also evaluate ERRCODE to learn of warnings from the FB. As long as ACTIVE has the value TRUE, you will need to call the FB with the identical assignment of the COMMAND input parameter. It is also not possible to start a new job during this time. Read jobs are cyclic jobs. This means that after the start of a job with COMMAND=W#16#0081 to 008F, ACTIVE has the value TRUE. ACTIVE retains this value until the job is stopped again. The read cycle (in other words, the transfer of a complete result string) is completed when ACTIVE has the value TRUE and either DONE or ERROR has the value TRUE (positive edge). If you want to start a different job while a read job is running, you will need to cancel the read job first. You do this by calling the FB with COMMAND=W#16#0000. In this case, ACTIVE changes its value to FALSE. Depending on whether a result string is currently being transferred, either DONE or ERROR has the value TRUE. If ERROR has the value TRUE, ERRCODE has the value DW#16#00010007. Note If an error has occurred that changes the reader to STOP, eliminate and acknowledge the error. You can then return the reader to RUN by changing program (COMMAND = W#16#0001). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 324 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 Parameter Parameter Declaration Data type Address Default Description (instance DB) LADDR_ STEUER INPUT WORD 0.0 W#16#0000 Address of the control byte of the reader. LADDR_ STATUS INPUT LADDR_ SEND INPUT WORD 4.0 W#16#0000 Start address of the "Send" user data interface of the reader. LADDR_ RECV INPUT WORD 6.0 W#16#0000 Start address of the "Receive" user data interface of the reader. COMMAND INPUT WORD 8.0 W#16#0000 Job number: The address must be in the process image of the CPU you are using. WORD 2.0 W#16#0000 Address of the status byte of the reader. The address must be in the process image of the CPU you are using. The permitted values are described following this table. PARAM1 INPUT BYTE 10.0 B#16#00 Number of the program to be selected (relevant only for jobs W#16#0001 and W#16#0002). RESET INPUT BOOL 11.0 FALSE Reset pending error and FB initialization. RECV INPUT ANY 12.0 Receive area for the result string. Only data block areas and the BYTE data type are permitted. You must interconnect this parameter and the data block must be at least as large as the maximum DMC string that can be expected. ACTIVE OUTPUT BOOL 22.0 FALSE ACTIVE = TRUE: Processing of the last job has not yet completed. DONE OUTPUT BOOL 22.1 FALSE DONE = TRUE: Job was completed without errors. With read jobs (COMMAND = W#16#0081 to 008F), this simply means that the transfer between the reader and FB (CPU) was errorfree. To find out whether the DMC evaluation was successful, you will need to evaluate bits READ (bit 3), MATCH (bit 4) and N_OK (bit 5) in the status byte of the reader. ERROR OUTPUT BOOL 22.2 FALSE ERROR = TRUE: An error has occurred. ERRCODE OUTPUT DWORD 24.0 DW#16# 00000000 Error information: * DW#16#0000 0000: No error * DW#16#0000 wxyz: Warning * DW#16#0001 wxyz: Internal FB error * DW#16#0002 wxyz: Error of the reader (see information table at the end of this section) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 325 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 Parameter Declaration Data type Address Default Description W#16#0000 Operating status of the reader: (instance DB) STATE OUTPUT WORD 28.0 * W#16#0000: Status not up to date * W#16#0001: RUN (processing mode with output of the result string), in other words, the IN_OP and RDY bits in the status byte are set. * W#16#0002: STOP (including Save program and Adjustment mode), i.e. the IN_OP bit in the status byte is set; the RDY bit, however, is not. * W#16#0003: ERROR, in other words, the IN_OP bit in the status byte is not set. CODE_OUT OUTPUT BYTE 30.0 B#16#00 Number of the program currently selected on the reader LENGTH OUTPUT WORD 32.0 W#16#0000 Length of the result string in bytes Permitted values for the COMMAND parameter Value (W#16#...) Meaning 0000 Cancel current job or no job 0001 Change program 0002 Save program 0003 Output number of the program currently selected on the reader 0004 Output the current status of the reader 0005 Reset DISA control signal 0081 Output the (possibly modified) result string 0082 Output absolute quality parameters 0083 Output absolute quality parameters and output result string 0084 Output quality parameters as classes 0085 Output quality parameters as classes and output result string 0086 Output quality parameters as classes and in absolute format 0087 Output quality parameters as classes and in absolute format and output result string 0088 Output code position 0089 Output code position and result string 008A Output code position and absolute quality parameters 008B Output code position and absolute quality parameters and output result string 008C Output code position and quality parameters as classes 008D Output code position and quality parameters as classes and output result string 008E Output code position and quality parameters as classes and in absolute format 008F Output code position and quality parameters as classes and in absolute format and output result string SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 326 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 Note To process this job, the following parameters must be set in PROFINET IO: * Connections Integration Text: PROFINET IO Output of the result string (except commands 4 and 5) * Connections Integration Controller: PROFINET IO Interface for the DISA, SEL0 to SEL3, TRN, RES, IN_OP, TRD, RDY signals Parameters not interconnected with the block (static local data) Parameter Declaration Data type Address Default Description X_POSITION STATIC INT 34.0 0 X position of the center point of the code relative to the center of the image. Normalized to the full resolution for the current image. Y_POSITION STATIC INT 36.0 0 Y position of the center point of the code relative to the center of the image. Normalized to the full resolution for the current image. ROT_ANGLE STATIC INT 38.0 0 Roll angle of the code center point INCLINE STATIC INT 40.0 0 Viewing angle (angle between the axis of the reader and the surface of the code field) CONTRAST_F STATIC CHAR 42.0 .. Symbol contrast as class (value valid if not equal to ' ') GROWTH_F STATIC CHAR 43.0 .. Print growth as class (value valid if not equal to ' ') NONUNIF_F STATIC CHAR 44.0 .. Axial non-uniformity as class (value valid if not equal to ' ') ERR_CORR_F STATIC CHAR 45.0 .. Unused error correction (value valid, if not equal to ' ') (instance DB) Note: If a "ReadErr" occurs, the old result data is retained because no new data is available. QUALITY_F STATIC CHAR 46.0 .. Overall grade as class (value valid if not equal to ' ') CONTRAST STATIC REAL 48.0 -1.0e+0 Symbol contrast as absolute value (value valid if not equal to -1.0e+0) GROWTH STATIC REAL 52.0 -1.0e+0 Print growth as absolute value (value valid if not equal to -1.0e+0) NONUNIF STATIC REAL 56.0 -1.0e+0 Axial non-uniformity as absolute value (value valid if not equal to -1.0e+0) ERR_CORR STATIC REAL 60.0 -1.0e+0 Unused error correction as absolute value (value valid if not equal to -1.0e+0) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 327 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 Job execution Whether or not a job can execute successfully depends on the current status of the reader. The table below shows which jobs are possible in the various statuses of the reader. You will find the job number in the table of parameters.# Reader status Job number = (hexadecimal) 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0081 to 008F RUN (RDY=1) (processing mode with output of the result strings) X X X X X X X STOP X X X X X X - ERROR (IN_OP=0) X X - X X X - Sequence when canceling a job (COMMAND = W#16#0000) Canceling a job is possible only with read jobs: Read jobs (COMMAND = W#16#0081 to W#16#008F) The block signals completion of the job cancel with ACTIVE = FALSE. If a transfer is currently active when the job is canceled, the transfer aborts and the error is reported with an appropriate error message in the ERRCODE parameter. ERROR then has the value TRUE and DONE the value FALSE. A transfer is active when DONE and ERROR have the value FALSE. If there is no transfer currently active when the job is canceled, on completion of the job, the ERRCODE parameter has the value 0, ERROR the value FALSE and DONE the value TRUE. Sequence when changing jobs If you want to change to a different job from a read job, the currently active job must be canceled (see above). Sequence when changing a program (COMMAND = W#16#0001) If the reader is currently executing a read job, follow these steps: 1. Call FB79 with COMMAND=W#16#0000. This cancels the output of the result string (job W#16#0081). 2. Make a program change by calling FB79 with COMMAND=W#16#0001 and PARAM= call new program number. When the job is triggered, the parameters DONE and ERROR have the value FALSE. The ACTIVE parameter has the value TRUE. The block changes the program selected on the reader to the value at the PARAM1 parameter. It then queries the program now selected on the reader and outputs this program at the CODE_OUT parameter. If the program now selected matches the program specified at the PARAM1 parameter, the ACTIVE parameter has the value FALSE and the DONE parameter the value TRUE. If the program now selected does not match the program SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 328 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 specified at the PARAM1 parameter, the ACTIVE parameter has the value FALSE and the ERROR parameter the value TRUE. The ERRCODE parameter contains an appropriate error message. The system also checks whether the program change is being blocked by a "Service" or "User1" user logged on to the user interface who has taken control of the reader, and whether the newly selected program has been saved. If an error is detected, the ACTIVE parameter has the value FALSE and the ERROR parameter has the value TRUE. The ERRCODE parameter contains an appropriate error message. 3. Call FB79 again cyclically with COMMAND=W#16#0081. If you attempt to cancel a current change program job, the ERRCODE parameter will change to DW#16#00000002; however, processing for the job will be completed. Note * When there is a program change, the reader changes to STOP for at least 150 ms (refer to selecting modes "Select program"). In isolated cases, a program change can take up to 15 s. * If you specify the value 0 in the PARAM1 parameter, the previously selected program will be retained. * The value of PARAM1 must not be changed before the job is completed. Sequence when saving a program (COMMAND = W#16#0002) To allow the FB to trigger the saving of a code, the parameter Connections > Integration > Control must have the value "PROFINET IO". The job can only be sent when the reader is not in the ERROR status (see also the status table following the parameter table). When the job is triggered, the parameters DONE and ERROR have the value FALSE. The ACTIVE parameter has the value TRUE. The block saves the program specified at the PARAM1 parameter. Note * In isolated cases, saving a program can take up to 35 s. * The value of PARAM1 must not be changed before the job is completed. It then queries the program now selected on the reader and outputs this program at the CODE_OUT parameter. If the program now selected matches the program specified at the PARAM1 parameter, the ACTIVE parameter has the value FALSE and the DONE parameter the value TRUE. If the program now selected does not match the program specified at the PARAM1 parameter, the ACTIVE parameter has the value FALSE and the ERROR parameter the value TRUE. The ERRCODE parameter contains an appropriate error message. The system also checks whether program saving is being blocked by a "Service" or "User1" user logged on to the user interface who has taken over control of the reader, and whether program saving has been successful. If an error is detected, the ACTIVE parameter has the SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 329 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 value FALSE and the ERROR parameter has the value TRUE. The ERRCODE parameter contains an appropriate error message. If you attempt to cancel a current save program job, the ERRCODE parameter will change to DW#16#00000002; however, processing for the job will be completed. Sequence when outputting the currently selected program (COMMAND = W#16#0003) When the job is triggered, the parameters DONE and ERROR have the value FALSE. The ACTIVE parameter has the value TRUE. The block then queries the program now selected on the reader and outputs this program at the CODE_OUT parameter. If no error occurs in the transfer of the program number, the ACTIVE parameter will have the value FALSE and the DONE parameter the value TRUE. Sequence when outputting the status of the reader (COMMAND = W#16#0004) Based on the status byte of the reader, the block recognizes the current status and outputs this in the STATE parameter: If the IN_OP bit is not set, status 3 (ERROR) is output. If the IN_OP but not the RDY bit is set, status 2 (STOP) is output. If the IN_OP and the RDY bit are set, status 1 (RUN) is output. The DONE parameter then has the value TRUE and ACTIVE the value FALSE. Note Because the job completes in one CPU cycle, no edge change can be detected at the ACTIVE parameter. If the DONE parameter already has the value TRUE from a previous job, it is also not possible to detect an edge change. Sequence when resetting the DISA bit (COMMAND = W#16#0005) The block resets the DISA bit in the control byte of the reader. The DONE parameter then has the value TRUE and ACTIVE the value FALSE. Note Because the job completes in one CPU cycle, no edge change can be detected at the ACTIVE parameter. If the DONE parameter already has the value TRUE from a previous job, it is also not possible to detect an edge change. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 330 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 Sequence with the read jobs (COMMAND = W#16#0081 to W#16#008F) Meaning of the COMMAND parameter with read jobs. Value (W#16#...) Meaning 0081 Output result string 0082 Output absolute quality characteristics 0083 Output absolute quality characteristics and output result string 0084 Output quality characteristics as classes 0085 Output quality characteristics as classes and output result string 0086 Output quality characteristics as classes and in absolute format 0087 Output quality characteristics as classes and in absolute format and output result string 0088 Output code position 0089 Output code position and result string 008A Output code position and absolute quality characteristics 008B Output code position and absolute quality characteristics and output result string 008C Output code position and quality characteristics as classes 008D Output code position and quality characteristics as classes and output result string 008E Output code position and quality characteristics as classes and in absolute format 008F Output code position and quality characteristics as classes and in absolute format and output result string The read jobs can only be sent when the reader is not in the RUN status (see also the status table following the parameter table). In contrast to all other jobs, the read jobs are "permanent jobs". This means that the ACTIVE parameter retains the value TRUE even after fetching the current read result and/or the current position and/or the quality characteristics from the reader. You should therefore evaluate the DONE and ERROR parameters at each block call. If the transfer was successful, DONE = TRUE is set. However, this only means that the transfer between the reader and the FB (CPU) was error-free. To find out whether the DMC evaluation was successful, you will need to evaluate bits READ (bit 3), MATCH (bit 4) and N_OK (bit 5) in the status byte of the reader. You fill find the reaction of FB79 in the table below. You should also evaluate ERRCODE to learn of warnings from the FB. Reader Target area RECV The code could not be decoded. FB79 enters the string set in "ReadErr". The code was successfully decoded; however, you have not set any specifications. FB79 enters the result string. The code was successfully decoded but does not match your specifications. FB79 enters the string set in "MatchErr" or "FilterMsg" if the match or filter function is selected in the parameter settings. If both of these functions are selected, FB79 enters the string set in "MatchErr". For more detailed information on "MatchErr" and "FilterMsg", refer to section 5. The code was successfully decoded and matches your specifications. FB79 enters the result string. Process the data entered in RECV before the next trigger; otherwise there is no guarantee of the consistency of this data. At the same time, you should also evaluate the LENGTH parameter because the receive area is written only up to this length. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 331 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 You can cancel a current read job by calling FB79 with COMMAND = W#16#0000. If an error occurs when processing a job or when a current read job is canceled, ERROR = TRUE is set. In this case, the ERRCODE parameter contains an ID indicating the cause of the error. FB79 writes B#16#00 to the RECV target area. Startup behavior If an error occurs (ERRCODE <> DW#16#0000 0000), you need to initialize the FB once with RESET=TRUE after calling an interrupt OB (for example OB82) and after a STOP-RUN change on the CPU. Please include a suitable first call in your user program. 9.4.4.1 Error information of FB79 Error information If an error has occurred, ERROR = TRUE is set. The precise cause of the error is then displayed in ERRCODE. There are also warnings for which ERROR is set to FALSE. They indicate error situations that do not cause the current job to be canceled. If ERRCODE <> DW#16#0000 0000 following an FB call, you will need to call the FB again with RESET=TRUE to reset the error information in the FB. Note By calling the FB with RESET=TRUE, you acknowledge only the error codes of the FB. To acknowledge errors of the reader (for example, transmit error), you need to set the RES bit of the control byte (see assignment of the interfaces of the reader relevant for PROFINET IO or error messages). ERRCODE (DW#16#) ERROR Explanation 0000 0000 0 No error 0000 0001 0 New job inactive as long as old job is active. 0000 0002 0 Job cannot be canceled. 0001 0001 1 Illegal job number (COMMAND parameter). 0001 0002 1 The job cannot be processed in the current status of the reader. 0001 0003 1 During normal operation (not startup and no error has occurred), the FB was called with RESET=TRUE or the user data interface is already occupied by a different FB instance. 0001 0004 1 Send/receive user data interface not available or incomplete 0001 0005 1 The selected program number does not match the number specified at the FB, because control of the reader may have been taken over by the user interface. 0001 0006 1 Invalid program number (PARAM1 parameter). Program numbers 1 to 14 (save program) and 0 to 15 (change program) are permitted. 0001 0007 1 Job canceled by user. 0001 0008 1 Program saving is not possible, because control of the reader may have been taken over by the user interface. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 332 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.4 Control with FB79 ERRCODE (DW#16#) ERROR Explanation 0001 0009 1 Illegal receive area. Only data blocks and the BYTE data type are permitted. 0001 8092 1 The receive area does not exist. 0001 8323 1 The receive area is too short. 0001 8325 1 Illegal data area. 0001 8330 1 The receive area is write-protected. 0002 0003 1 The selected program number is not saved. 0002 0004 1 Program cannot be saved. Position the code within the image or improve the image quality. 0002 0005 1 Job canceled by reader. Note If you receive error information that differs from that listed above, this originates from SFC 20 "BLKMOV" that is used to enter the result string in the receive area. You will find its error information in the online help of the system functions/function blocks. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 333 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO" 9.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO" 9.5.1 Control signals Note Control via DI/DO can only be used as selected in the parameter settings in the user interface in "Connections Digital I/O". Input signals Name Function DISA Disable: Disables manual keyboard input, program selection and program saving via digital I/O, error acknowledgment, starting the reader. SEL0 Select 0: Program selection bit 0 SEL1 Select 1: Program selection bit 1 (when TRN=0) / Save program (when TRN=1) SEL2 Select 2: Program selection bit 2 SEL3 Select 3: Program selection bit 3 TRN Train: Saves new program TRG Trigger: Processing starts on a positive edge. RES Reset: Reset error. Note The SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3, and TRN signals are effective only when DISA=1. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 334 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO" Output signals Name Function IN_OP In operation: TRD * 0 = error message is displayed. * 1 = reader functioning, no error Trained: * * RDY 9.5.2 In run: - 0 = Selected program has not been saved. - 1 = Selected program has been saved. When saving program (TRN=1): - 0 = Save program active. - 1 = acknowledgment signal (RDY=0) LED Displayed by LED1 or LED2 according to your parameter settings Ready: * 0 = startup of reader or reader in stop * 1 = reader in run READ Processing result: Code was localized and decoded. MATCH Processing result: Code matches the trained code. N_OK Code was not legible. Selecting modes The following modes are available: Select program Save program Start processing You will find a description of the modes under Operation of the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 335 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO" Select program To select a program, apply the relevant bit pattern at the inputs SEL0 to SEL3. You can select programs 1 to 15. When you select program 0, the program last selected is retained. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 336 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO" Step Input 1 DISA=1 Output Description Program selection is prepared. TRN=0 DISA must have the value 1. No edge change is necessary. TRG=0 RES=0 2 SEL0=1 Select program, for example, program 11. SEL1=1 SEL2=0 SEL3=1 3 TRD=0 5 TRD=1 Program selection is started. RDY=0 Program change is completed after approximately 150 ms to 15 s. RDY=1 Note If the selected program is not saved, TRD and RDY will retain the value 0. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 337 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO" Save program The diagram below shows the program saving procedure, using program 11 as an example. Note that the trigger signal must be present for at least 5 ms. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 338 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO" Note After an error has occurred, you will need to set the signals SEL0 to SEL3 and the TRN signal to 0 and then reset the error with the RES signal. The DISA signal must have the value 1 (no edge change). Description of the program saving procedure Step Input 1 DISA=1 Output Description Disable keyboard control. DISA must have the value 1. No edge change is necessary. Apply for at least 100 ms: Select program to be saved, for example code 11. SEL0 = 1 SEL1 = 1 SEL2 = 0 SEL3 = 1 2 TRN = 1 Start program saving SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3 =0 3 TRD=0 TRD signal changes to FALSE RDY=0 RDY signal changes to FALSE Wait at least 200 ms Feed in object with data matrix code. SEL1=1 Save program Apply for at least 5 ms: Trigger signal TRG=1 4 TRD = 1 5 Selected program has been saved. SEL1=0 Reset signals. TRN = 0 Exit program saving. TRD = 0 TRD signal changes to FALSE for 150 ms. TRD = 1 TRD signal changes to TRUE. RDY=1 Program saving is exited. Start processing Processing starts immediately on completion of the program saving. Step Input Output Description 1 You select a program, for example, program 11. 2 The outputs are set as follows depending on the processing result: READ MATCH N_OK Code was localized and decoded. Code matches the trained code. Code was not legible. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 339 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 9.6.1 Overview You can control the reader using a TCP/IP or RS-232 connection. Note Upload process not yet completed: Control commands are discarded Until the reader completes the restart, all control commands are discarded. * To find out whether or not the reader is ready for operation, you will need to query the status (Page 344) until the reader sends a response frame. This applies even when you use a TCP/IP connection. In this case, an existing TCP/IP connection does not mean that the reader has already completed the restart. Requirement To trigger a command via TCP/IP or RS-232, the specific transport connection must be configured as a trigger source in the user interface. The appropriate transport connection must be configured as a source for the controller for all other commands (Connections Integration Connection). When you use the TCP/IP transport connection, the reader is either the client or server (Connections Interfaces TCP). As client, the reader actively establishes the connection to the partner. In this case, the partner must be the server and accept an incoming connection at the configured port (Connections Ports TCP). As server, the reader accepts an incoming connection of a client at the configured port (Connections Ports TCP). Note Restriction with identical transport connection for trigger and control The following restriction applies when an identical transport connection is configured as the source for trigger and control in the user interface (Connections Integration Connection): * When "M" is configured as trigger string, the remaining control commands can no longer be used. * When "MATCH" is configured as trigger text, the command to overwrite the match strings can no longer be used. You can use this connection for: Triggering Overwriting the match string of the current program (non-persistent) Setting and resetting the DISA bit SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 340 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 Changing the program Saving programs Querying the status of the reader and acknowledging group errors Writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH) Setting "Digital out" A control command is triggered in each case by the corresponding string. Overview of all commands with a string 9.6.2 Command String Trigger Identical to the configured string in the user interface Write match string See "Write match string" (Page 341) Set DISA bit MDIH Reset DISA bit MDIL Query status MGST Program change (select program number) MR<program number> Save program with internal trigger MI<program number> Save program with external trigger MT<program number> Reset command MRES XMATCH command See "XMATCH command (writing a triggersynchronized match string)" (Page 349) and "XMATCH user data (without header)" (Page 350). Set digital out MO<p1><p2><p3><p4><p5><p6> Trigger When the reader receives a character string that is identical to the configured character string in the user interface support, it triggers image acquisition and processing. 9.6.3 Write match string Note Sent match string takes effect immediately A sent match string takes effect immediately. The sent match string is not synchronized with the trigger signal or the processing of buffered image acquisition. * Therefore, ensure that the match string is sent when no image acquisition is running. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 341 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 Requirements for matching with OCR Sending a match string with OCR Sending a match string is only possible if, in "2. Filter", the source "Filter with match text" or "Character type at pos." is configured as the string specification. The match string is then either a defined string or a syntax corresponding to "Character type at pos.". Identical formatting of the sent match string The match string that is sent must be identical to the input made in interface support. Permitted non-printable special characters must be sent as one character. A line break (\n) for example as '\n' (ASCII value 0x0D) and not as '\''n' (ASCII values 0x2F and 0x6E). Requirement for matching with 1D/2D codes For 1D/2D codes all match options ("All", "Position", "ID", "GS1") are supported. The match string that is sent must be formatted so that the information required for the comparison can be extracted. The following command must be sent to overwrite the match string: Structure / description Character no. 0 1 Meaning Command identifier Value/character M A 2 T 3 C 4 H 5 6 7 ... n-1 n More significant byte of the length m of the following match string Less significant byte New match string with a of the length m of the length m following match string 0x00-0xFF 0x00-0xFF All printable characters The characters 5 and 6 are interpreted as an unsigned 16-bit word and form the overall length of the new match string starting at character 7. It is only possible to overwrite a match string if the reader is in processing mode and matching was activated during program saving for the current program. When the new match string is saved, this is not persistent: If the reader exits processing mode, for example by changing to STOP mode or to the group error status, the overwritten match string is discarded. This also applies to a program change. The characters of the command must be sent as a contiguous command. If the spacing between the individual characters is too long, reception of the new match string is aborted. Note If the match string cannot be overwritten, an entry is made in the diagnostic data. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 342 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 9.6.4 Set DISA bit This command sets the DISA bit. Character string "MDIH" (Machine command set DIsable signal High) 9.6.5 Reset DISA bit This command resets the DISA bit. Character string "MDIL" (Machine command set DIsable signal Low) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 343 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 9.6.6 Query status This command returns the status byte, the current program number and an error number in the response string. Character string "MGST" (Machine command Get STate) Response string RGST<statusbyte><currentprogramnumber><errornumber><end identifier>" (Reply Get STate) <status byte> - Non-displayable ASCII character that corresponds to the status byte (see section "Assignment of the interfaces relevant to PROFINET IO (Page 315)"). <currentprogramnumber> - Currently selected program number. - Two displayable ASCII characters with value "0" to "9". - Valid range of values: 00 to 15. <error no> - Error code of the currently pending error (see section "Error messages (Page 376)"). - Coding corresponding to <current program number> - No error pending if the value is 00. <end identifier> - Non-displayable ASCII character with the value 0x04. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 344 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 9.6.7 Select program number This command changes the program or switches to processing mode with the specified program number, if one exists. Character string "MR<program number>" (Machine command Run program <program number>) <program number>-Number of the program saved. Two displayable ASCII characters with value "0" to "9". Valid range of values: 00 to 15. This command returns no response string. Using the "Query status" command, you then check if the program change has been successful. If, for example, program number 5 is selected and the status is queried, the string "MR05MGST" can be sent. Using <statusbyte> and <currentcodenumber>, you can check whether the reader is in processing mode with the new program number. If the DISA bit is not set already, the reader will set it automatically to save the program and then reset it. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 345 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 9.6.8 Save program with internal trigger Note This command is only possible when the identical transport connection is configured as the trigger and the control source. This command starts the program saving procedure and internally generates a trigger for image acquisition. The code is saved with the specified number. If a program has already been saved with this number and no error occurred during the save procedure, this program will be overwritten. If the save procedure is successful, the reader then goes into processing mode with the appropriate program number. Character string MI<program number>" (Machine command Immediate store code <program number>) <program number>-Number of the program saved. Two printable ASCII characters with the value "0" to "9". Valid range of values: 01 to 5. This command returns no response string. Using the "Query status" command you then check if the save procedure was successful. If, for example, program number 5 is selected and the status is then queried, the string "MI05MGST" can be sent. Using <status byte>, <current program number> and <error number>, check: - Whether the reader has successfully stored the program and is in processing mode. - Or whether an error has occurred. If the DISA bit is not set already, the reader will set it automatically to save the program and then reset it. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 346 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 9.6.9 Save program with external trigger Note Set DISA bit beforehand In order to execute this command, the DISA bit must be set beforehand. 1. This command starts the program saving procedure. 2. Subsequently, a trigger signal is sent/set separately at the earliest after receipt of the response string. The program is saved with the specified number. If a program has already been saved with this number and no error occurred during the save procedure, this program will be overwritten. If the save procedure is successful, the reader then goes into processing mode with the new program number. Character string MT<program number>" (Machine command sTore code <program number>) <program number>-Number of the program saved. Two printable ASCII characters with the value "0" to "9". Valid range of values: 01 to 5. Response string RTRDY<end identifier>" (Reply sTore program ReaDY) <end identifier> - Non-displayable ASCII characters with the value 0x04. After this response string is received, a trigger can be sent via an external source. If this response string is not sent, either the DISA bit has not been set or <program no> is outside the valid range. If "RTRDY" is received and the trigger is sent, the status must be queried cyclically with "MGST". The query is used to check whether the save procedure is completed. When the save procedure is completed, the reader will be in processing mode with <program no>. If the reader is not in processing mode and there is no error state, the save procedure is not finished or it is still waiting for the trigger signal. Once the save procedure is completed, the DISA bit is reset. The save procedure can be canceled with Reset command (Page 348) (upon receipt of "RTRDY"). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 347 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 Example string sequence Send MDIH MGST Set DISA bit. Status query Receive Explanation MT05 RGST... If no error is pending, start the save procedure. Start the save procedure. T MGST RTRDY ... Wait for Trigger acknowlHere, with edgement. the default trigger text, whereby trigger source = control source. Cyclic status query; recommended time interval: 1 s. Trigger also possible via DI/DO, for example. 9.6.10 ... RGST... * If the reader is in processing mode with program number 05, the save procedure has been successful. * A pending error means that the program could not be saved (e.g. no code in the image). * If the reader is not in processing mode and there is no group error, the save procedure is not yet finished. Reset command This command acknowledges an error or cancels "Save program with external trigger". Character string "MRES" (Machine command RESet) This command returns no response string. Send "MRESMGST" to get acknowledgment. If "Save program with external trigger" is cancelled with the reset command, the reader will briefly be in an error state (error in sequence). The error state is automatically exited or acknowledged. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 348 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 9.6.11 Writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH) Note Availability of XMATCH The XMATCH function is not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B. Requirements for matching with OCR Sending a match string with OCR A match string can only be sent: If the source "Filter with match text" is configured as the string specification for the corresponding step (OCR type) under "Filter". If the source "Character type at pos." is configured as the string specification for the corresponding step (OCR type) under "Filter". The match string is therefore either a defined string or a corresponding "Character type at pos." syntax. Identical formatting of the sent match string The match string that is sent must be identical to the input made in interface support. Permitted non-printable special characters must be sent as one character. A line break (\n) for example as '\n' (ASCII value 0x0D) and not as '\''n' (ASCII values 0x2F and 0x6E). Requirement for matching with 1D/2D codes For 1D/2D codes all match options ("All", "Position", "ID", "GS1") are supported. The match string that is sent must be formatted so that the information required for the comparison can be extracted. Note GS1 start symbol "]d2" is optional For match strings used for the match option "GS1", the GS1 start symbol "]d2" is optional. Character string To send an XMATCH command, the string "XMATCH" must be sent as the header followed by the XMATCH user data. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 349 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 9.6.12 XMATCH user data (without header) Note Only parts of new program structure can be used The XMATCH frame reflects the program structure of firmware versions V4 and lower (1D/2D code + up to 5 OCR steps). You cannot make full use of the new program structure with the XMATCH frame. Backward compatibility with firmware version V4 XML import enables compatible mapping. Following an XML import or your programs or codes, firmware version V4, you can continue to use the identical XMATCH frames. The compatibility image as follows: Previous code index match strings are always assigned to step 1. OCR ROI 1 to 5 are mapped to steps 2 to 6. Logical structure of the user data The logical structure of an XMATCH frame is outlined in the table: Trigger ID Permanent flag Code No Cnt n Code No Code Idx Cnt c Code Idx String String length cl length cm c times ROI ID Cnt r ROI ID String length rl String rm t times Trigger ID and permanent flag Based on the trigger ID, all match strings of this frame are assigned to a specific trigger signal. If the permanent flag is set in this frame, the match strings are a valid as of this trigger ID. If the permanent flag is set in this frame and the trigger ID is "0", the match strings are valid as of the next trigger. The trigger ID is assigned to the value of the internal trigger counter of the reader. The internal trigger counter is set to 1: When processing mode starts up When there is a program change After an error (IN_OP not set) Following this, the internal trigger counter is incremented by 1 following each trigger. When the counter reaches the value 32767, it continues with 1 (not 0). The value 0 is reserved to accept match strings permanently as of the next trigger. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 350 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 Code No Cnt n and Code No Code No Cnt n must always be 1. Code no. must match the code number that is in processing mode. Code Idx Cnt c With an application in which no 1D/2D codes are read, Code Idx Cnt = 0 must be set. If code Idx Cnt 0, this value matches the number of code match strings in the frame; with a non-multicode application, this value is 1. Depending on the code Idx Cnt c, then code Idx , string length cl and the string follow c times. Code Idx, String length cl and String cm Code Idx is the index of the code to which the new match string will be assigned. String length cl corresponds to the length of the following match string cm. ROI ID Cnt r With an application in which no plain text is read (OCR), ROI ID Cnt r = 0 must be set. If ROI ID Cnt r 0, this value corresponds to the number of OCR ROI match strings in the frame. Depending on ROI ID Cnt r, ROI ID, String length rl and String rm follow r times in the frame. ROI ID, String length rl and String rm: ROI ID corresponds to the number of the OCR ROI match strings to be assigned to the new match string. String length rl corresponds to the length of the following match string rm. Detailed structure of the user data Note Data type BYTE and WORD * BYTE: 8 bits * WORD: 16 bits, in Big Endian format ("S7 format") SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 351 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 Meaning Data type Value range Comment Total length in bytes (excluding the length itself = starting at trigger ID) WORD max. 32768 Area over which the checksum is formed. Trigger ID WORD 1 ... 32767 Flags BYTE Bit 0: Permanent flag Bit 1 to 7: Reserved, must be 0 Code No Cnt n BYTE 1 Code No BYTE 1 ... 14 Code Idx Cnt c BYTE SIMATIC MV440 UR: 0 ... 150 Code Idx BYTE All other readers: 0 ... 50 SIMATIC MV440 UR: 1 ... 150 c times All other readers: 1 ... 50 String length cl WORD 1 ... 3001 String cm cl BYTEs Any ASCII characters ROI ID Cnt r BYTE 0 ... 5 ROI ID BYTE 1 ... 5 String length rl WORD 1 ... 255 String rm rl BYTEs Any ASCII characters XOR checksum BYTE 0 ... 255 t times Checksum = 0 means no checksum Checksum The user data contains a checksum byte whose use is recommended when using the RS232 interface. If the checksum is not used and will not be checked by the reader, the checksum byte must have the value 0. To calculate the checksum, all bytes as of the total length (inclusive) up to the byte of the checksum (exclusive) are XORed. Bad frames If an XMATCH frame with an incorrect structure is received, the error is logged in the diagnostics data records as a temporary error (transient error) and the frame is discarded. Bad structure: For example String length cl > 3 001 characters or checksum incorrect. Even with a correct frame structure, the XMATCH command can be invalid. The error is also logged in the diagnostics data records as a temporary error (Page 389). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 352 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 Examples of XMATCH user data Application: 1D/2D code reading Current program number is "5". new match string for trigger number 42 No OCR No multicode Total length 19 Trigger ID 42 Flags 0 Code No Cnt 1 Code No 5 Code Idx Cnt 1 Code Idx 1 String length 8 String "SN012345" ROI ID Cnt 0 XOR checksum 0 Application: 1D/2D code reading + OCR Current program number is "5". New 1D/2D code match string and new match string for OCR ROI 1 and 2 for trigger number 42 No multicode Total length 33 Trigger ID 42 Flags 0 Code No Cnt 1 Code No 5 Code Idx Cnt 1 Code Idx 1 String length 8 String "SN012345" ROI ID Cnt 2 ROI ID 1 String length 2 String "SN" ROI ID 2 String length 6 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 353 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 String "012345" XOR checksum 0 Application: Evaluate two 1D/2D codes per image (multicode) Current program number is "5". New 1D/2D code match string for code index 1 and 2 for trigger number 42 No OCR 9.6.13 Total length 30 Trigger ID 42 Flags 0 Code No Cnt 1 Code No 5 Code Idx Cnt 2 Code Idx 1 String length 8 String "SN012345" Code Idx 2 String length 8 String "SN612345" ROI ID Cnt 0 XOR checksum 0 Set digital out Note Availability of "Digital Out" The "Digital out" function is not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B. Writing command data With this command, the four logical signals "EXT_1", "EXT_2", "EXT_3" and "EXT_4" can be set and linked to other logical signals. These signals can only be set via an automation system. These signals can also be applied to the available digital output pins using the user interface. Receipt of this command is logged in the diagnostics data records. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 354 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 String "MO<p1><p2><p3><p4><p5><p6>" (Machine command set digital out) Parameter Meaning p1 Number of the logical external signal. * Two displayable ASCII characters with value "1" to "4" - p2 Level of the signal * p3 ASCII characters with the value "0" to "2". - 0: Set level statically to "low". - 1: Set level statically to "high". - 2: Set level for configured pulse time to "high". Link type * p4 Corresponds to "EXT_1", "EXT_2", "EXT_3" and "EXT_4" ASCII characters with the value "1" to "7" - 1: Logical "OR" - 2: Logical "AND" - 3: Logical "Exclusive OR" - 4: no link - 5: Logical "OR not" - 6: Logical "AND not" - 7: Logical "Exclusive OR not" Logical signal linked to. If p3 = "4", the parameter has no significance. * p5 and p6 ASCII characters with the value "0" to "5" - 0: Logical signal "IN_OP" - 1: Logical signal "TRD" - 2: Logical signal "RDY" - 3: Logical signal "READ" - 4: Logical signal "MATCH" - 5: Logical signal "NOK" Reserved, must be "0" to retain upwards compatibility. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 355 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.7 Scanner portal application 9.7 Scanner portal application Introduction The section "Scanner Portal application" explains how you can implement a scanner portal application with several readers. In a scanner portal application, there is a large field of view that is covered by several individual readers. Here, the areas of the field of view of the readers overlap. To prevent the same code being output more than once, the individual readers (slaves) send their read result to a master reader. The master reader synchronizes the individual results and prevents the output of multiple read results. The master reader itself is also a slave that searches for 1D/2D codes in the field of view. Restrictions of the scanner portal application The scanner portal application is subject to the following restrictions: All readers must operate in the untriggered image acquisition mode "Autotrigger". If several different 1D/2D codes with identical contents are read one after the other, the content is output only once. The master reader can only output the synchronized result via the TCP interface. The formatting options of the result string of the master camera are restricted. A maximum of five readers (4 slaves, and 1 master) are supported. If a slave reader is in an error state, the master reader does not change to an error state. The master reader does not monitor the number of connected slave readers. Maximum results of 2048 characters including a formatting instruction required for synchronization can be synchronized. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 356 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.7 Scanner portal application 9.7.1 Configuration Slave and master Both on the slave readers and on the master, you need to make the following settings in the user interface. Image acquisition, "Control" tab To control the image acquisition, select the "Auto trigger" mode (without "Initial trigger"). "Recognize double reads" must be set to 1 in this case. The acquisition interval must be adequately high so that 1D/2D codes can be read in the image. The interval must be identical on all slave and master devices. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 357 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.7 Scanner portal application Connections/integration Under "Connection", "integration". select TCP as "String". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 358 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.7 Scanner portal application Programs - Overall result The program format string on all readers must be "\02[CamId]\03%s\04". - [CamId] can be selected freely and is used to identify the reader that read the 1D/2D code in the field of view. - "\02\03%s\04" is also valid if no identification of the reader is required when the result is output. Slave In addition to the settings made in the section "Slaves and master", you also need to make the following settings on all the slave readers. Connections/interfaces: TCP IP Address: IP address of the master reader port: 666 Time limit: 3 s Connections/integration In the "Connection monitoring" group, the TCP idling string must be: "\04". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 359 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.7 Scanner portal application Options/Extras Disable the "Master reader" check box in the "Scanner portal" group. Master You also need to make the following additional settings on the master reader. Connections/interfaces: TCP IP Address: IP address of the TCP partner of the master reader port: Port number of the TCP partner of the master reader Options/Extras Enable the "Master reader" check box in the "Scanner portal" group. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 360 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.8 Remote client 9.7.2 Output of the synchronized read result by the master reader Output via the TCP interface The master reader synchronizes the results of the slave readers and outputs the synchronized result via the TCP interface. The result string of the slave reader that first reads the 1D/2D code is output. To compare the 1D/2D codes read, the master device compares the string between "\03" and "\04". The entire result string is output although "\02", "\03" and "\04" are first removed. If a slave reader sends the result string "\02Slave01:\03DMC123\04" and read the"DMC123" code first, the master reader sends the "Slave01:DMC123" string to its TCP partner. 9.8 Remote client Introduction The remote client interface is an HTTP-based interface. The remote client can send HTTP requests to the reader to bring about a certain functionality. To do this, an IP address corresponding to the address of the client must be configured in the user interface. The reader only processes HTTP requests if the sender has this IP address. 9.8.1 XML backup and XML restore Note Do not control through the control interface / only when the DISA bit is not set You must make sure with the automation process that when the functions "XML Backup" and "XML Restore" are executed there is no control through the control interface. Otherwise, the "XML Backup" and "XML Restore" functions cannot be executed. Especially, the DISA bit must not be set. Note Backing up the diagnostic images before execution of the "XML Backup" and "XML Restore" functions When you run the "XML Backup" und "XML Restore" functions, any diagnostic images in the memory of the reader are deleted. * If required, save the diagnostic images before you execute one of these functions. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 361 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.8 Remote client Note Keep the XML backup file in a safe place The XML backup file contains sensible data (password hash): * For security reasons, keep the XML backup file in a safe place. To run an XML Backup and an XML Restore, there is a separate HTTP request for each. After receiving the relevant HTTP request, the following steps are performed first in both cases assuming that the preconditions are met: 1. The connection to the user interface is terminated. If the user interface is opened while the HTTP request is being processed by the reader, this is only possible in "READ ONLY mode". 2. The reader changes to the "Stop" mode. 3. The IN_OP bit is et to "0". 9.8.1.1 XML backup Once the reader has sent the HTTP response, the IN_OP bit is set and access through the user interface is permitted again. Request URI: http://<IP address of the reader>/xml/backup.cgi e.g. http://192.168.0.42/xml/backup.cgi HTTP method: GET Response Note Parameter "<filename>" The filename is made up of the reader name and the firmware version. HTTP status code 200 (OK) Content type: text/xml; name="<filename>.xml" Content disposition: attachment; filename="<filename>.xml" Data: The data corresponds to the file content of an xml file that is used to restore the settings and programs. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 362 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.8 Remote client Pseudocode example C# Pseudocode XML Backup // Create new xml file FileStream newXml = File.Open("C:\\mv400para.xml", FileMode.Create); // Create http request HttpWebRequest myRequest = (HttpWebRequest)WebRequest.Create("http://192.168.0.42/xml/backup.cgi"); myRequest.Method = "GET"; myRequest.ContentLength = 0; try { // Get response HttpWebResponse myHttpWebResponse = (HttpWebResponse)myRequest.GetResponse(); // Get response stream Stream streamResponse = myHttpWebResponse.GetResponseStream(); // Read stream and write to file (stream == xml data) byte[] readBuffer = new byte[256]; int count = streamResponse.Read(readBuffer, 0, readBuffer.GetLength(0)); while (count > 0) { newXml.Write(readBuffer, 0, count); count = streamResponse.Read(readBuffer, 0, readBuffer.GetLength(0)); } Console.WriteLine("XML backup succeeded."); } catch (System.Net.WebException we) { Console.WriteLine("NO PERMISSION FOR XML BACKUP!"); } SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 363 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.8 Remote client 9.8.1.2 XML restore Note Frequent use of XML restore can reduce the working life of the reader With each XML restore, there are write operations to the flash memory. If the XML restore function is used frequently, this can reduce the working life of the reader. Disable import of the remote client IP address If the remote client IP address currently set on the reader does not correspond with the IP address of the imported XML restore file: Remote client connection and data transfer are no longer possible. Prevent the import of the remote client IP address by disabling in the XML restore file the "importremoteclientip" using the "form-data" datum. The reader can still be connected to the remote client: Data transfer takes place without problems. Request URI: http://<IP address of the reader>/xml/restore.cgi e.g. http://192.168.0.42/xml/restore.cgi HTTP method: POST Content Type: "multipart/form-data; boundary=[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\n" POST data Note Notation <xmlDoc> Corresponds to the string with the content of a backup XML file. <on|off> * If the parameter group is to be imported: Use the string "on" * If the parameter group is not to be imported: Use the string "off". "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA] Content-Disposition: form-data; name="xmlfile" Content-Type: text/xml <xmlFile> [REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA] Content-Disposition: form-data; name="importtcp" SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 364 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.8 Remote client <on|off> [REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA] Content-Disposition: form-data; name="importdp" <on|off> [REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA] Content-Disposition: form-data; name="importserial" <on|off> [REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA] Content-Disposition: form-data; name="importsec" <on|off> [REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA] Content-Disposition: form-data; name="importcodes" <on|off> [REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA] Content-Disposition: form-data; name="importcustomgui" <on|off> [REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA] Content-Disposition: form-data; name="importremoteclientip" <on|off> [REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA] " Response HTTP status code 200 (OK) Data: - "2" -> XML upload and import were only partially successful. The reader restarts. To obtain an error analysis, the XML import must be repeated through the user interface. - "1" -> XML upload and import was only successful. The reader restarts. - "0" -> Error importing. To obtain an error analysis, the XML import must be repeated through the user interface. The IN_OP bit is set and access through the user interface is permitted again. Pseudocode example C# Pseudocode XML Restore byte[] buffer; Stream newStream; string xmlDoc = File.ReadAllText("C:\\MV400_para.xml"); ASCIIEncoding encoding = new ASCIIEncoding(); SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 365 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.8 Remote client // Prepare POST data: Restore everything except the Remote Client's IP string postData = "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\"xmlfile\"\r\nContent-Type: text/xml\r\n\r\n" + xmlDoc + "\r\n" + // set value to off if TCP settings shall not be imported "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\"importtcp\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" + // set value to off if PROFINET settings shall not be imported "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\"importdp\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" + // set value to off if serial communication settings shall not be imported "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\"importserial\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" + // set value to off if security settings shall not be imported "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\"importsec\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" + // set value to off if programs, calibrations, fonts and models shall not be imported "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\"importcodes\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" + // set value to off if Custom GUI shall not be imported "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\"importcustomgui\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" + // set value to on if the Remote Client's IP shall be imported (off recommended) "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\"importremoteclientip\"\r\n\r\noff\r\n" + "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\n"; buffer = encoding.GetBytes(postData); // Create http request HttpWebRequest myRequest = (HttpWebRequest)WebRequest.Create("http://192.168.0.42/xml/restore.cgi"); myRequest.Method = "POST"; myRequest.ContentType = "multipart/form-data; boundary=[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\n"; myRequest.ContentLength = buffer.Length; // Send the data. newStream = myRequest.GetRequestStream(); newStream.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length); // Close stream newStream.Close(); try { // Get response HttpWebResponse myHttpWebResponse = (HttpWebResponse)myRequest.GetResponse(); // Get response data int response = myHttpWebResponse.GetResponseStream().ReadByte(); if (response != -1) { Char value = (Char)response; if (value.Equals('1')) Console.WriteLine("XML restore succeeded, device is restarting..."); else if (value.Equals('2')) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 366 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.8 Remote client Console.WriteLine("XML restore succeeded only partially, not all programs could be imported. Device is restarting. Please retry via graphical user interface for more information."); else Console.WriteLine("XML restore failed. Please retry via graphical user interface for detailed error description."); } // Close response myHttpWebResponse.Close(); } catch (System.Net.WebException we) { Console.WriteLine("NO PERMISSION FOR XML RESTORE!"); Console.WriteLine(we.Status.ToString()); Console.WriteLine(we.ToString()); } catch (Exception e) { Console.WriteLine(e.ToString()); } SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 367 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.9 SNMP 9.9 SNMP SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) SNMP is a protocol for managing networks and nodes in the network. To transmit data, SNMP uses the connectionless UDP protocol. The information on the properties of SNMP-compliant devices is entered in MIB files (MIB = Management Information Base). For basic information on this topic, refer to the manual "Diagnostics and configuration with SNMP" under the following entry ID: 103949062 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/103949062) Scope of performance of the code reading system as SNMP agent The code reading system supports data query in the following SNMP versions: SNMPv1 (standard) For the code reading system, only SNMP variables from the following MIBs are supported: LLDP-MIB Standard MIB II (according to RFC1213) - Group "System" - Group "Interfaces" Write access is permitted only for the following MIB objects of the system group: sysContact sysLocation sysName For all other MIB objects / MIB object groups, only read access is possible for security reasons. Traps are not supported by the code reading system. Access permissions using community names The code reading system uses the following community strings to control the access rights to the SNMP agent: Table 9- 40 Access rights in the SNMP agent Type of access Default community string 1) Read access public Read and write access private 1) Note the use of lowercase letters. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 368 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.10 Sample programs NOTICE Change community string The default community string is generally known and does not provide any write protection as it is factory-set to "private". When setting up the devices, you must change the default community string for security reasons. 9.10 Sample programs 9.10.1 Introduction Examples Example 1 Program for interfacing the reader with a SIMATIC controller using FB79 Example 2 Program for archiving diagnostic information on a PC Example 3 An application example for communication of a reader with a SIMATIC S7-1200-/S7-1500 controller is available on the Siemens Industry Online Support pages under the following entry ID: 103528928 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/103528928) 9.10.2 Interfacing the reader with a SIMATIC controller using FB79 You can find the program described in this section on the product DVD supplied with the reader under: "Software" > "Network configuration". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 369 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.10 Sample programs Including FB79 in a STEP 7 program In the accompanying STEP 7 program, the FC1 function contains a simple example for outputting the result string. You can execute a program change using the FC2 function. When supplied, only FC1 is called in OB1. To activate FC2, you will need to either delete the first network with the FC1 call or skip it. Note You may only assign the value W#16#0081 for the COMMAND parameter (output result string) when bit 2 (corresponds to the RDY signal) is set to TRUE in the status byte. Otherwise the "Illegal mode" error will result. Process interfacing The reader is connected with a programmable logic controller via PROFINET IO. A light barrier or a Bero is used additionally for triggering and must be read in via a digital input module. The received data is stored in data block DB48 in bytes 0 to 500. Adding program change Specify the number of the required program in memory byte MB200. The program change runs automatically. The correct order of the commands is adhered to. The FB changes to the program specified at PARAM1. CAUTION Avoiding undefined plant states To avoid undefined plant states, you should only change programs when the plant is in manual mode or is not in operation. Startup OB OB100 In OB100, you set the RESET input of FB79 to initialize the FB. This input is reset again by calling FB79. Bits of the control and status bytes used The following control and status bits need to be processed in your program in addition to the FB79 call: Bit no. in Corresponds to signal Function Q x.6 Control byte TRG Processing starts on a positive edge. Q x.7 Control byte RES Reset sensor error SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 370 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.10 Sample programs Bit no. in Corresponds to signal Function I x.0 Status byte IN_OP 0: error or startup, I x.2 Status byte RDY 1: Sensor is in RUN, in other words ready to process codes. 1: Sensor is functional You can use this signal to enable the feed of work pieces. 9.10.3 Archiving of images and diagnostic information on a PC You can find the program described in this section on the product DVD supplied with the reader under: "Software" > "Sample programs". With MMIDiagnosticsGUI, you archive diagnostic data records in csv file format and diagnostic images as bitmaps on a PC. In addition to the diagnostics images, a text file containing details of the image is also transferred. Prerequisites .NET Framework v4.0 must be installed to operate the demo program. The PC must be connected with the reader over the Ethernet interface. Settings in the user interface Make the following settings in the user interface: "Connections" task, "Interfaces" tab: Enter the IP address and the port of the PC on which you want to archive the diagnostic information under "Archiving/MMI". "Connections" task, "Integration" tab: In "Diagnostic transfer", select the data you want to archive from the drop-down lists: Only diagnostics data records, only diagnostics images or both. Operation of the sample program Start the sample program by double-clicking "MMIDiagnosticsGUI.exe". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 371 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.10 Sample programs Connection Accept the entries for IP address and port which you have configured in the user interface under "Connections" > "Interfaces" > "Archiving/MMI": Select the IP address from the "Local IP Adress" drop-down list. Enter the port in the input box "Port". Timeout [sec] In the input box "Timeout [sec]", enter the period of time after which the sample program terminates the connection to the reader if the sample program does not receive a response from the reader after a specific period of time. Enter "0" in the input box to disable Timeout monitoring. Output "Save Bitmaps to ..." and "Save CSV files to ...": Enter the storage location where the diagnostic images and CSV files are to be stored. "Bitmap Filename Template" and "CSV Filename Template": SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 372 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.10 Sample programs In these input boxes, enter a default name for the generated files. You can use the following placeholders: %Date% Is replaced with the current date or the date stamp of the image acquisition in the "YearMonth-Day" format. %Time% Is replaced with the current time or the time stamp of the image acquisition in the "HoursMinutes-Seconds-Milliseconds" format. %DeviceType% Is replaced with the device type of the connected reader, e.g.: "MV440-HR". Use a backslash ("\") to define subfolders. The subfolders are created below the output folders. "max. Entries per CSV": In the input box, enter the maximum number of lines a CSV file is to contain. A new CSV file is created as soon as the maximum number of lines is exceeded. Control Setting up connection/Starting diagnostic data transfer: 1. Click the "Open Connection" button to set up the connection between PC and reader. 2. Once the reader has set up the connection with the PC: Start the transfer of the diagnostic data by clicking the "Start Recording" button. Note Connection cannot be set up If the reader cannot set up a connection to the PC, the message "Waiting for Connection..." appears on the screen: 1. First check whether the connection settings are configured correctly in the sample program and in the reader. 2. Check the firewall settings if the reader cannot set up a connection despite correct configuration. In this case, contact the network administrator, if necessary. Exit diagnostic data transfer/Terminate connection: 1. Exit the transfer of the diagnostic data by clicking the "Stop Recording" button. 2. Click the "Close Connection" button to terminate the connection between PC and reader. Status Here, the current status of the sample program is displayed. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 373 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 9.10 Sample programs When recording is active, the following is displayed: The last image received in 320x240 pixel format. The number of images and diagnostic entries already received. The program status is also shown in the left sheet bar of the dialog box. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 374 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.1 10 Introduction If there are operator errors or errors in processing mode, the reader outputs diagnostic information. This diagnostic information is output: As a message via the user interface. Via the POWER, ETHERNET and STATE/SF LED displays. When using onboard PROFINET and FB79 or the Ident profile in the device diagnostics. When using FB45 and the Ident profile in the diagnostics. 10.2 Reporting diagnostics information Overview The messages are divided into the following types: Error messages Warnings/notes Read results All three messages are displayed in the user interface. Most messages of the "error message" type trigger a diagnostic interrupt on the relevant PROFINET controller. All the messages, their meaning and the ways to deal with them are described in "Error messages", "Warnings/notes" and "Read results". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 375 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.2 Reporting diagnostics information 10.2.1 Error messages With error messages, the "IN_OP" signal (in operation) is reset and the STATE/SF LED is lit RED permanently. In addition, the Ready or Done bit is reset with a connection via FB45 or the Ident profile. If the reader is connected to PROFINET IO, these error messages trigger a diagnostics interrupt on the relevant I/O controller if there is a number in the "Value (PROFINET)" column in the following table. How to read out and evaluate the diagnostic information available on the reader is described in I/O diagnostics. Message Value (onboard PROFINET diagnostics) Value (TCP/IP and RS-232) Value (FB45, error_MOBY) Value (Ident profile, STATUS byte) Description How to remedy the problem (byte 0, byte 1, byte 2) Fault in internal interface to the image sensor W#16# 5000 01 01 E1, FE, 02 There is a fault in the connection of the internal interface to the image sensor. If the error continues to occur after the device has been turned on again, contact technical support. Fault in internal interface to the image sensor W#16#5001 01 01 E1, FE, 02 There is a fault in the internal interface to the image sensor. If the error continues to occur after turning on the device again, contact technical support. Error during DISA signal change W#16#5003 03 02 E6, FE, 04 When the program is saved, the DISA signal is changed at an invalid location. Check the sequence of applied signals. Start the program saving process again. Error in sequence W#16#5004 04 02 E6, FE, 04 While the program is being saved, the time sequence of applied signals is not adhered to. Check the sequence of applied signals. Start the program saving process again. Error - Program cannot be started W#16#5005 05 04 E1, FE, 06 Not enough 1. Reduce the memory memory or program requirements. damaged. 2. Repeat "Save program". Error internal file error W#16#5005 05 13 E4, FE, 04 An error occurred while saving to read-only memory. Please contact technical support if this error occurs frequently. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 376 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.2 Reporting diagnostics information Message Value (onboard PROFINET diagnostics) Value (TCP/IP and RS-232) Value (FB45, error_MOBY) Value (Ident profile, STATUS byte) Description How to remedy the problem The send buffer is full because the data cannot be sent in an adequately short time. Reduce the trigger frequency. (byte 0, byte 1, byte 2) Transfer error W#16#5007 TCP or RS232 07 0A E1, FE, 04 With TCP: Process the results faster on the server. A high load on the network to which the reader is connected can also block the transfer of the data. If necessary, check the network connection. With RS-232: Increase the baud rate. The image buffer size in "Program" can also be increased under "Image acquisition", "Control" tab to expand the send buffer. Error - transfer error archiving/ MMI W#16#5007 07 0A E1, FE, 04 The send buffer is full because the data cannot be sent in an adequately short time or the server is not confirming receipt of the data in time. Reduce the trigger frequency or reduce the amount of diagnostic data to be archived. Process the results on the server faster. A high load on the network to which the reader is connected can also block the transfer of the data. If necessary, check the network connection. Error - transfer error PROFINET IO W#16#5007 07 0A E1, FE, 04 The send buffer is full because the data cannot be queried in an adequately short time. Reduce the trigger frequency or process the results faster. If necessary, change the update time in the PROFINET configuration. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 377 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.2 Reporting diagnostics information Message Value (onboard PROFINET diagnostics) Value (TCP/IP and RS-232) Value (FB45, error_MOBY) Value (Ident profile, STATUS byte) Description How to remedy the problem The send buffer is full because the data cannot be queried in an adequately short time. Reduce the trigger frequency or process the results more quickly on the CPU. If necessary, the baud rate on the ASM connection can also be increased. (byte 0, byte 1, byte 2) Error - transfer error ASM/PROFI NET IO W#16#5007 07 0A E1, FE, 04 To cover short peaks, the image buffer size of the program can be increased under "Image acquisition", "Control" tab. Error - Save program W#16#500A 10 02 E6, FE, 04 The program could not be created. Adapt the parameter assignment, the placement of test objects in the image or the image quality. Error - match error W#16#500B 11 0E E1, FE, 07 The program could not be created due to faulty match settings. Adapt the match settings or use a suitable test object. Error W#16#500E 14 0C E1, FE, 01 Connection error in communication over a TCP connection or when using an Ethernet RS-232 converter: There is no TCP connection or the data transfer cannot be completed within the set time limit. Make sure that the connected TCP partner is correctly configured and ready to receive. W#16#500E 14 0C E1, FE, 01 Error in communication over the archiving connection: There is no TCP connection, the server does not respond within the set time limit or violates the archiving protocol. Check the connection to the server. Make sure that the data is processed by the server in an adequately short time and that the protocol is maintained. TCP communication Error Archiving/ MMI communication SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 378 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.2 Reporting diagnostics information Message Value (onboard PROFINET diagnostics) Value (TCP/IP and RS-232) Value (FB45, error_MOBY) Value (Ident profile, STATUS byte) Description How to remedy the problem (byte 0, byte 1, byte 2) Error - lamp overload W#16#500F 15 10 E4, FE, 06 The connected lamp was overloaded. The configured or default "Maximum duty cycle" under "Options", "Lighting" tab, was exceeded. Decrease the trigger frequency, reduce the exposure time or use a more powerful lamp. Error - Invalid W#16#5010 program number 16 02 E6, FE, 04 An attempt is being made to save a program under an invalid number via the interface set in "Controller". Select a program number between 1 and 15. For SIMATIC MV420 SR-B, valid program numbers are 1 to 5 and 15. Error - 18 - - PROFINET IO The connection to the connection termina- PROFINET IO controller tion was interrupted. Check the connection to the I/O controller. - 21 - - PROFINET IO controller is in "STOP" status The PROFINET controller is in "STOP" status, which means it cannot receive commands from Note the code reader. Make No diagnostic intersure that the I/O controlrupt is sent to the ler changes back to I/O controller "RUN" status. W#16#5016 22 - - Faulty PROFINET IO configuration PROFINET IO connection error Error PROFINET IO controller status "STOP" Error PROFINET I/O configuration error The PROFINET IO configuration of the code reader and of the communication partner do not match. Check the PROFINET mode in the code reader and in the I/O controller. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 379 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.2 Reporting diagnostics information Message Value (onboard PROFINET diagnostics) Value (TCP/IP and RS-232) Value (FB45, error_MOBY) Value (Ident profile, STATUS byte) Description How to remedy the problem The version of the I/O controller is out of date and not compatible with the current version of the code reader. Keep in mind that this behavior of the code reader does not occur before version 7.0. To rectify this error, we recommend that you update the I/O controller or downgrade the code reader to version 6.8. (byte 0, byte 1, byte 2) Error W#16#5017 23 - - Version of the PROFINET IO controller incompatible with the I/O device (code reader) - - - E4, FE, 84 Error in last command sequence PROFINET IO compatibility error No message May occur if triggering is too fast. The Ident profile can only process one Note command at a time beNo diagnostic interfore a new command rupt is sent to the can be executed. I/O controller Self-acknowledging connection errors The following connection errors are self-acknowledging: Error TCP communication Error Archiving/MMI communication Error PROFINET IO connection error Error PROFINET IO controller STOP status As soon as the connection is re-established after an interruption, the reader exits the error status. The reader returns to the mode prior to the occurrence of the error, for example, back to processing mode. The occurrence of these errors and their automatic acknowledgement are stored in the diagnostic data records and are not overwritten by new errors. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 380 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.2 Reporting diagnostics information If such entries exist, this is indicated on the user interface in the "Run" and "Information/Statistics" tasks. Note PROFINET IO error/OB 86 not programmed * The occurrence of a PROFINET IO error causes OB 86 (rack failure OB) to be called on a SIMATIC S7 CPU. * Unless you have programmed OB86, the CPU changes to STOP. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 381 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.2 Reporting diagnostics information 10.2.2 Warnings and notes Error messages for "normalization": Error code Error message 2 Normalization failed! No adequately bright image could be set. Remedy: 3 * Set a larger aperture on the lens. * Increase the maximum exposure time and brightness. * Use a brighter light source. Normalization failed! The dynamic range of the image brightness is too small. Remedy: 4 * Make sure the position of the frame is correct. * Select a smaller aperture on the lens. * Reduce surrounding brightness. Normalization failed! Not enough memory. Remedy: * 5 Restart the reader. Normalization failed! An adequate dynamic range can only be achieved with an illuminated image. Remedy: 6 * Make sure the position of the frame is correct. * Select a smaller aperture on the lens. * Reduce surrounding brightness. Normalization failed! No valid setting found. Remedy: 8 * Change the aperture on the lens. * Reduce the maximum exposure time and brightness. * Use a different light source. Normalization failed! Error when saving. Remedy: * Delete a saved program. * Firmware update on the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 382 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.2 Reporting diagnostics information Error messages for "calibration" Error code Error message 18 Calibration was not successful! The cell scaling could not be identified. Remedy: * 19 Use the Siemens calibration card. Calibration was not successful! The contrast parameters could not be taken as valid. Remedy: 20 * Repeat the normalization step using a tighter frame. * Restore the conditions used for normalization. Calibration was not successful! The code could not be read. Remedy: * 21 Make sure the position of the code is correct. Calibration was not successful! Not enough memory. Remedy: * 24 Restart the reader. Calibration was not successful! Error when saving. Remedy: * Delete a saved program. * Firmware update on the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 383 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.2 Reporting diagnostics information 10.2.3 Read results Cons. no. Message Description How to remedy the problem 1 Read error (<reason>) The processing was not successful in For possible causes, refer to "Read and processing mode. verification error messages" for the error messages. 2 Filter error (<reason>) The selected result string filtering was not possible with the read code. 1. Check whether the code just read is correct. 2. Check and, if necessary, correct the selected result settings in the decoder step in the "Result" tab. 3 Match error(<read result> ! <Match string>) * * 4 Format error(<reason>) The configured comparison option 1. The code or plain text that has just been read deviates from the trained was not found in the code to be code (and is therefore incorrect), or the compared. wrong code was trained. The string defined for training 2. Check the selected result settings. does not match the current string of the code or the plain text. The configured format text does not match the definition. Check the selected settings. You can find additional information in "Overall result" in the online help. The undefined formatting command is issued as <reason>. Note Changing error texts Please note that the error texts on the "Results" tab (results step) under "Programs" can change. 10.2.4 Read and verification error messages If there is a read error or verification error, the following error codes or English message strings are output. For further information, please refer to "Overall results" in the online help. Note The causes of error 4700 to 4722 are also output in the verification report if there is a verification error All verification grades are output in the report as "E". The verification values correspond to the error code. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 384 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.2 Reporting diagnostics information Note Evaluating verification errors as read errors If the "Evaluate quality 'Poor' as 'N_OK'" check box has been selected in the decoding settings, a verification error will also be evaluated as 'N_OK'. Error code (%c) Message (%s) Description 0001 No 1D/2D code found in step n No code was found in step #n. 0002 Cycletime too short The processing was not completed within the cycle time limit. 0003 Trigger too fast The processing was interrupted by a trigger signal. 0004 Non ECC200 Code in step n A data matrix code was found in step #n that does not correspond to ECC200. Note The check for ECC200 is performed only in adjustment mode and during "Save program". 0005 Step n: Structured Append DMC not supported A "Structured Append" DMC type was found in step #n. This DMC type is not supported. 0006 Step n: Reader Programming DMC not supported A "Reader Programming Code" DMC type was found in step #n. This DMC type is not supported. 0007 Step n: QR ECI encoding not supported A QR code with "ECI encoding" was found in step #n. This QR type is not supported. 0008 Step n: QR Byte encoding not supported A QR code with "Byte encoding" was found in step #n. This QR type is not supported. 0009 Step n: QR Kanji encoding not supported A QR code with "Kanji encoding" was found in step #n. This QR type is not supported. 0010 Step n: Structured Append QR code not supported A "Structured Append" QR type was found in step #n. This QR type is not supported. 0011 Step n: QR FNC1 encoding not supported A QR code with "FNC1 encoding" was found in step #n. This QR type is not supported. 0012 Code quality is poor in step n A code with "poor" quality evaluation was read in step #n during verification. 0013 Nothing found "Scan" or "Autotrigger edge triggered" mode: All image acquisitions were decoded without result. 0014 Found m instead of the expected number of 1D/2D codes in step n Only m codes instead of the expected number of codes were found in step # n during multicode decoding. 0015 Maximum number of codes per image (m) was exceeded in step n More than the maximum number of codes were found with multicode decoding (per image (50, MV440 UR: 150). 0016 The maximum amount of data which can be decoded was exceeded in code m of step n A maximum of 3001 bytes can be decoded per step. This length was exceeded in step #n for code #m. 0017 Trigger during image acquisition The trigger signal was applied during image acquisition. In this case, no additional image acquisition is started. Instead, image acquisition and processing are being continued and an N_OK result is generated immediately upon completion. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 385 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.2 Reporting diagnostics information Error code (%c) Message (%s) Description 0018 Step timeout reached in step n In step #n, the defined time limit was reached. 1006 No text found in step n OCR: No text was found in step #n. 1007 Text length is less than minimum specified in step OCR: The text found in step #n is shorter than the n minimum setting. 1008 Text length exceeds the maximum specified in step n OCR: The text found in step #n is longer than the maximum setting. 1009 Quality violates limit values in step n OCR: The text found in step #n is below the quality threshold setting. 1010 Match failed in step n OCR: The match performed in step #n was not successful. 1011 Reference text missing in step n OCR: There is no string specification available for step #n. 4700 Verification failed in step n The read code could not be verified. 4701 Verification for code type found in step n not supported The selected verification method is not supported for the code type found in step #n. 4707 Mean light outside of range in step n: Maximum exposure time reached The average brightness needed for ISO/IEC 29158 is outside the valid range (see also error code 4709). The specified maximum value for the exposure time was reached during automatic exposure control. To resolve this error: 1. Use brighter lighting or enlarge the aperture of the objective (lower aperture number). 2. Perform a new calibration. 4708 Mean light outside of range in step n: Cycle time limit of the automatic exposure control reached The average brightness needed for ISO/IEC 29158 is outside the valid range (see also error code 4709). The automatic exposure control was unsuccessful because the necessary decodings could not be completed within the time limit. To resolve this error: * Reduce the exposure ROI of the program. * Change the resolution to half-image or increase the time limit of the exposure control. * Also ensure that the code is completely within the exposure ROI until conclusion of the image acquisition process. 4709 Mean light outside of range in step n The average brightness needed for ISO/IEC 29158 is outside the valid range (70% to 86%) in step #n. 4710 Verification failed in step n: Data Matrix ECC200 required Verification requires a data matrix code according to ECC200 specification (only for verification according to ISO/IEC 15415 or ISO/IEC 29158). 4711 Verification failed in step n: Aperture too small The cell size of the data matrix code in step #n is too large for the configured aperture (only for verification according to ISO/IEC 15415). 4712 Verification failed in step n: Aperture too large The cell size of the data matrix code in step #n is too small for the configured aperture (only for verification according to ISO/IEC 15415). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 386 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.2 Reporting diagnostics information Error code (%c) Message (%s) Description 4713 Verification failed in step n: Not enough space around the Data Matrix The inactive zone around the data matrix contained in the image is too small. For verification, an inactive zone of at least the size of two cells is required (only for verification according to ISO/IEC 15415 or 29158). 4714 Verification failed in step n: RDA could not find the horizontal timing pattern The reference decoding according to ISO/IEC 16022:2006 signals an error when searching for the horizontal timing pattern (only for verification according to ISO/IEC 15415 or ISO/IEC 29158). 4715 Verification failed in step n: RDA could not find the vertical timing pattern The reference decoding according to ISO/IEC 16022:2006 signals an error when searching for the vertical timing pattern (only for verification according to ISO/IEC 15415 or ISO/IEC 29158). 4716 Verification failed in step n: RDA found an incorrect number of rows and columns The reference decoding according to ISO/IEC 16022:2006 signals an error when determining the number of rows or columns (only for verification according to ISO/IEC 15415 or ISO/IEC 29158). 4717 Verification failed in step n: RDA could not locate the finder pattern The reference decoding according to ISO/IEC 16022:2006 signals an error when searching for the finder pattern (only for verification according to ISO/IEC 15415 or ISO/IEC 29158). 4719 Verification failed in step n: RDA error correction failed The reference decoding according to ISO/IEC 16022:2006 signals an error when determining the error correction (only for verification according to ISO/IEC 15415 or ISO/IEC 29158). 4720 Verification failed in step n: Number of Data Matrix rows/columns is too high The maximum supported code size for verification according to ISO/IEC 15415 or ISO/IEC 29158 is 104x104 cells. 4721 Verification failed in step n: Cell size is smaller than the specified Min.X Dim. During verification, a cell size was measured that is less than the minimum X-dimension setting (only for verification according to ISO/IEC 29158). 4722 Verification failed in step n: Cell size is larger than During verification, a cell size was measured that is the specified Max.X Dim. greater than the maximum X-dimension setting (only for verification according to ISO/IEC 29158). 5000 Not enough resources to process step n Step #n could not be executed due to a lack of resources (memory). 5001 No objects found in step n Locator: No objects were found in step #n. 5002 Too few objects found in step n Locator: The number of objects found in step #n is lower than the minimum setting. 5003 Too few objects found in step n: Required feature is missing Locator: The number of objects found in step #n is lower than the minimum setting. At least one instance was rejected because of a missing required feature. 5004 Too few objects found in step n: Rotation range exceeded Locator: The number of objects found in step #n is lower than the minimum setting. At least one instance was rejected because it did not comply with the rotation constraint. 5005 Too few objects found in step n: Scaling range exceeded Locator: The number of objects found in step #n is lower than the minimum setting. At least one instance was rejected because it did not comply with the scale constraint. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 387 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.2 Reporting diagnostics information Error code (%c) Message (%s) Description 5006 Too few objects found in step n: Contours not adequate Locator: The number of objects found in step #n is lower than the minimum setting. At least one instance was rejected because insufficient contours were found. 5008 Too few objects found in step n: Details not recognized Locator: The number of objects found in step #n is lower than the minimum setting. At least one instance that was identified at the outline level was rejected at the detail level. 5009 Too few objects found in step n: Outline not recognized Locator: The number of objects found in step #n is lower than the minimum setting. No instance was found at the outline level. 5010 Too few objects found in step n: Clear percentage Locator: The number of objects found in step #n is violated lower than the minimum setting. At least one instance was rejected because it did not comply with the clear percentage constraint. 5011 Too many objects found in step n Locator: The number of objects found in step #n is higher than the set maximum. 5012 Quality too poor in step n Locator: The objects found in step #n are below the configured quality threshold. 5013 Average Quality too poor in step n Locator: The objects found in step #n are below the set average quality threshold. 5014 Match error tolerance exceeded in step n Locator: The match performed in step #n was not successful because the number of match errors was higher than the maximum number permitted. 5015 Position tolerance exceeded for object m in step n Locator: The position of object m in step #n is outside the maximum permitted deviation. 5016 Rotation tolerance exceeded for object m in step n 10.2.5 Locator: The rotation angle of object m in step #n is outside the maximum permitted deviation. Filter error messages If there is a filter error, the following message strings are displayed in English. For further information, please refer to "Overall results" in the online help. Error text (%s) For filter mode only Description Symbol does not use GS1encoding GS1 The code read does not begin with the GS1 start symbol "]d2". "[Number]" is no valid GS1 Application Identifier GS1 The string selected in the "Filter ID" box contains an invalid application identifier tag. GS1 Application Identifier "[Number]" not found in symbol content GS1 An application identifier specified in the "Filter ID" box was not found in the read code. Symbol content shorter than given "start position" Position The read code is shorter than the selected "Start position" ID or separator not found in symbol content ID An ID (field: "Filter ID") or a separator character (field: "Separators") was not found in the read code. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 388 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.2 Reporting diagnostics information 10.2.6 Error messages when writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH) Apart from protocol errors in the structure of the XMATCH command (Page 350), the following errors are logged in the diagnostics data records as temporary errors (selfacknowledging). Error message in the diagnostics data records Error XMATCH command discarded. Permanent The image acquisition control is set to "Auto trigger". flag and Trg-ID: 0 expected. An XMATCH command was received that: * (1) does not have a permanent flag. * (2) has a trigger ID 0. XMATCH command discarded. Permanent An XMATCH command with the trigger ID 0 but without flag mandatory for Trg-ID: 0. a permanent flag was received. XMATCH buffer full. Matchstring discarded The received match string cannot be buffered. (Trg-ID: [TrgId], Program No: [Program The inability to buffer can have two reasons: number], Step No: [Step number], Match* (1) The trigger ID sent is more than 20 triggers string Idx: [Matchstring Index]). (SIMATIC MV420: 10 triggers) away from the current counter. Note XMATCH commands with a permanent flag can contain any trigger ID. Permanent settings can, however, only be buffered for a maximum of two different trigger IDs. If a further permanent setting is received, the last sent setting is overwritten. * (2) The total size of all stored match strings exceeds 200 KB (SIMATIC MV420: 100 KB). XMATCH command discarded. Program An XMATCH command has been received whose proNo: [Program number] is not active or does gram number refers to a program which: not use match. * (1) Is not active * (2) Was saved with match "Off" (decoder) or without a string specification (OCR). XMATCH command discarded. String for Trg-ID: [TrgId] does not fit match settings for step no: [Step number], Matchstring Idx: [Matchstring Index] in program no: [Program number] An XMATCH command was received with a match string that cannot be processed with the selected match option (decoder) or string specification type (OCR). XMATCH command discarded. Program sequence is active. Program sequence mode is active. In this mode, no XMATCH commands can be used. Example Match "Position" with start position 10, but the match string that was sent only has 9 characters. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 389 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.3 Diagnostics by evaluating the POWER, ETHERNET, STATE/SF LEDs 10.3 Diagnostics by evaluating the POWER, ETHERNET, STATE/SF LEDs LED labeling Meaning POWER * GREEN, flashing: Signals the startup phase after turning the reader on. Wait until this is completed and the reader is operational. * GREEN, lit permanently: Reader is ready for operation No error. * Permanently off: No Ethernet connection to the reader. * Check the connection to the Ethernet cable. * Check whether the connected switch or other communications partner is operational. * Check or replace the Ethernet cable. ETHERNET STATE/SF How to remedy the problem * GREEN, permanently on: An Ethernet connection exists without data traffic. To start the user interface of the reader, you also require a valid network configuration for TCP/IP. Here, you can, for example, use the Primary Setup Tool to create a valid network configuration for TCP/IP. * GREEN flashing: The reader is exchanging data. No error. * Off permanently: The reader is in "Stop" mode (no error) No error. * GREEN on permanently: The reader is in RUN mode (no error) No error. * RED, lit constantly: The reader is in the "Group error" status Possible cause when working with onboard PROFINET IO: Start the user interface to display the error message. Follow the suggested remedies, see section "Error messages (Page 376)". 1. Bus error (no physical connection to a subnet / switch). 2. Wrong transmission speed, Full duplex transmission is not enabled. * RED, flashing When using onboard PROFINET IO: * Check whether the IP address or device name occurs more than once in the network. 1. Bus communication is interrupted. * Check the settings of the I/O controller. 2. The IP address is incorrect. 3. Bad configuration. 4. Bad parameter assignment. 5. Bad or missing device name. 6. I/O controller does not exist / turned off. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 390 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.4 I/O device diagnostics 10.4 I/O device diagnostics 10.4.1 Introduction Errors, for example, "Error - transfer error PROFINET IO", trigger I/O device diagnostics. The diagnostic information is read out using STEP 7 depending on the I/O controller. How to read out I/O device diagnostic information and how it is structured is described briefly below. You will find a detailed description in the programming manual PROFINET IO - From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO. 10.4.2 Reading out diagnostics information with S7 If, for example, the error "Error - transfer error PROFINET IO connection error" occurs on the reader and you are using an S7 CPU as the I/O controller, the diagnostic interrupt OB (OB82) is started on the I/O controller. Its local variables OB_82_EV_CLASS, OB_82_MDL_DEFECT and OB82_EXT_FAULT have the following values: Variable Value Meaning OB_82_EV_CLASS B#16#39 Event entering state OB_82_MDL_DEFECT TRUE Module problem OB_82_EXT_FAULT TRUE External problem Unfortunately, you cannot identify the actual cause of the problem in the local variables of OB82. You can find this out as follows: With PROFINET IO: By calling SFB 54 "RALRM" in OB 82 The entry "Faulty module" appears in the diagnostic buffer and the corresponding text from the GSD file, for example, "Error - transfer error PROFINET IO", appears in the module information of the reader. After the error has been eliminated and you have acknowledged it in the user interface of the reader, the diagnostics interrupt OB (OB82) is started again on the I/O controller. Its local variables OB_82_EV_CLASS, OB_82_MDL_DEFECT and OB82_EXT_FAULT have the following values: Variable Value Meaning OB_82_EV_CLASS B#16#38 Event exiting state OB_82_MDL_DEFECT FALSE No module problem OB_82_EXT_FAULT FALSE No external error The entry "Module OK" now appears in the diagnostics buffer. The text from the GSD file relating to the previous error no longer appears in the module information of the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 391 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.4 I/O device diagnostics 10.4.3 Diagnostics with PROFINET IO SFB 54 "RALRM" returns the following diagnostics information with PROFINET IO in the TINFO parameter (task information): Byte Value Meaning 0 ... 19 See OB description Start information of the OB in which SFB 54 was called. 20 ... 21 Depends on the configuration Address: 22 23 24 25 B#16#08 B#16#00 B#16#00 / B#16#01 B#16#01 / B#16#00 * Bit 0 ... 10: Station number (according to configuration) * Bit 11 ... 14: I/O system ID (according to configuration) * Bit 15: 1 * Bit 0 ... 3: Slave type: 1000 = PNIO * Bit 4 ... 7: Profile type: 0000 * Bit 0 ... 3: Alarm info type: 0000 * Bit 4 ... 7: Structure version: 0000 Flags of the PNIO controller interface module: * Bit 0 = 0: Alarm from an integrated interface module * Bit 0 = 1: Alarm from an external interface module * Bits 1 ... 7: all 0 Flags of the PNIO controller interface module: * Bit 0 = 1 with incoming alarm * Bit 0 = 0 with outgoing alarm * Bits 1 ... 7: all 0 26 ... 27 W#16#8111 PNIO device ident number (fixed). 28 ... 29 W#16#002A Vendor ID (fixed). 30 ... 31 W#16#0001 Identification number of the instance. SFB 54 "RALRM" returns the following diagnostics information with PROFINET IO in the AINFO parameter (additional alarm information): Note When an alarm exits the alarm state, only bytes 0 to 25 of the AINFO parameter are written. Compare the meaning of bytes 2 and 3 of AINFO. Diagnostics data record SFB 54 Byte Value Meaning 0 ... 1 according to PNIO standard Block type 2 ... 3 W#16#001A / W#16#0016 Length of the diagnostics data with an incoming / outgoing alarm. 4 ... 5 W#16#0100 Version (fixed) 6 ... 7 W#16#0001 / W#16#000C ID for the alarm type: Diagnostics alarm incoming / diagnostics alarm outgoing. 8 ... 11 DW#16#00000000 API (fixed) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 392 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.4 I/O device diagnostics Diagnostics data record SFB 54 Byte Value Meaning 12 ... 13 W#16#0000 Slot (fixed) 14 ... 15 W#16#0001 Subslot (fixed) 16 ... 19 DW#16#00000300 Module identification (fixed) 20 ... 23 DW#16#00000000 Submodule identification (fixed) 24 ... 25 W#16#Bxxx / W#16#xxx Alarm specification for incoming / outgoing alarm: * Bits 0 to 10: Sequence number * Bit 11: Channel diagnostics: 0 (fixed) * Bit 12: Status of vendor-specific diagnostics * Bit 13: Status of diagnostics for submodule * Bit 14: Reserved: 0 * Bit 15: Diagnostics status 26 ... 27 W#16#0004 ID for vendor-specific diagnostics (fixed). 28 ... 29 Value from the table under error messages ID of the error that occurred. In contrast to events-related reading out of the diagnostics data with SFB 54, there is also the option of reading out the diagnostics data status-related. You read out status-related diagnostics data using SFB 52 "RDREC". Calling SFB 52: 1. You assign the diagnostics address of the reader to the ID parameter in hexadecimal format. 2. Assign the value 2 to the INDEX parameter. Diagnostics data record SFB 52 Byte Value Meaning 0 ... 1 W#16#0010 Data record type: Diagnostics data record 2 ... 3 W#16#0012 Data record length starting at byte 4: 18 bytes 4 ... 5 W#16#0100 Version 6 ... 7 W#16#0000 Slot 8 ... 9 W#16#0000 Subslot 10 ... 11 W#16#0000 Channel 12 B#16#08 / B#16#10 Error occurred / no error occurred 13 B#16#05 Identifier indicating that all variables are stored in words starting at byte 14. 14 ... 15 W#16#0004 ID for vendor-specific diagnostics (fixed) 16 ... 17 W#16#0000 Channel number 18 ... 19 W#16#0805 / W#16#1005 Content identical to that of bytes 12 and 13. 20 ... 21 Value from the table under error messages ID of the error that occurred. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 393 Alarm, fault and system messages 10.4 I/O device diagnostics SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 394 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Service and maintenance 11.1 11 Maintenance and repair Maintenance The devices are maintenance-free. Cleaning is unnecessary. Nevertheless, Siemens AG recommends professional cleaning of the protective lens barrel when it becomes dirty so that a consistent reading performance is maintained. Repair For repairs, send the reader to Siemens AG without its protective lens barrel, lighting unit, and other accessories. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 395 Service and maintenance 11.1 Maintenance and repair SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 396 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 12 Technical specifications 12.1 General technical specifications Mechanical environmental conditions for SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 Mechanical environmental conditions for operation SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 are designed for fixed installation in an environment protected from the weather and meet the conditions for use complying with DIN IEC 60721-3-3: * Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements); * Class 3K3 (climatic environmental conditions). Mechanical environmental conditions, sine-shaped oscillations Frequency range in Hz Test values 10 f < 58 0.075 mm amplitude 58 f < 500 1 g constant acceleration Test for mechanical environmental conditions Test for / test standard Comments Vibrations * Vibration test according to IEC 60068-2-6 (sinusoidal) * Test for / test standard Shock Shock test according to IEC 60068-2-29 Vibration type: Frequency cycles with a rate of change of 1 octave/minute. - 10 Hz f < 58 Hz, constant amplitude 0.075 mm - 58 Hz f < 500 Hz, constant acceleration 1 g - 10 Hz f 55 Hz, amplitude 1 mm (only sensor head and lighting unit) Vibration duration: 10 frequency cycles per axis in each of the 3 mutually perpendicular axes. Comments * Type of shock: Half-sine * Strength of the shock for the reader: * - 10 g peak value - 16 ms duration Direction of shock: 100 shocks in each of the 3 mutually perpendicular axes SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 397 Technical specifications 12.1 General technical specifications Climatic environmental conditions for SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 Table 12- 1 Ambient climatic conditions for operation Ambient conditions Permitted range Temperature 0 ... +50 C Temperature change Max. 10 C/h Relative humidity max. 95 % at +25 C Comments No condensation, corresponds to relative humidity degree 2 to IEC 61131-2. Transportation and storage of SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 Transportation and storage of modules SIMATIC MV440 exceeds the requirements of IEC 61131-2 for transportation and storage conditions. The following information applies to modules transported or stored in their original packaging. The climatic conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3K7 for storage and IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2K4 for transportation. The mechanical conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2M2. Conditions Permitted range Free fall 1 m (up to 10 kg) Temperature -30 to +70 C Atmospheric pressure 660 ... 1080 hPa, corresponds to an altitude of 0 ... 3500 m Relative humidity (at +25 C) 5 to 95%, no condensation Sinusoidal vibrations according to IEC 60068-2-6 9 - 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 Shock complying with IEC 60068-2-29 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks 5 - 9 Hz: 3.5 mm Power supply for SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 Power supply Supply voltage (UN) 24 ; (19.2 V DC ...28.8 V DC, safety extra low voltage, SELV). Fuse Max. 4 A Safety requirements complying with IEC 61131-2 corresponds to DIN EN 61131-2 Electromagnetic compatibility for SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 Electromagnetic compatibility Pulse-shaped interference Interference Test voltage Corr. to severity SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 398 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Technical specifications 12.1 General technical specifications Electromagnetic compatibility Electrostatic discharge according to IEC 61000-4-2 * Air discharge: * Contact discharge: Burst impulses (fast transient interference) according to IEC 61000-4-4 * 2 kV (power supply cable) * 2 kV (signal line) 8 kV 6 kV 3 3 Surge complying with IEC 61000-4-5 Coupling Test voltage Corr. to severity Asymmetrical 2 kV (power supply cable) direct voltage with protective elements 3 Symmetrical 1 kV (power supply cable) direct voltage with protective elements 3 Sine-shaped interference RF interference (electromagnetic fields) Test values Corr. to severity Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m at 80 % amplitude modulation of 1 kHz in the range from 80 to 1000 MHz 3 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m at 50% pulse modulation at 900 MHz 3 RF interference on cable/cable shields Test values Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6 Test voltage 10 V at 80% amplitude modulation of 1 kHz in the range from 9 kHz to 80 MHz Corr. to severity 3 Emission Limit class * Emitted interference of electromagnetic fields according to EN 55011: Limit class A, group 1; * Emitted interference via the AC input power supply according to EN 55011: Limit class A, group 1. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 399 Technical specifications 12.2 Reader 12.2 Reader SIMATIC MV440 Reader Image acquisition * CCD chip 1/3", 640 x 480, square pixels; full-frame shutter * CCD chip 1/3", 1024 x 768, square pixels; full-frame shutter * CCD chip 1/1.8", 1600 x 1200, square pixels; full-frame shutter Image data transmission Triggered and automatic image acquisition Casing Aluminum die-casting Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 65 x 122 x 55 Weight Degree of protection * Approx. 0.45 kg without protective lens barrel * Approx. 0.55 kg with protective lens barrel IP67 according to IEC 60529 Supply voltage, current consumption * Type of supply voltage DC * Supply voltage from: 24 V DC 20% * - M16 Power/IO connector - M12 ASM connector Supply voltage from: - 48 V DC, (min: 36 V DC, max: 57 V DC) Power over Ethernet according to IEEE802.3af (PoE), however only phantom power Current consumption (without I/O signals) * 24 V DC: Maximum 270 mA * PoE: Maximum 135 mA * Making current (at 24 V DC) I1 max. 2 A; < 1 ms * Mains buffering time (at 24 V DC) 10 ms * Power over Ethernet (PoE) * Powered Device (PD) Type 1, class 2 (6.49 W) * Type of supply Phantom power (IEEE 802.af) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 400 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Technical specifications 12.2 Reader Digital output signals*) OUTPUT1 ... OUTPUT5 floating and proof against short circuit Per output: 100 mA * With max. load current * Max. total load current Across all outputs: 250 mA * Max. short-circuit current Per output: 240 mA Delays when switching on and off *) 0 ... 2 ms All values of the output signals are relative to the OUTPUT_COMMON signal. Input signals*) INPUT1: * Input resistance at 24 V DC * Input voltage for "1" signal * Input current for "1" signal * Input voltage for "0" signal * Input current for "0" signal 6 k 15 ... 30 V 2 ... 5 mA 0 ... 5 V 0 ... 1.4 mA INPUT2 ... INPUT5: * Input resistance at 24 V DC * Input voltage for "1" signal * Input current for "1" signal * Input voltage for "0" signal * Input current for "0" signal *) 16 k 15 ... 30 V 0.6 ... 2 mA 0 ... 5 V 0 ... 0.3 mA All values of the input signals are relative to the INPUT_COMMON signal. Strobe signal *) Fast strobe output Max. load current at 24 V DC: *) 25 mA All values of the strobe signal are relative to chassis ground of the power supply. SIMATIC MV420 Reader Image acquisition CMOS chip 1/3", 768 x 480 (640 x 480), square pixels; global shutter Image data transmission Triggered image acquisition Casing Aluminum die-casting SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 401 Technical specifications 12.2 Reader Reader Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 53 x 86 x 40 Weight approx. 0.25 kg Degree of protection IP67 according to IEC 60529 Input voltage range: 24 V DC 20% Max. current consumption at 24 V DC 170 mA (without I/O signals) Starting current I1 max. 2 A; < 1 ms Mains buffering time (at 24 V DC): 10 ms Digital output signals*) OUTPUT2 ... OUTPUT3 floating and short-circuit proof * With max. load current Per output: 100 mA * Max. total load current Across all outputs: 100 mA * Max. short-circuit current Per output: 240 mA Delays when switching on and off *) 0 ... 2 ms All values of the output signals are relative to the OUTPUT_COMMON signal. Input signals*) INPUT1 (trigger): * Input resistance at 24 V DC * Input voltage for "1" signal * Input current for "1" signal * Input voltage for "0" signal * Input current for "0" signal *) 6 K 15 ... 30 V 2 ... 5 mA 0 ... 5 V 0 ... 1.4 mA All values of the input signals are relative to the INPUT_COMMON signal. Strobe signal *) Fast strobe output Max. load current at 24 V DC: *) 25 mA All values of the strobe signal are relative to chassis ground of the power supply. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 402 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Technical specifications 12.3 Built-in ring light (SIMATIC MV440) 12.3 Built-in ring light (SIMATIC MV440) 6GF3440-8DA11, 6GF3440-8DA21, 6GF34408DA31, 6GF3440-8DA41 Lighting distance Up to 0.8 m Light color/wavelength at a relative light intensity of 0.2 ... 1.0 * 6GF3440-8DA11 * Red/618 nm * 6GF3440-8DA21 * White/440 ... 650 nm * 6GF3440-8DA31 * Green/513 ... 543 nm * 6GF3440-8DA41 * Infrared/850 nm Electrical data Flash mode * Duty cycle 8% * Max. exposure time 10 ms Current consumption at 24 V DC * Flash mode 1.6 W * Continuous operation 2.4 W Permissible ambient conditions Operating temperature of total unit 0 ... +50 C Storage temperature -20 ... +70 C Max. humidity 95%, non-condensing Design, dimensions, weight 12.4 Mechanical dimensions Outer diameter x inner diameter x height (mm) 54 x 34 x 55 Weight 20 g External lighting unit 6GF3400-0LT01-7BA1 (IR) 6GF3400-0LT01-8DA1 (RED) Lighting distance 500 ... 3 000 mm Light color/wavelength at a relative light intensity of 0.2 ... 1.0 * Red 625 nm * Infrared 850 nm Electrical data Flash mode SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 403 Technical specifications 12.4 External lighting unit 6GF3400-0LT01-7BA1 (IR) 6GF3400-0LT01-8DA1 (RED) * Duty cycle 40% * Max. exposure time 10 ms Power supply 24 V (18 ... 30 V) Current consumption at 24 V DC (max. peak value) * Red 0.6 A * Infrared 1.0 A Permissible ambient conditions Operating temperature 0 ... +50 C Storage temperature -30 ... +80 C Max. humidity 95% at 25 C Design, dimensions, weight Mechanical dimensions Outer diameter x inner diameter x height (mm) 142 x 68 x 42.5 Weight 452 g Degree of protection IP67 Pin assignment for connector of 10 m cable (article number: 6GF3440-8BC4) with assignment diagram Pin 1/brown 24 V power supply Pin 2/white Trigger input Pin 3/blue NC Pin 4/black Ground - Position of the coding SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 404 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Technical specifications 12.5 Pin assignment of the interfaces 12.5 Pin assignment of the interfaces SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 Power IO RS-232 interface Figure 12-1 Pin assignment power IO RS-232 connector (front view) Table 12- 2 Power IO RS-232 connector: M16 with connector at one end (female, 12-pin, straight) Connector/pin Wire color SIMATIC MV440 signal SIMATIC MV420 signal H Red 24 V 24 V G Blue 0V 0V K Violet INPUT1 (trigger) INPUT1 (trigger) D Yellow INPUT2/ OUTPUT2 OUTPUT2 L Gray/pink INPUT3/ OUTPUT3 OUTPUT3 C Green INPUT4/ OUTPUT4 ASM TxD_N B Brown INPUT5/ OUTPUT5 ASM TxD_P A White INPUT_COMMON INPUT_COMMON E Gray OUTPUT_COMMON OUTPUT_COMMON J Black Strobe Strobe F Pink RS-232 TxD RS-232 TxD or ASM RxD_P M Red/blue RS-232 RxD RS-232 RxD or ASM RxD_N Assignment pin assignment connector/wire color of the cable/signal connection reader Ethernet port Figure 12-2 Pin assignment Ethernet socket (front view) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 405 Technical specifications 12.5 Pin assignment of the interfaces Table 12- 3 IE connecting cable M12-180/M12-180: M12 prefitted at both ends (male/male, 4-poe, D-coded) Connector/pin Wire color Signal name SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 signal 1 Yellow TxDP Send data + 2 White RxD_P Received data + 3 Orange TxDN Send data - 4 Blue RxD_N Received data - Assignment pin assignment socket/wire color of the cable/signal connection reader SIMATIC MV440 ASM interface Figure 12-3 Pin assignment ASM connector (SIMATIC MV440 only) Table 12- 4 ASM cable, M12 (male, 8-pin, straight) / M12 (female, 8-pin, straight) Connector/pin Wire color Signal name SIMATIC MV440 1 White 24 V 24 V DC power supply 2 Brown TXD_N Send data - 3 Green 0V Ground 4 Yellow TXD_P Send data + 5 Gray RXD_P Received data + 6 Pink RXD_N Received data - 7 Blue Not connected - 8 Red Shield - Assignment pin assignment socket/wire color of the cable/signal connection reader SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 406 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 13 Dimension drawings All dimensions in mm. SIMATIC MV440 reader Protective cap for lens screw connection Power IO RS-232 connection Ethernet connection LED displays ASM connection SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 407 Dimension drawings SIMATIC MV420 reader Rotatable protective lens barrel LED displays Ethernet socket Power IO RS-232 connection SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 408 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Dimension drawings SIMATIC MV440 with attached lighting unit and mounting plate External ring light holder Lighting unit MV400 LED ring light metal red/metal IR clear / Lighting unit SIMATIC Vision Sensor VS100 Socket for lighting unit Torx screws M4x8 Reader mounting plate Reader IP65 protective lens barrel 65 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 409 Dimension drawings Lighting unit MV400 LED ring light metal red/metal IR clear Lighting unit SIMATIC Vision Sensor VS100 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 410 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Dimension drawings SIMATIC MV440 ring light holder SIMATIC MV440 mounting plate SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 411 Dimension drawings SIMATIC MV420 mounting plate with mounting bracket Protective lens barrel SIMATIC MV440 Figure 13-1 Protective lens barrel 65 mm; metal/glass Figure 13-2 Protective lens barrel 65 mm; plexiglass SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 412 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Dimension drawings Protective barrel extension Figure 13-3 Protective barrel extension 65 mm SIMATIC MV440 built-in ring light Figure 13-4 Built-in ring light 54 mm SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 413 Dimension drawings SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 414 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14 This section describes the components of the SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440 readers and their accessories. The readers can be ordered with various performance characteristics, for example with standard resolution or high resolution. Depending on the requirements and the application, the readers can be fitted with accessories. "SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440" This section details accessories for both types of reader (Page 418). "SIMATIC MV420" This section details accessories for SIMATIC MV420 readers (Page 421) only. "SIMATIC MV440" This section details accessories for SIMATIC MV440 readers (Page 427) only. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 415 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.1 Readers 14.1 Readers Note Connecting cables are not supplied with the device The connecting cables required are not supplied with the device. The following tables list the article numbers of the complete packages and the individual components. Article number Reader 6GF3420-0AA20 SIMATIC MV420 SR-B 6GF3420-0AA40 6GF3420-0AX20 6GF3420-0AX40 SIMATIC MV420 SR-P SIMATIC MV420 SR-B Body SIMATIC MV420 SR-P Body Description * Basic unit with all essential functions * Resolution of the reader 768 x 480 or 640 x 480 pixels * For one- and two-dimensional codes * Image field and distance variable * IP67 * Light: red, lens: 6 mm * Expanded functionality * Resolution of the reader 768 x 480 or 640 x 480 pixels * For one- and two-dimensional codes * Image field and distance variable * IP67 * Light: red, lens: 6 mm * Basic unit with all essential functions * Resolution of the reader 768 x 480 or 640 x 480 pixels * For one- and two-dimensional codes * No lighting, lens or protective lens barrel (can be ordered separately) * Expanded functionality * Resolution of the reader 768 x 480 or 640 x 480 pixels * For one- and two-dimensional codes * Image field and distance variable * No lighting, lens or protective lens barrel (can be ordered separately) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 416 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.1 Readers Article number Reader Description 6GF3440-1CD10 SIMATIC MV440 SR * Resolution of the reader 640 x 480 pixels * For one- and two-dimensional codes * For OCR and verification (license required) * Image field and distance variable * With PoE * D65 protective lens barrel PC-PC 6GF3440-1GE10 6GF3440-1LE10 SIMATIC MV440 HR SIMATIC MV440 UR - IP67 (article numbers 6GF3440-8AC11 and 6GF3440-8AC21) - IP40 (without article number 6GF3440-8AC118AC11 and 6GF3440-8AC21) * No lighting, no lens * Resolution of the reader 1024 x 768 pixels * For one- and two-dimensional codes * For OCR and verification (license required) * Image field and distance variable * With PoE * D65 protective lens barrel PC-PC - IP67 (article numbers 6GF3440-8AC11 and 6GF3440-8AC21) - IP40 (without article number 6GF3440-8AC11 and 6GF3440-8AC21) * No lighting, no lens * Resolution of the reader 1600 x 1200 pixels * For one- and two-dimensional codes * for OCR and verification (license required) * Image field and distance variable * With PoE * D65 protective lens barrel PC-PC * - IP67 (article numbers 6GF3440-8AC11 and 6GF3440-8AC21) - IP40 (without article number 6GF3440-8AC11 and 6GF3440-8AC21) No lighting, no lens SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 417 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories 14.2 Accessories 14.2.1 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 14.2.1.1 Further accessories You will find the accessories below: In catalog ID 10 On the Internet at SIMATIC Ident home page (http://www.siemens.com/ident) or Industry Mall Homepage (http://www.siemens.com/industrymall). Cables Ethernet/PROFINET - connectors fitted by user For ASM Lens accessories Lenses Filter Plug-in power unit for commissioning and testing Mechanical holders Holder for external MV400 lamps Trimetal holders Lamps 14.2.1.2 External lighting units Note See the dimension drawings in the image database for dimensions You will find the exact dimensions in the dimension drawings in the Image Database (http://www.automation.siemens.com/bilddb/) of Siemens AG. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 418 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories Lighting units for external lighting Article number External lamps Note 6GF3400-0LT01-7BA1 MV400 LED ring light metal IR clear * * Connector compatible with previous external 16.5 V ring lamps, e.g. 6GF9004-7BA01. * Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers * No mounting brackets ship with the product. * Connector compatible with previous external 16.5 V ring lamps, e.g. 6GF9004 8DA01. * Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers * No mounting brackets ship with the product. Power supply: 24 V (18 ... 30 V) * Light source: 850 nm * Lighting distance: 500 ... 3000 mm * Protective lens barrel, suitable dimensions in mm (outer diameter x inner diameter x height): 142 x 68 x 42.5 * Degree of protection IP67 6GF3400-0LT01-8DA1 MV400 LED ring light metal red clear * Power supply: 24 V (18 ... 30 V) * Light source: 625 nm * Lighting distance: 500 ... 3000 mm * Protective lens barrel, suitable dimensions in mm (outer diameter x inner diameter x height): 142 x 68 x 42.5 * Degree of protection IP67 Ring light holder Article number Ring light holder Note 6GF3440-8CD01 Ring light holder for SIMATIC MV400 ring lamps: * Screws are supplied. * Replaces 6GF3440-8CD * 6GF3400-0LT01-7BA1 * 6GF3400-0LT01-8DA1 * Dimensions (W x H x D): 92 x 76 x 46 mm SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 419 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories Cables Article number Cables Note 6GF3440-8BC4 Cables suitable for external ring lamps: Cable is suitable for MV400 and SIMATIC VS100 ring lamps. 6GF3440-8BD1 14.2.1.3 * 6GF3400-0LT01-7BA1 * 6GF3400-0LT01-8DA1 * M12, open end, 4-pin, not capable of trailing * Length 10 m Adapter cables for external ring lamps: * 6GF3400-0LT01-7BA1 * 6GF3400-0LT01-8DA1 * Power supply via Power DIO RS-232 (M16, 12-pin female) * Effective length 25 cm * Cable is suitable for MV400 ring lamps. * Cable allows the direct connection of external ring lights to SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440. Documentation for SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 Free documentation downloads on the Internet SIMATIC MV420 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/ps/15148/man) SIMATIC MV440 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/ps/15149/man) SIMATIC Manual Collection on DVD SIMATIC Manual Collection (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/ps/6ES79988XC01-8YE0) All manuals for S7-1500/1200/200/300/400, C7, LOGO!, SIMATIC DP, PC, PG, STEP 7, engineering software, runtime software, SIMATIC PCS 7, SIMATIC HMI, SIMATIC NET, SIMATIC Ident. in 5 Languages Article number: 6ES7998-8XC01-8YE0 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 420 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories 14.2.2 SIMATIC MV420 14.2.2.1 Fittings for mounting 14.2.2.2 Article number Fittings for mounting Note 6GF3420-0AC00-1AA0 Mounting plate for reader, SIMATIC MV420 W x H x D (in mm): 40 x 54 x 30, Material: stainless steel (2 mm) Versatile application; with holes Reader lens Reader lenses supported Note SIMATIC MV420 SR-B/P SIMATIC MV420 SR-B/P (article number 6GF3420-0AA20, 6GF3420-0AA40) is supplied with the pre-mounted lens kit 6GF3420-0AC00-0LK0 (focal distance of 6 mm) and the red internal lamp 6GF3420-0AC00-1LT0. Article number Reader lenses Remark 6GF3420-0AC00-0LK0 MV420 LENS KIT 6 mm F/5.6 * Fixed focal distance (6 mm) * Fixed aperture (F/5.6) * MV420 protective lens barrel * Fittings for mounting * IP67 * Fixed focal distance (16 mm) * Fixed aperture (F/4) * MV420 protective lens barrel * Fittings for mounting * IP67 6GF3420-0AC00-1LK0 MV420 LENS KIT 16 mm F/4 Field of vision depending on camera distance Note Values in the diagrams are subject to tolerances The values in the two diagrams have certain tolerances. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 421 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories X axis Height of field of vision (mm) Y axis Width of field of vision (mm) Diagonal Distance from camera to object (mm) For a focal distance of 6 mm Figure 14-1 16:10 format SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 422 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories For a focal distance of 16 mm Figure 14-2 14.2.2.3 14.2.2.4 16:10 format Protective tube Article number Designation Note 6GF3420-0AC00-2AA0 MV420 protective lens barrel, set of spares * 2 x MV420 protective lens barrel * Fittings supplied Built-in ring light Note SIMATIC MV420 SR-B/P In the SIMATIC MV420 SR-B/P (6GF3420-0AA20, 6GF3420-0AA40), the integrated red MV420 ring light (6GF3420-0AC00-1LT0) is already fitted. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 423 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories Article number Ring light Note 6GF3420-0AC00-1LT0 Built-in MV420 red ring light for SIMATIC MV420 Fittings supplied 6GF3420-0AC00-2LT0 Built-in MV420 white ring light for SIMATIC MV420 6GF3420-0AC00-3LT0 Built-in MV420 IR ring light for SIMATIC MV420 Light source: Red/amber LED (618 nm) Fittings supplied Light source: LED white (425 to 610 nm) Fittings supplied Light source: Infrared LED (888 nm) 14.2.2.5 Cables The SIMATIC MV420 reader is fitted with an industrial M12 plug and an M16 socket. The connectors have the following functions: M12 - Ethernet cable M12/RJ-45 M16 - Power IO RS-232 cable (plus ASM) Note Ordering information * Either one or two cables are required depending on the application. The cables are not part of a complete package and must always be ordered separately. * There is more than one version of each cable type. In this case, you simply need to order one version per reader. M12 - Ethernet cable M12/RJ-45 This cable connects the reader with a communications partner over Ethernet. Due to its short length, the following cable is intended only for commissioning and service: Article number IE connecting cable M12-180/ IE FC RJ45-145 Note 6XV1871-5TH20 Prefitted IE FC TP trailing cable GP 2 x 2 (PROFINET type C) for commissioning, service and installation with: Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers. * 4-pin M12 connector (Dcoded) * IE FC RJ45 connector * Degree of protection IP65/IP67 * Length: 2 m Other cables of type 6XV18715... can be found in the current "Industrial Identification Systems" (ID 10) catalog and the Industry Mall. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 424 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories The following industrial cables are used for fixed installation: Article number IE connecting cable M12-180/M12-180 (length) Note 6XV1870-8AE30 0.3 m 6XV1870-8AE50 0.5 m Prefitted IE FC TP trailing cable GP 2 x 2 (PROFINET type C): 6XV1870-8AH10 1.0 m * 6XV1870-8AH15 1.5 m 6XV1870-8AH20 2.0 m M12 prefitted at both sides (male/male) with two 4-pin M12 connectors (D-coded) 6XV1870-8AH30 3.0 m * Degree of protection IP65/67 6XV1870-8AH50 5.0 m * 6XV1870-8AN10 10 m Lengths: see adjacent column 6XV1870-8AN15 15 m Special lengths with cable outlet Note Special lengths with 90 or 180 cable outlet You can order special lengths with a 90 or 180 cable outlet angle, at: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/26999294) The cables are supplied with M12 plugs fitted at both ends. When necessary, the cables can be shortened at the other end from the reader and fitted with the following connectors, for example for an RJ-45 infrastructure: Article number IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 Note 6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0 Pack with 1 plug 6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0 Pack with 10 plugs 6GK1901-1BB10-2AE0 Pack with 50 plugs RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with: * 180 cable outlet * For network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface Note More cables and connectors You will find other cables and connectors in the Siemens AG ordering system. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 425 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories M16 - ASM cable This cable is for connection to ASM devices such as RFC180C and ASM456. Power can also be supplied via this cable allowing the reader to be operated with only one cable. This cable is suitable only for the SIMATIC MV420. Article number Cables Note 6GF3420-0AC00-2CB0 Adapter cable for RFID communication modules (ASM) Suitable for readers: * M16 connector (SIMATIC MV420) on M12 connector (communication module: M12 (male, 8-pin, straight) / M16 (female, 12-pin, straight) * Length: 2 m * Can be expanded in any way with standard communication module cables * 6GF3420-0AA20 * 6GF3420-0AA40 * 6GF3420-0AX20 * 6GF3420-0AX40 M16 power cable / power I/O cable / power I/O RS-232 cable These cables are used for the camera power supply. The power IO RS-232 cable also has wires for connecting digital inputs/outputs and the RS-232 serial interface. Article number Cables Note 6GF3400-0BH15 1.5 m MV400 push-pull power cable Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers 6GF3400-1BH20 * M16 with connector at one end (female, 12-pin, straight) * Prefitted push-pull * For power supply only, no I/O, no RS 232 * Length: 1.5 m 2 m MV400 push-pull power cable * M16 with connector at one end (female, 12-pin, straight) * Open end * Push-pull connector supplied * For power supply only, no I/O, no RS-232 * Length: 2 m Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 426 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories Article number Cables Note 6GF3440-8BA2 SIMATIC MV440/ SIMATIC MV420 power IO RS232 cable Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers 6GF3440-8BA4 14.2.3 SIMATIC MV440 14.2.3.1 Fittings for mounting * M16 with connector at one end (female, 12-pin, straight) * Open end * Length: 10 m * Power, DI/DO, RS-232 cable SIMATIC MV440/ SIMATIC MV420 Power IO RS232 cable * M16 with connector at one end (female, 12-pin, straight) * Open end * Length: 30 m * Power, DI/DO, RS-232 cable Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers Article number Fittings for mounting Note 6GF3440-8CA Mounting plate for reader, SIMATIC MV440 W x H x D (in mm): 80 x 80 x 60, Material: stainless steel (thickness: 4 mm) Mounting: Metric thread, photo thread (1/4", 2 x center) 6GF9002-7AD Triple plate holding system, SIMATIC MV440 W x H x D (in mm): 165 x 175 x 65, Material: stainless steel (thickness: 4 mm) Suitable for mounting of an MV440 with mounting plate 6GF3440-8CA SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 427 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories 14.2.3.2 Reader lens Reader lenses supported Article number Reader lenses Remark 6GF9001-1BB01 Mini lens 6 mm, 1:1.4 PENTAX C60636KP * Fixed focal distance * Aperture and focus adjustable * D = 32 mm, L = 37.5 mm * Fixed focal distance 6GF9001-1BE01 6GF9001-1BL01 6GF9001-1BF01 6GF9001-1BG01 6GF9001-1BH01 6GF9001-1BJ01 6GF9001-1BK01 Mini lens 8.5 mm, 1:1.5 PENTAX C815B(TH) Mini lens 12 mm, 1:1.4 PENTAX H1214-M(KP) Mini lens 16 mm, 1:1.4 PENTAX C1614-M(KP) Mini lens 25 mm, 1:1.4 PENTAX C2514-M(KP) Mini lens 35 mm, 1:1.6 PENTAX C3516-M(KP) Mini lens 50 mm, 1:2.8 PENTAX C5028-M(KP) Mini lens 75 mm, 1:2.8 PENTAX C7528-M(KP)) * Aperture and focus adjustable * D = 42 mm, L = 47 mm * Fixed focal distance * Aperture and focus adjustable * D = 29.5 mm, L = 35.7 mm * Fixed focal distance * Aperture and focus adjustable * D = 29.5 mm, L = 37.2 mm * Fixed focal distance * Aperture and focus adjustable * D = 29.5 mm, L = 38.9 mm * Fixed focal distance * Aperture and focus adjustable * D = 29.5 mm, L = 41.4 mm * Fixed focal distance * Aperture and focus adjustable * D = 29.5 mm, L = 38 mm * Fixed focal distance * Aperture and focus adjustable * D = 34 mm, L = 63.6 mm Finding the suitable lens and the size of the viewing window Note Configuration: necessary for finding the suitable lens The configuration is used to find the suitable lens. * Use the configuration table. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 428 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories You require the configuration table to find out which lens is suitable for SR, HR and UR readers. Table 14- 1 Configuration table Configuration Requirements I E T Near field (from 7 to 80 cm) Far field (from 0.5 to 3 m) Protective lens barrel 65, without internal lamp Components Article number Remark Built-in ring light red 6GF3440-8DA11 Built-in white ring light 6GF3440-8DA21 Built-in green ring light 6GF3440-8DA31 Built-in ring light, infrared 6GF3440-8DA41 Protective lens barrel 65 metal/glass 6GF3440-8AC11 Protective lens barrel 65 metal/PMMA 6GF3440-8AC21 Protective lens barrel 65 PC/PC 6GF3440-8AC12 External ring lamp Red light, clear 6GF3400-0LT018BA1 Accessories for operating the external lamps External ring lamp IR light, clear 6GF3400-0LT017BA1 * Protective lens barrel 65 metal/glass 6GF3440-8AC11 External ring light holder 6GF3440-8CD01 * Connecting cable for the lamp: Protective lens barrel 65 PC/PMMA 6GF3440-8AC21 Protective lens barrel 65 PC/PC 6GF3440-8AC12 Protective lens barrel 65 metal/glass 6GF3440-8AC11 Protective lens barrel 65 metal/PMMA 6GF3440-8AC21 Compact variant, minimal cabling work required. PC = Polycarbonate PMMA = Polymethyl methacrylate - Variant 1 Connection to the cabinet, cable length 10 m, 6GF3440-8BC4 - Version 2 Direct connection to SIMATIC MV420 or SIMATIC MV440. The ring light is supplied and controlled through the Power DIO RS-232 cable along with the reader. M16 male connector, M16 female connector, M12 female connector, cable length 25 cm, 6GF3440-8BD1. Protects wide lenses SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 429 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories SR reader The table below shows the suitable lens and the corresponding viewing window for the SR readers (resolution 640 x 480 pixels) for a data matrix code of the size 44 mm x 44 mm and a cell size of 1 mm. Distance lens front edge - object [in m] Article number of the lens Focal distance of the lens [f in mm; light intensity] Image width in mm Image height in mm Configuration 0.3 6GF9001-1BL01 f = 12; 1:1.4 121 90 I; (E; T) 0.4 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16;1:1.4 123 91 I; (E; T) 0.5 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16;1:1.4 152 114 I; (E; T) 0.6 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16;1:1.4 182 136 I; (E; T) 0.7 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25;1:1.4 134 100 I; (E; T) 0.8 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25;1:1.4 153 115 I; (E; T) 0.9 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25;1:1.4 173 129 E; T 1 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25;1:1.4 192 143 E; T 0.9 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 126 94 E; T 1 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 140 105 E; T 1.1 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 154 115 E; T 1.2 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 167 125 E; T 1.3 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 181 135 E; T 1.4 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 194 145 E; T 1.3 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 117 87 E; T 1.4 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 126 94 E; T 1.5 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 136 101 E; T 1.6 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 145 108 E; T 1.7 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 155 116 E; T 1.8 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 164 123 E; T 1.9 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 174 130 E; T 2 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 183 137 E; T 1.8 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 112 84 E; T 1.9 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 118 88 E; T 2.0 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 125 93 E; T 2.1 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 131 98 E; T 2.2 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 137 103 E; T 2.3 6GF9001-1BK01 + 6GF9001-1BV f = 75; 1:2.8 163 122 E; T 2.4 6GF9001-1BK01 + 6GF9001-1BV f = 75; 1:2.8 163 122 E; T 2.5 6GF9001-1BK01 + 6GF9001-1BV f = 75; 1:2.8 163 122 E; T 2.6 6GF9001-1BK01 + 6GF9001-1BV f = 75; 1:2.8 163 122 E; T SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 430 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories Distance lens front edge - object [in m] Article number of the lens Focal distance Image width of the lens in mm [f in mm; light intensity] Image height in mm Configuration 2.7 6GF9001-1BK01 + 6GF9001-1BV f = 75; 1:2.8 169 126 E; T 2.8 6GF9001-1BK01 + 6GF9001-1BV f = 75;1:2.8 175 131 E; T 2.9 6GF9001-1BK01 + 6GF9001-1BV f = 75; 1:2.8 182 136 E; T 3.0 6GF9001-1BK01 + 6GF9001-1BV f = 75; 1:2.8 188 141 E; T HR reader The table below shows the suitable lens and the corresponding viewing window for the HR readers (resolution 1024 x 768) for a data matrix code of the size 44 mm x 44 mm, a cell size of 1 mm. Distance lens front edge - object [in m] Article number of the lens Focal distance Image width of the lens in mm [f in mm; light intensity] Image height in mm Configuration 0.3 6GF9001-1BL01 f = 12; 1:1.4 121 90 I; (E; T) 0.4 6GF9001-1BL01 f = 12; 1:1.4 161 120 I; (E; T) 0.4 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16;1:1.4 123 91 I; (E; T) 0.5 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16;1:1.4 152 114 I; (E; T) 0.6 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16;1:1.4 182 136 I; (E; T) 0.6 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25;1:1.4 115 86 I; (E; T) 0.7 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25;1:1.4 134 100 I; (E; T) 0.8 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25;1:1.4 153 115 I; (E; T) 0.9 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25;1:1.4 173 129 E; T 1.0 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25;1:1.4 192 143 E; T 0.9 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 126 94 E; T 1.0 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 140 105 E; T 1.1 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 154 115 E; T 1.2 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 167 125 E; T 1.3 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 181 135 E; T 1.4 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 194 145 E; T 1.3 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 117 87 E; T 1.4 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 126 94 E; T 1.5 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 136 101 E; T 1.6 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 145 108 E; T 1.7 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 155 116 E; T 1.8 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 164 123 E; T 1.9 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 174 130 E; T SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 431 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories Distance lens front edge - object [in m] Article number of the lens Focal distance of the lens [f in mm; light intensity] Image width in mm Image height in mm Configuration 2.0 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 183 137 E; T 1.8 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 112 84 E; T 1.9 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 118 88 E; T 2.0 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 125 93 E; T 2.1 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 131 98 E; T 2.2 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 137 103 E; T 2.3 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 144 107 E; T 2.4 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 150 112 E; T 2.5 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 156 117 E; T 2.6 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 163 122 E; T 2.7 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 169 126 E; T 2.8 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 175 131 E; T 2.9 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75;1:2.8 182 136 E; T 3.0 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 188 141 E; T UR readers The table below shows the suitable lens and the corresponding viewing window for a UR reader (resolution 1600 x 1200 pixels) for a data matrix code of the size 44 mm x 44 mm, a cell size of 1 mm. Distance lens front edge - object in m Article number of the lens Focal distance of the lens [f in mm; light intensity] Image width in mm Image height in mm Configuration 0.2 6GF9001-1BL01 f = 12; 1:1.4 121 91 I; (E; T) 0.3 6GF9001-1BL01 f = 12; 1:1.4 177 133 I; (E; T) 0.4 6GF9001-1BL01 f = 12; 1:1.4 233 175 I; (E; T) Only suitable for distances of up to 0.5 m! 0.3 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16;1:1.4 136 102 I; (E; T) 0.4 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16;1:1.4 181 136 I; (E; T) 0.5 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16;1:1.4 226 170 I; (E; T) 0.5 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25;1:1.4 142 107 I; (E; T) 0.6 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25;1:1.4 169 127 I; (E; T) 0.7 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25;1:1.4 197 148 I; (E; T) 0.8 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25;1:1.4 225 169 I; (E; T) 0.9 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25;1:1.4 253 190 E; T 1 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25;1:1.4 281 211 E; T 0.9 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 186 140 E; T SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 432 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories Distance lens front edge - object in m Article number of the lens Focal distance Image width of the lens in mm [f in mm; light intensity] Image height in mm Configuration 1 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 155 E; T 1.1 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 226 170 E; T 1.2 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 246 185 E; T 1.3 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 266 200 E; T 1.4 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 286 215 E; T 1.3 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 174 131 E; T 1.4 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 188 141 E; T 1.5 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 202 152 E; T 1.6 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 216 162 E; T 1.7 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 230 173 E; T 1.8 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 243 182 E; T 1.9 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 257 193 E; T 2 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 270 203 E; T 1.8 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 170 128 E; T 1.9 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 180 135 E; T 2.0 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 190 143 E; T 2.1 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 200 150 E; T 2.2 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 210 157 E; T 2.3 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 219 164 E; T 2.4 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 227 171 E; T 2.5 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 236 177 E; T 2.6 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 246 185 E; T 2.7 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 256 192 E; T 2.8 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 265 199 E; T 2.9 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 275 207 E; T 3.0 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 284 214 E; T 14.2.3.3 206 Protective lens barrel Note See the dimension drawings in the image database for dimensions You will find the exact dimensions in the dimension drawings in the Image Database (http://www.automation.siemens.com/bilddb/) of Siemens AG. The protective lens barrel protects the mounted C-mount lenses with a very low IP-class of protection from influences such as water and oil SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 433 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories Protective lens barrel Protective lens barrel (diameter: 65 mm) that protects the lens and the internal lamp: For built-in metal/glass lamps For built-in plexiglass lamps Protective lens barrel for built-in lamps Article number 6GF3440-8AC11 Protective lens barrel Note D65 protective lens barrel metal/glass * Degree of protection: IP67 for SIMATIC MV440 readers - 6GF9001-1BL01 * Front pane: Glass - ...-1BF01 * Inner diameter: 57 mm - ...-1BG01 * Max. lens length: 57 mm - ...-1BH01 - ...-1BJ01 See also "Protective lens barrel extension" 6GF3440-8AC21 D65 protective lens barrel metal PMMA * Suitable lamps (article number): 6GF3440-8DA1 W x H x D [mm]: 65 x 65 x 60 * Suitable lenses (article number): For example, Degree of protection: IP67 for SIMATIC MV440 readers - 6GF9001-1BL01 * Front pane: PMMA - ...-1BF01 * Inner diameter: 57 mm - ...-1BG01 * Max. lens length: 57 mm - ...-1BH01 - ...-1BJ01 See also "Protective lens barrel extension" 6GF3440-8AC12 Suitable lenses (article number): For example, D65 protective lens barrel polycarbonate-polycarbonate * Suitable lamps (article number): 6GF3440-8DA1 W x H x D [mm]: 65 x 65 x 60 * Suitable lenses (article number): For example, Degree of protection: IP67 for SIMATIC MV440 readers * Front pane: Polycarbonate * Inner diameter: 53 mm * Max. lens length: 57 mm See also "Protective lens barrel extension" * - 6GF9001-1BL01 - ...-1BF01 - ...-1BG01 - ...-1BH01 - ...-1BJ01 Suitable lamps (article number): 6GF3440-8DA1 W x H x D [mm]: 65 x 65 x 60 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 434 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories Protective lens barrel extension Article number Protective lens barrel extension Note 6GF3440-8AC13 D65 protective lens barrel extension Matching the following D65 protective lens barrels: Degree of protection: IP67 for SIMATIC MV440 readers 14.2.3.4 * 6GF3440-8AC11 * Inner diameter: 57 mm * 6GF3440-8AC21 * Height: 48 mm * Effective extension (without thread): 35 mm * 6GF3440-8AC12 Requires an extension of the optical components; for example, with a configuration for the close-up range by using a mini lens 75 mm. Built-in ring light Article number Ring light Note 6GF3440-8DA11 SIMATIC MV440 built-in ring light red Mounting materials supplied; to achieve IP67 degree of protection, one of the protective lens barrels is also needed: 6GF3440-8DA21 6GF3440-8DA31 6GF3440-8DA41 14.2.3.5 * Light source: LED red (618 nm) * Lighting distance up to 0.8 m SIMATIC MV440 built-in ring light white * Light source: White LED (440 nm ... 650 nm) * Lighting distance up to 0.8 m Light source: Green LED (513 nm ... 543 nm) * Lighting distance up to 0.8 m 6GF3440-8AC11 * 6GF3440-8AC12 * 6GF3440-8AC21 Without a protective lens barrel, the camera achieves only IP20 degree of protection. SIMATIC MV440 built-in ring light green * * SIMATIC MV440 built-in ring light infrared * Light source: LED infrared (850 nm) * Lighting distance up to 0.8 m Licenses Text-Genius license (SIMATIC MV400) This license is suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers and allows reading of plain text (OCR). Article number License Note 6GF3400-0SL01 SIMATIC MV400 Text-Genius license Suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers as of firmware V3.0 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 435 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories Text-Genius Plus license (SIMATIC MV400) This license is suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers. It provides all functions of the TextGenius license 6GF3400-0SL01 plus adjustment of plain text reading (OCR) for customerspecific fonts. Article number License Note 6GF3400-1SL01 SIMATIC MV400 Text-Genius-Plus license Suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers as of firmware V5.0 Veri-Genius license (SIMATIC MV400) This license is suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers and allows code verification. Article number License Note 6GF3400-0SL02 SIMATIC MV400 Veri-Genius license Suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers as of firmware V4.0 Pat-Genius license (SIMATIC MV400) This license is suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers and allows object recognition in image information. 14.2.3.6 Article number License Note 6GF3400-0SL03 SIMATIC MV400 Pat-Genius license Suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers as of firmware V6.0 Calibration card The calibration card is required for reliable operation of the SIMATIC MV440 reader with verification functionality. The calibration card is supplied with the SIMATIC MV400 VeriGenius license 6GF3400-0SL02. Article number Calibration card Note 6GF3440-8CE (A5E02401759) Calibration card Suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers Dimensions (W x H x D): 45 x 70 x 75 mm SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 436 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories 14.2.3.7 PoE switch Note PoE functionality not available for older devices The PoE functionality is not available for older devices with the following article numbers: * 6GF3440-0CD10 * 6GF3440-0GE10 * 6GF3440-0CD11 * 6GF3440-0GE11 * 6GF3440-0CD21 The following "PoE switches" are suitable for supplying power to the SIMATIC MV440 readers via the Ethernet cable. Article number PoE switch Note 6GK5108-0PA00-2AA3 SCALANCE X108POE 6GK5308-2QG00-2AA2 SCALANCE X308-2M POE Suitable for SIMATIC MV440 readers with a PoE connector: 6GK5324-4QG00-1AR2 SCALANCE XR324-12M POE * 6GF3440-1CD10 * 6GF3440-1GE10 * 6GF3440-1LE10 6GK5324-4QG00-1HR2 6GK5324-4QG00-3AR2 SCALANCE XR324-4M POE 6GK5324-4QG00-3HR2 14.2.3.8 Cables SIMATIC MV440 readers are fitted with three M12 plugs / M16 sockets. The connectors have the following functions: M12 - Ethernet cable M12/RJ-45 M12 - ASM cable M16 - Power IO RS-232 cable M16 - Power I/O cable Note Ordering information * Either one or all three cables are required depending on the application. The cables are not part of a complete package and must always be ordered separately. * There is more than one version of each cable type. In this case, you simply need to order one version per reader. M12 - Ethernet cable M12/RJ-45 This cable connects the reader with a communication partner over Ethernet. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 437 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories Due to its short length, the following cable is intended only for commissioning and service: Article number IE connecting cable M12-180/ IE FC RJ45-145 Note 6XV1871-5TH20 Prefitted IE FC TP trailing cable GP 2 x 2 (PROFINET type C) for commissioning, service and installation with: Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers. * 4-pin M12 connector (Dcoded) * IE FC RJ45 connector * Degree of protection IP65/IP67 * Length: 2 m Other cables of type 6XV18715... can be found in the current "Industrial Identification Systems" (ID 10) catalog and the Industry Mall. The following industrial cables are used for fixed installation: Article number IE connecting cable M12-180/M12-180 (length) Note 6XV1870-8AE30 0.3 m 6XV1870-8AE50 0.5 m Prefitted IE FC TP trailing cable GP 2 x 2 (PROFINET type C): 6XV1870-8AH10 1.0 m * 6XV1870-8AH15 1.5 m 6XV1870-8AH20 2.0 m M12 prefitted at both sides (male/male) with two 4-pin M12 connectors (D-coded) 6XV1870-8AH30 3.0 m * Degree of protection IP65/67 6XV1870-8AH50 5.0 m * 6XV1870-8AN10 10 m Lengths: see adjacent column 6XV1870-8AN15 15 m Special lengths with cable outlet Note Special lengths with 90 or 180 cable outlet You can order special lengths with a 90 or 180 cable outlet angle, at: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/26999294) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 438 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories The cables are supplied with M12 plugs fitted at both ends. When necessary, the cables can be shortened at the other end from the reader and fitted with the following connectors, for example, for an RJ-45 infrastructure: Article number IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 Note 6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0 Pack with 1 plug 6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0 Pack with 10 plugs 6GK1901-1BB10-2AE0 Pack with 50 plugs RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with: * 180 cable outlet * For network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface Note More cables and connectors You will find more cables and connectors in the Siemens AG ordering system. M12 - ASM cable This cable is for connection to ASM devices such as RFC180C and ASM456. Power can also be supplied through this cable allowing the reader to be operated with only one cable. Article number Cables 6GT2891-4FH20 * M12 (male, 8-pin, straight) / M12 (female, 8-pin, straight) Connecting or extension cable RS422, M12 / M12: * Length 2 m * * M12 (male, 8-pin, straight) / M12 (female, 8-pin, straight) * Length 5 m Connecting cable prefabricated between ASM 456, RF170C, RF180C and reader. * * M12 (male, 8-pin, straight) / M12 (female, 8-pin, straight) * Length 10 m Extension cable for ASM 456, RF170C and RF180C with MOBY D/E/I/U and SIMATIC RF300. * M12 (male, 8-pin, straight) / M12 (female, 8-pin, straight) * Length 20 m * M12 (male, 8-pin, straight) / M12 (female, 8-pin, straight) * Length 50 m 6GT2891-4FH50 6GT2891-4FN10 6GT2891-4FN20 6GT2891-4FN50 Note SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 439 Components of the product/spares/accessories 14.2 Accessories M16 power cable / power I/O cable / power I/O RS-232 cable These cables are used for the camera power supply. The Power IO RS-232 cable also has wires for connecting digital inputs/outputs and the RS-232 serial interface. Article number Cables Note 6GF3400-0BH15 1.5 m MV400 push-pull power cable Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers 6GF3400-1BH20 6GF3440-8BA2 6GF3440-8BA4 * M16 with connector at one end (female, 12-pin, straight) * Prefitted push-pull * For power supply only, no I/O, no RS 232 * Length: 1.5 m 2 m MV400 push-pull power cable * M16 with connector at one end (female, 12-pin, straight) * Open end * Push-pull connector supplied * For power supply only, no I/O, no RS-232 * Length: 2 m SIMATIC MV440/ SIMATIC MV420 Power IO RS232 cable * M16 with connector at one end (female, 12-pin, straight) * Open end * Length: 10 m * Power, DI/DO, RS-232 cable SIMATIC MV440/ SIMATIC MV420 Power IO RS232 cable * M16 with connector at one end (female, 12-pin, straight) * Open end * Length: 30 m * Power, DI/DO, RS-232 cable Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 A Appendix A.1 Service and Support Technical Support You can contact Technical Support for all Process Industries and Drives products as follows: Phone: + 49 (0) 911 895 7222 Fax: + 49 (0) 911 895 7223 Internet: Online support request form: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/requests) Contact partner If you have any further questions on the use of our products, please contact one of our representatives at your local Siemens office. The addresses are found on the following pages: On the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/aspa_app) In Catalog CA 01 In the catalog ID 10 for Industrial identification systems Service and Support at Process Industries and Drives (PD) You will find various services on the Support homepage (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/) of PD on the Internet. There you will find the following information, for example: Our newsletter containing up-to-date information on your products. Relevant documentation for your application, which you can access via the search function in "Product Support". A forum for global information exchange by users and specialists. Your local PD representative. Information about on-site service, repairs, spare parts, and much more can be found under "Our service offer". SIMATIC Ident home page For the latest general information about our identification systems, visit us on the Internet at Identification systems home page (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/identification-systems/). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 441 Appendix A.2 Directives and declarations SIMATIC documentation on the Internet A guide to the technical documentation for the various SIMATIC products and systems is available on the Internet: SIMATIC Guide manuals (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal) Online catalog and ordering system The online catalog and the online ordering system can also be found on the Industry Mall home page (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). Training center We offer appropriate courses to get you started. Please contact your local training center or the central training center in D-90327 Nuremberg. Phone: +49 (0) 180 523 56 11 ( 0.14 /min. from the German landline network, deviating mobile communications prices are possible) For information about courses, see the SITRAIN homepage (http://sitrain.automation.siemens.com/sitrainworld/). A.2 Directives and declarations CE mark The SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 readers meet the requirements and protective aims of the following EU directive. EMC Directive The devices meet the requirements of the EU directive "89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility" (modified by 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC) and are designed for use in an industrial environment in accordance with the CE mark. Area of application Industry Requirements Emission Immunity EN 61000-6-4: 2007 + A1: 2011 EN 61000-6-2: 2001 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 442 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Appendix A.2 Directives and declarations Declaration of Conformity The EC Declaration of Conformity and corresponding documentation is available for the responsible authorities according to the above-mentioned EC Directive at the following address: Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Industry Automation Sensors and Communication P.O.Box 4848 90437 NUERNBERG GERMANY Your marketing contact can provide these if requested. Installation guidelines The installation guidelines and safety notices specified in the documentation must be adhered to during commissioning and operation. DIN ISO 9001 certificate The quality assurance system of our entire product manufacturing process (development, production, and marketing) meets the requirements of DIN ISO 9001 (corresponds to EN29001: 1987). This was confirmed by DQS (Deutsche Gesellschaft zur Zertifizierung von Qualitatsmanagementsystemen mbH). EQ-Net certificate number: 1323-01 License agreement for supplied software The device is supplied with software installed. Please note the corresponding license agreements. EMC USA Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Shielded cables Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with FCC regulations. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 443 Appendix A.2 Directives and declarations USA Modifications Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Conditions of operations This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CANADA Canadian notice This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numerique de la classe b est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada. AUSTRALIA This product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 3548 Norm (Class A). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 444 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 ESD guidelines B Definition of ESD All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components. Due to their design, these electronic elements are highly sensitive to overvoltage, and thus to any electrostatic discharge. The electrostatic sensitive components/modules are commonly referred to as ESD devices. This is also the international abbreviation for such devices. ESD modules are identified by the following symbol: NOTICE ESD devices can be destroyed by voltages well below the threshold of human perception. These static voltages develop when you touch a component or electrical connection of a device without having drained the static charges present on your body. The electrostatic discharge current may lead to latent failure of a module, that is, this damage may not be significant immediately, but in operation may cause malfunction. Electrostatic charging Anyone who is not connected to the electrical potential of their surroundings can be electrostatically charged. The figure below shows the maximum electrostatic voltage which may build up on a person coming into contact with the materials indicated. These values correspond to IEC 801-2 specifications. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 445 ESD guidelines Figure B-1 Electrostatic voltages on an operator Basic protective measures against electrostatic discharge Ensure good grounding: When handling electrostatic sensitive devices, ensure that your body, the workplace and packaging are grounded. This prevents electrostatic charge. Avoid direct contact: As a general rule, only touch electrostatic sensitive devices when this is unavoidable (e.g. during maintenance work). Handle the modules without touching any chip pins or PCB traces. In this way, the discharged energy can not affect the sensitive devices. Discharge your body before you start taking any measurements on a module. Do so by touching grounded metallic parts. Always use grounded measuring instruments. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 446 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 List of abbreviations and acronyms C Abbreviation/symbol Explanation Degrees C Degrees Celsius A Ampere (SI unit of electric current) AIM Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility ANSI American National Standards Institute - the name of the US institute for standardizing industrial processes. ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASM Interface module, synonym of communication module STL Statement List BF Bus fault Bit Binary digit Byte Binary term (1 byte = 8 bits) approx. approximately CD Compact Disc CCD Charge Coupled Device CE Communautes Europeenes (French for European Communities) cm Square centimeters CPU Central Processing Unit CSV Character Separated Values DB Data block DC Direct Current DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DI Digital Input DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normung e. V. (German standards association) DISA Disable DMC Data Matrix Code DNS Domain Name System DO Digital Output DP Distributed Peripheral I/O DPM Direct Part Marking DVD Digital Versatile Disc EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EIA Electronic Industries Alliance EMC Electro Magnetic Compatibility EN Europaische Norm (European standard) ES Product version ESD Electrostatic Discharge SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 447 List of abbreviations and acronyms Abbreviation/symbol Explanation FB Function Block FBD Function Block Diagram GND Ground GSD Generic Station Description IAQG International Aerospace Quality Group I/O Input/Output ISO International Standards Organization (from Greek: "isos"; Engl. "equal") IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IP Internet Protocol or International Protection HF High Frequency H2S Hydrogen sulfide hPa Hectopascal HR High Resolution HTML Hypertext Markup Language HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol kg Kilogram LAD Ladder Diagram LAN Local Area Network LCD Liquid Crystal Display LED Light emitting diode MAC Media Access Control max. Maximum MB = Mbit 106 bits MHz Megahertz mil milli-inches min Minute m Meter mm Square millimeter MTBF Mean operating Time Between Failures MTTR Mean Time To Recover LF Low Frequency OCR Optical Character Recognition OCV Optical Character Verification PC Personal Computer, a stationary single-user computer PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage PG Programming device PIB Proxy Ident Function Block PROFIBUS Process Field Bus, international fieldbus standard to EN 50170/IEC 61158 PTB Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt (German technical inspectorate) RAM Random Access Memory SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 448 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 List of abbreviations and acronyms Abbreviation/symbol Explanation RFID standard profile Implementation of the "Proxy Ident Function Block" (PIB), synonym of Ident profile ROI Region Of Interest RH Relative Humidity Rps Reads per second RS Recommended Standard RS232 (also EIA-232) Identifies an interface standard for a sequential, serial data transmission. RS-422 (also EIA-422) Identifies an interface standard for a differential, serial data transmission. RS-485 (also EIA-485) Identifies an interface standard for a differential, serial data transmission. ROM Read Only Memory Rx Receive (Rx) identifies a receiver s Second SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage SF Group error (German Sammelfehler) SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SO2 Sulfur dioxide PLC Programmable Logic Controller SR Standard Resolution t Time T Temperature TCP Transmission Control Protocol TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol; a reference model for communication on the Internet Tx Transmit (Tx) identifies a transmitter URL Uniform Resource Locator V Volt (SI unit of voltage) VDE Verband der Elektrotechnik, Elektronik und Informationstechnik (German Association for Electrical, Electronic and Information Technologies) WAN Wide Area Network XML EXtensible Markup Language e. g. for example SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 449 List of abbreviations and acronyms SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 450 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Glossary Actuator Component at the output section of a controlled system that intervenes in energy or mass flows and causes changes. ASM Interface module, synonym of communication module. ASM 456 The ASM 456 communication modules are slave modules for operating components via PROFIBUS DP/DP-V1 on any controller. Automation system An automation system is a programmable logic controller consisting of at least a central processing unit, a variety of input and output modules as well as operator control and monitoring (HMI) devices. Bus A cable or conductor system used for data transfer among the components of a computer system. An important characteristic of a bus is the number of bits the bus transmits simultaneously. There are serial bus systems (one bit after the other) and parallel bus systems (multiple bits simultaneously over several lines). Communication module Communication modules can be used to integrate RFID readers and code reading systems into an automation system, e.g. PROFINET, PROFIBUS, or even ET 200pro distributed I/O. Integration is independent of the technology actually employed. The reader always communicates with the communication module via an RS-422 interface. Contour Solid line that runs completely along the border of an object, in other words, it consists solely of border points. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 451 Glossary Counter A counter registers the state changes (edges) of a digital signal. With each state change, the counter increases (increments) or decreases (decrements) a value that is then evaluated by SIMATIC S7 or a PLC. CSV file A CSV file is a text file for storage or for exchange of simply structured data; these files can be read, for example, with Microsoft Excel. CustomGUI A custom user interface that communicates with the reader via the Web API. Debouncing In electrical switching or key contacts, a permanent electrical contact is not immediately established when the contact closes. The connection opens and closes several times within a fraction of a second. With digital input devices (for example, computer keyboards or input controllers on keypads), this bouncing effect causes each occurrence of the contact to be registered as a separate input (multiple input). Since the discovery of the phenomenon, various hardware and software solutions have been developed. Counteracting this effect is known as debouncing (debouncing circuit or routine). DHCP client Each device with network capability that supports communication with a DHCP server to obtain dynamically leased IP configurations and other optional parameter information. DHCP server A computer on which the Microsoft DHCP service runs. This provides active DHCP clients with dynamic configuration of IP addresses and related information. Distortion Image error that becomes evident in the image of a rectangular grid where the straight lines are bent inwards or outwards. DNS server A hierarchically distributed database containing assignments of DNS domain names to various data types, such as IP addresses. DNS enables computers and services to be searched for based on user-friendly names. DNS also enables searches for other information stored in the database. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 452 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Glossary Download In communications, to transfer a data copies from a remote computer to the requesting computer, for example, to send the operating system from a PC to a controller. D-sub Type identification for a connector. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A TCP/IP service protocol that allows dynamic configurations of host IP addresses for a certain time and distributes related configuration parameters to authorized network clients. DHCP provides safe and simple-to-use configuration of TCP/IP networks, prevents address conflicts and helps to restrict the number of IP addresses required in the network. DHCP uses a client/server model in which the DHCP server takes over central management of IP addresses used in the network. Clients with DHCP support can then request and obtain the lease of an IP address from a DHCP server when the network starts up. Endian Data is sometimes saved in a different order in certain computer architectures. Intel-based computers, for example, save the data differently from the Siemens controllers (S7), namely, in reverse sequence. The byte sequence from Intel, termed Little Endian, is therefore the reverse S7 byte sequence, Big Endian. The following applies to these two forms: Little Endian: The most significant byte is located at the right end of a word. Big Endian: The most significant byte is located at the left end of a word. Ethernet This is a specific type of local network that works according to a standard defined by Intel, DEC and Xerox. Firmware Software routines stored in the Read-Only Memory (ROM). Startup routines and machinelevel I/O commands are stored in the firmware. In terms of user friendliness, firmware takes an intermediate position between software and hardware. Function Block Diagram Function Block Diagram is a graphic representation of control functions. Each control function has a corresponding symbol. Gateway This is a device that is connected to more than one physical TCP/IP network and can forward or distribute IP packets. A gateway translates various transport protocols or data SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 453 Glossary formats (such as IPX and IP) and is added to networks mainly because of this translation function. Gateways are also known as IP routers. Host name The DNS name of a device on a network. These names are used to locate a computer in the network. Before a computer can be found, its host name must be listed in the host file or be known to a DNS server. On most computers running Windows, the host name and computer name are identical. HR HR stands for the resolution 1024x768 pixels (width to height ratio 4:3, 12:9) regardless of other parameters. Ident profile Implementation of the "Proxy Ident Function Block" (PIB) from PROFIBUS INTERNATIONAL for SIMATIC S7. Synonomous to RFID standard profile. IP address A 32-bit address to identify a node in an IP network. Each node in the IP network is be assigned a unique IP address. This consists of the network ID and a unique host ID. This address is typically represented with the decimal value of each octet separated by a period, for example, 192.168.7.27. In this version of Windows, you can configure a static IP address or have it configured dynamically by DHCP. Ladder diagram Graphic representation of the control functions based on circuit diagrams from contactor technology. The current paths are arranged horizontally one below the other and the symbols used are different. MAC address The MAC address is the hardware address for each network device (network card, switch , etc.) and is used for unique identification of the device in the network. The MAC address is burned into a chip and cannot normally be modified. Main ROI or ROI Region of Interest. The main ROI is the area with characteristics of the specimens relevant for image processing. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 454 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Glossary Master The device configured as master in a communications system passes on data to the device configured as slave. The master is always the active partner. MOBY-ASM The term MOBY-ASM covers all communication modules (ASM) that use the RFID industrial standard MOBY, for example SIMATIC RF180C or ASM 456. N type The load switches from 0 V to 24 V DC and the input is switched to 24 V DC. OCR OCR ("Ooptical Ccharacter Rrecognition") is a term from the IT sector and refers to automatic text recognition in images. This add-on feature enables the reader to detect and read human-readable plain text in an image in addition to machine-readable codes. OCV With the OCV ("Optical Character Verification"), the reader can compare the read plain text to target specifications and detect deviations in the reading result. The OCV function is very different from a printing inspection, which involves comparison of the printed image with a template. This task is not covered by the OCV function. P type The load switches from 24 to 0 V DC and the input is switched to 0 V DC. Persistence Persistence is the capability of storing data structures or objects in non-volatile storage media such as file systems or databases. In other words, data is saved to non-volatile memory in the reader. PIB Proxy Ident Function Block from PROFIBUS INTERNATIONAL, article number 3.142. Pick-and-place Loading and removal of parts. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 455 Glossary Ping A utility for checking connections to one or more remote hosts. The "ping" command uses the echo packets and echo replies of ICMP to check connectivity with an IP system in a network. Ping is useful in troubleshooting the IP network or the router. Port or port address Address for a channel for data transfer between an input or output device and the processor. From the CPU's perspective, a port represents one or more memory addresses to which it can send data or from which it can receive data. Special hardware such as expansion boards places data from a device in the memory addresses and sends data from these addresses to the device. Some ports are only for input and some only for output. Power over Ethernet (PoE) "Power over Ethernet" (PoE) is the name of a technology with which network devices can be supplied with power via the 8-wire Ethernet cable. The main advantage of "Power over Ethernet" is that the power supply cable is no longer necessary: Devices connected to Ethernet can be installed in less accessible areas or in areas in which large numbers of cables would be inconvenient. On the one hand, this means a drastic reduction of installation costs. On the other hand, a central uninterruptible power supply (USP) that is simple to implement increases the protection against failure of the connected devices. PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DP is used to control readers and other actuators using a central controller in production engineering. It is also used in connection with "distributed intelligence", i.e. connecting multiple controllers to form a network. It provides data transmission up to 12 Mbps on twisted-pair cables and data transmission over sliding contacts for mobile subscribers in exceptional cases or optical data transmission in unobstructed space. PROFINET device A PROFINET IO system is made up of the following devices: An I/O controller is a controller or PC that controls automation tasks. An I/O device is a field device that is configured and controlled by an I/O controller. An I/O device is made up of several modules and submodules. I/O Supervisor is a development tool typically based on a PC that is used to assign parameters to and perform diagnostics on individual I/O devices, and to configure the entire plant. The I/O controller gets its data from the I/O Supervisor and configures the I/O device based on this. An application relation (AR) is formed between an I/O controller and I/O device. Communication relations (CR) with varying properties are specified for the transfer of parameters, cyclic data communication and alarm handling based on this AR. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 456 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Glossary The properties and options of an I/O device are described in a Generic Station Description (GSD) file. This file is written in GSDML (GSD Markup Language) - an extension of XML and is used as a planning tool to plan the configuration for PROFINET IO systems. PROFINET IO PROFINET IO (Input Output) is used for controlling readers and other actuators using a central controller in production engineering. Proxy A computer that receives broadcast name queries and answers to names that do not go to the local subnet. To evaluate the names, the proxy communicates with a WINS server and retains the names in the cache for a certain time. RF180C The RF180C communication module is a module for operating RFID components via PROFINET IO on any controller. RFID standard profile Synonym of Ident profile. Sensor Technically speaking, a (measuring) sensor is a component which can measure, in addition to certain physical or chemical properties, qualitative material features or quantitative measured values of its environment. Physical or chemical properties are, for example: Thermal radiation Temperature Moisture Pressure Sound pressure Sound Brightness Magnetism Acceleration Force SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 457 Glossary Server Network station that provides services and resources for other stations. For example, a computer that manages data and passes this on to other computers as needed. Shutter speed: Shutter speed The shutter speed decides how long the CCD sensor of a camera is exposed. When more light is available, the operator can select a faster shutter speed and vice versa. At slow shutter speeds, there is greater risk that the image will suffer from "camera shake". SIMATIC S7 Siemens automation system with the controller families SIMATIC S7-300 and SIMATIC S7400. Slave The device configured as slave in a communications system receives data from the device configured as master. The slave is always the passive partner. SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a protocol for managing networks and nodes in the network. To transmit data, SNMP uses the connectionless UDP protocol. SNTP: Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP is a simplified version of NTP. NTP is a standard for synchronizing clocks in computer systems using packet-based communication networks. SP1 Service Pack 1: Supplementary software for the Microsoft Windows XP Professional operating system and Internet Explorer 6.0. SR SR stands for the resolution 640 x 480 or 768 x 480 regardless of other parameters. Statement list Statement List is a user program in which the control functions are listed in the form of statements. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 458 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Glossary STEP 7 STEP 7 is the software package for configuring and programming SIMATIC automation systems. It is part of the SIMATIC industrial software. Sub-ROI The area in the main ROI with characteristics of the specimens of special relevance for image processing. Sub-ROIs are created when the characteristics of the main ROI are not adequate for evaluation. Switch: A switch is an electronic device for connecting several computers or network segments in a local network (LAN) - similar to a hub. A switch is also known as an intelligent hub. In its original form, the switch operates on layer 2 (Data Link layer) of the OSI model. The switch processes 48-bit MAC addresses and creates an SAT (Source Address Table). The switch has properties similar to a bridge and is also known as a multi-port bridge. Ethernet switch is the shortened form, of switching hub and indicates the ability to operate switched Ethernet. Template The template contains the default settings. These are used, for example, to create a new program with just a few clicks of the mouse. The settings made in the Adjustment - "Set image" task are saved in the template. The template is the basis for creating a new program in the "Programs" task. Trigger A trigger is a switch that activates an action when a specific event occurs. URL: Uniform Resource Locator An address uniquely identifying a location on the Internet. A URL for a WWW page is preceded by http://. A URL can contain other details such as the name of a hypertext page normally identified by the file name extension HTML or HTM. User interface Software: Web server application, in which most operator actions are performed on the PC screen using a mouse and keyboard. The software processes and displays models. Web API The Web API is a web interface that can be used to program a custom user interface. Parameter values of the reader can be read and written via Web API. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 459 Glossary SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 460 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Index A Access protection, 33 Additional information, 6 ASM cable For SIMATIC MV420, 426 SIMATIC MV440, 439 ASM cable length, 151 ASM connection, 407 Automation License Manager ALM, 177 B Built-in ring light, 413 SIMATIC MV420, 424 SIMATIC MV440, 435 C Cable pin assignment MV400 push-pull power cable, 155 Power IO RS-232 cable, 153 Cable sockets, 152 Cables Special lengths with cable outlet, 425, 438 Calibration card SIMATIC MV440, 436 Changing passwords For security reasons, 12 Character font library Defining your own character fonts, 233 Using character fonts in OCR steps, 233 Climatic ambient conditions, 398 Climatic conditions Atmospheric pressure, 398 Temperature, 398 Configuration Avoiding interference, 149 Configuration via remote client, 33 Configuration table Finding the suitable lens, 429 Connecting cables External lighting unit, 159 Connecting safety extra-low voltage SELV, 150 Connecting the power supply, 36, 151 Connection Reader, 149 Contact partner, 441 Contacts worldwide, 6 Control via an automation system, 197 Courses, 442 D Device information Info, 255 Device information, 255 Device replacement, 285 Diag. & monitoring, 248 Options, 248 Diagnostic information, 375 Diagnostics Error messages, 375 Warnings/notes, 375 Diagnostics, 253 Information, 253 Diagnostics Read results, 375 Diagnostics functions, 33 Digital out XMATCH, 354 DISA bit, 258 Disruptions, 149 E Electromagnetic compatibility, 398 Environmental protection, 11 Error display, 260 Error message Calibrate, 383 Normalization, 382 ESD guidelines, 445 Ethernet cable M12/RJ-45, 424, 437 Ethernet connection, 407 Example Archiving diagnostic information on PC, 369 Link with FB79, 369 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 461 Index External power supply Protection, 151, 151 Extras, 250 Options, 250 F Field of vision depending on camera distance For a focal distance of 16 mm, 423 For a focal distance of 6 mm, 421 Filter error, 388 Finding the suitable lens Configuration table, 429 Firmware, 6, 258 Full update, 258 Incremental update, 258 Fittings for mounting SIMATIC MV420, 421 SIMATIC MV440, 427 Function block FB79, 322 Fuse, 398 G Guarantee, 36 Guidelines ESD guidelines, 445 H Handshaking, 321 History, 6 I I/O interface N type, 157 P type, 157 Image acquisition, 32 Image control, 194, 200, 211 Image sensor Protection against damaging radiation, 37 Incorrect response due to interference signals, 149 Info Device information, 255 Statistics, 251 Information Device information, 251 Diagnostics, 251, 253 Statistics, 251 Initialization With program selection, 293 Without program selection, 293 Installation guidelines, 149 Installation instructions, 166 Installing SIMATIC MV420 reader, 142, 145 Integration PROFINET IO device, 280 Interfaces Communication, 203 Parameter, 203 J Job execution, 328 L LED ETHERNET, 198, 375 POWER, 375 STATE/SF, 198, 375 Lens Suitable, License Pat-Genius license (SIMATIC MV440), 436 Text-Genius license (SIMATIC MV440), 435 Text-Genius Plus license (SIMATIC MV440), 436 Transferring, 178 Veri-Genius license (SIMATIC MV440), 436 Lighting, 245 Options, 245 Lighting unit VS100, 410 Lighting unit MV400 LED ring light metal IR clear, 410 MV400 LED ring light metal red clear, 410 M Maintenance, 395 MATCH command, 122 MIB, 368 Module Electrostatic discharge, 36 Module sensitive to electrostatic discharge, 36 Mounting bracket SIMATIC MV420, 412 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 462 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 Index Mounting plate SIMATIC MV420, 412 SIMATIC MV440, 411 MV400 push-pull power cable Cable pin assignment, 155 N Notes on installation, 166 O One-dimensional code, 39 Operating instructions on the Internet, 5 Operating status Stop, 260 Optical Character Recognition, 90 Optical Character Verification, 90 Options Diag. & monitoring, 248 Extras, 250 Lighting, 245 Security, 246 Overvoltage protection, 37 P Parameter, 325 PoE switch SIMATIC MV440, 437 Power cable, 426, 440 Power I/O cable, 426, 440 Power IO RS-232 cable, 426, 440 Cable pin assignment, 153 Power IO RS-232 connection, 407, 408 Power IO RS-232 interface N type, 158 P type, 158 Power supply, 398, 398 Processing code, 33 Processing mode, 242 PROFINET IO device Integration, 280 Program number, 250 Program saving procedure, 339 Program sequence, 250 Programs Template, 209 PRONETA Installation, 165 Protection against damaging radiation Image sensor, 37 Protection of the external power supply, 151 Protective cap for lens screw connection, 407 Protective lens barrel, 412 Protective lens barrel Installing the SIMATIC MV440 reader, 142 Protective lens barrel SIMATIC MV420, 423 Protective lens barrel For built-in lamps (SIMATIC MV440), 434 Protective lens barrel extension, 435 Proxy Server, 398 Pseudocode example XML backup, 363 XML restore, 365 R Reader Connection, 149 control via an automation system, 197 Diagnostic information, 375 Key functions of the reader, 19 Reader lens SIMATIC MV420, 421 SIMATIC MV440, 428 Reader operating modes DHCP, 188 DHCP server, 188 Manual, 188 PROFINET mode, 188 Recycling, 11 Relative humidity, 398 Repair, 395 Ring light holder, 411 ROI moving with mouse or keyboard, 195, 201 S Save program, 338 Saving acquired images, 239 Scanner portal, 33 Scanner portal application Restrictions, 356 Scope for devices, 3 for licenses, 3 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 463 Index Security, 246 Options, 246 Select program, 336 SELV Connecting safety extra-low voltage, 150 Server Proxy, 398 SIMATIC documentation On the Internet, 442 SIMATIC MV420 reader Degree of protection, 402 Starting current, 402 SIMATIC MV440 reader Degree of protection, 400 Starting current, 400 SNMP, 368 Start processing, 339 Statistics, 251 Info, 251 Stop, 260 System components, 29 System configuration, 29, 125 System expansions, 36 System requirement PC/programming device, 31 Reader, 30 System requirements, 30 System setup PROFINET IO, 128 V Verification library, 76 Calibrate reader for code verification, 229 Define verification settings, 229 Versions Available versions, 20 W Worldwide Contact partner, 6 X XMATCH Structure of the user data, 350 XMATCH command, 119, 302, 349 XMATCH user data Examples, 353 T Technical Support, 441 Temperature, 398 Template key function, 209 Torx, 409 Track&Trace, 33 Training, 442 Transferring A license, 178 Two-dimensional code, 39 U User interface, 32 User management, 33 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 464 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03